8050 C500 Cf5001manual

SERVICE MANUAL
FIELD SERVICE
8050/CF5001
C500
8150
2004. 12
Ver. 3.0
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to
the copier, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that
all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed.
Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service
Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while servicing the copier for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical
training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND

CAUTION
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions
DANGER,
WARNING, and
CAUTION is defined
as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.

When servicing the copier, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance,
etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

WARNING:Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION :Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and
property damage
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier.

:Prohibition when using the copier.
:Direction when using the copier.
General precaution
Electric hazard
High temperature
General prohibition
Do not touch with wet hand
Do not disassemble
General instruction
Unplug
Ground/Earth
S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS
1.
MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY

KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Konica Minolta brand copiers are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design
and a solid service network.
Copier design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical aspects
have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore
strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.
PROHIBITED ACTIONS
DANGER
Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT. Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, solder or similar object.
Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)
Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by KMBT
Using parts not specified by KMBT
S-2
2.
CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
Konica Minolta brand copiers are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met,
in order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily
use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability,
the CE must perform regular safety checks.
2.1 Power Supply
Connection to Power Supply

WARNING
Check that mains voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
kw
If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load
must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same configuration as the
plug.
Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power
supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.
If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer to contact qualified electrician for the installation.
Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the
risk of fire.
Ground Lead
WARNING
Check whether the copier is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded copier, you may suffer electric
shock while operating the copier. Connect the ground lead to one of the
following points:
a. Ground terminal of wall outlet
b. Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done
S-3
Ground Lead
WARNING
Pay attention to the point to which the ground lead is connected.
Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as the points listed
below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock:
a. Gas pipe (A risk of explosion or fire exists.)
b. Lightning rod (A risk of electric shock or fire exists.)
c. Telephone line ground (A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the case
of lightning.)
d. Water pipe or faucet (It may include a plastic portion.)
Power Plug and Cord

WARNING
For the products that use the power cord set (inlet type), be sure to follow the
directions given below.
When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with the fixture properly.
a. Be sure to check to see if the power cord is securely inserted into the
main body side inlet.
b. When the fixing of the cord is indicated in the installation instructions,
be sure to fix it securely by using the fixing materials provided in the
same package.
c. When the power cord is damaged with its sheath broken, be sure to
replace it with the specified power cord set.
When the power cord is not securely inserted, an abnormal heat may generates due to a poor contact of the cord, thus resulting in a fire.
Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and
so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is
damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power
cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged
power cord may result in fire or electric shock.
Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
S-4
Power Plug and Cord

WARNING
Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in
fire.
Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
Wiring
WARNING
Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.
Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long
extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may
result.
2.2. Installation Requirements
Prohibited Installation Place

WARNING
Do not place the copier near flammable materials such as curtains or volatile
materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
S-5
When not using product for a long time

WARNING
When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.),
switch it off and unplug the power cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
Ventilation
CAUTION
The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to be
harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the
room.
a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple copiers at the same time
Fixing
CAUTION
Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the copier may slide, leading to a
injury.
Inspection before Servicing

CAUTION
Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service
manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the
prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools. Do
not make any adjustment not described in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the copier may break and a
risk of injury or fire exists.
Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from
the copier and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock
exists.
S-6
Inspection before Servicing

CAUTION
The area around the fixing unit is hot.
You may get burnt.
Work Performed with the Copier Powered

WARNING
Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check
with the copier powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external
cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be
caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
Be careful not to drop metal chips such as a clip, staple and/or a screw into
the inside of the product or its gaps.
A short circuit may occurs inside the product, thus resulting in an electric
shock and/or a fire.
Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.
Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and
sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
S-7
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser, make
sure that the power cord has been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write
unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the
method specified by local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and
fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the
interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be
injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paper
jam).
Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or
other pointed parts.
Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were
removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
S-8
Consumables
WARNING
Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not
to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with
eyes, etc. It may be stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately.
When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.
Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

You may be burned due to dust explosion.
HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS
When solution is used for cleaning, be sure to unplug the power cord from
the power outlet.
Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are
highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnants
on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any
liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.
When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
S-9
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.
This copier is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined within
protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
S-10
SAFETY CIRCUITS
This machine is provided with the following safety circuits to prevent machine faults from resulting in serious accidents.
Overall protection circuit
Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating prevention circuit
These safety circuits are described below to provide the service engineer with a renewed awareness of them in order to prevent servicing errors that may impair their functions.
1.
Overall protection circuit

CBR1
NF
CBR2
8050sf001
1.1 Protection by circuit breaker /1 (CBR1) and circuit breaker /2 (CBR2)

CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instantaneously when an excessive current flows due to a short in the AC
line.
CAUTION:
The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
S-11
2.
Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating
prevention circuit
PRCB
ACDB
TH1
L2
TH3
TH2
Control
section
AC driver
section
FHCB
TS1
L3
TS2
L4
TH4
RL1
RL1
8050sf002e
2.1 Protection by software

The output voltage from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) and fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) is read by the
CPU. If this voltage is abnormal, L2, L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening main relay (RL1).
CAUTION:
The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing
lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with
the specified clearances.
The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
2.2 Protection by the hardware circuit

The output voltages from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1), fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2), fixing temperature
sensor /3 (TH3), and fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) are compared with the abnormality judgment reference
value in the comparator circuit. If the output voltage from TH1, TH2, TH3, or TH4 exceeds the reference value, L2,
L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening RL1.
CAUTION:
The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing
lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with
the specified clearances.
Periodically check the contact between the fixing upper roller and TH3 and the contact
between the fixing lower roller and TH4, and replace them if any abnormality is detected.
The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
2.3 Protection by thermostat /1 (TS1) and thermostat /2 (TS2)

When the temperature of the fixing upper roller exceeds the specified value, TS1 is turned OFF, thus interrupting the
power to L2 and L3 directly. When the temperature of the fixing lower roller exceeds the specified value, TS2 is
turned OFF, thus interrupting the power to L4 directly.
CAUTION:
Do not use any other electrical conductor in place of TS1 and TS2.
S-12
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric
shock.
8050sf003e
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
S-13
8050sf004e
CAUTION
S-14
8050sf005e
CAUTION
S-15
8050sf006e
CAUTION
S-16
8050sf007e
CAUTION
PS
Unplug the machine before removing platen glass.

Debrancher le copieur avant de retirer la vitre d'exposition.
Desenchufe la maquina antes de quitar el vidrio.
~
Desconecte a unidade da tomada antes de remover o vidro de exposicao.
8050sf008e
S-17
8050sf009
CAUTION
S-18
KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2
I ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
II SERVICE TOOL
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
Composition of the service manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii

Measures to take in case of an accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi
List of major differences between the old type and the new type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
ADJUSTMENT
III SERVICE
Notation of the service manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ix
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1
Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
4.1
Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
5. CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

5.1
Checking method of the P function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
6. 25 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
6.1
List of adjustment items for 25 mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
6.2
Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
6.3
Setting software DIPSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
6.4
Paper size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
6.5
6.4.1
Standard size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
6.4.2
Non-standard size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
6.4.3
Wide paper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
PM count setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

6.5.1
Count reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
6.5.2
Change setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
6.6
Data collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
6.7
Parts counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
6.8
6.7.1
Count of special parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
6.7.2
Count of each parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Password setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
V ERROR CODE LIST
4. MODE CHANGE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
VI DIAGRAMS
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
IV JAM CODE LIST
2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
CONTENTS
6.9
Telephone number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
I ADJUSTMENT
6.10 M/C serial number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50

6.11 Indication of ROM version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
6.12 KRDS setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
6.13 ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
6.14 Setting date input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
6.15 Board change mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
II SERVICE TOOL
7. 36 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
7.1
Setting method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
7.2
Process adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
III SERVICE
7.3
IV JAM CODE LIST
7.4
7.5
7.2.1
High voltage adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
7.2.2
Drum peculiarity adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
7.2.3
Sensor output check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
7.2.4
Exclusive paper setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
7.2.5
Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
Image adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62

7.3.1
Magnification adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
7.3.2
Timing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
7.3.3
RADF adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
7.3.4
Centring adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78
7.3.5
Non-image area erase check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80
7.3.6
Image quality adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82

7.4.1
Scanner gamma adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
7.4.2
Printer gamma adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
7.4.3
Sharpness adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88
7.4.4
Contrast adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
7.4.5
Image judge adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
7.4.6
ACS adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
7.4.7
Density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92
7.4.8
Tone adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94
7.4.9
Running test mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96
V ERROR CODE LIST
7.5.1
7.6
Test pattern output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-97
7.7
Test pattern density setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106
7.8
Finisher adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106

7.8.1
VI DIAGRAMS
Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96
7.9
Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107
7.8.2
Fold stopper adjustment (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107
7.8.3
Cover sheet tray size adjustment (PI-110 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108
7.8.4
Trimming stopper adjustment (TU-109/TMG-3 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108
7.8.5
Punch adjustment (PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109
7.8.6
Three-folding adjustment (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111
7.8.7
2 positions staple pitch adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-112
List output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-112
8. 47 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113
8.1
47 mode/multi mode setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113

ii
8.2
Adjustment data display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
8.3
Hard disk check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
8.4
Input check list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-116
8.5
Output check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127
9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139

9.1
Paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139
9.2
Paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment (bypass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-140
9.3
Pick-up movement amount adjustment (bypass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-142
9.4
Paper feed tray /1 to /3 mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-143
9.5
Paper feed tray/1 to /3 sheet feed pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-144
9.6
FNS adjustment of the bypass conveyance guide plate magnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-146
9.7
FNS adjustment of the bypass gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-147
9.8
FNS adjustment of the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-149
9.9
FNS adjustment of the paper exit opening solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-150
9.10 FNS adjustment of the position of paper exit arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-152

9.11 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate /U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-154
I ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
II SERVICE TOOL
9.12 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate /L (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS-606) . . . . . . . 1-156
9.14 FNS adjustment of the stapling position in a vertical direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160
9.15 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling) (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS-606). . . . . . . 1-168
9.16 FNS adjustment of the angle of the folding stopper (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS-606). . . . . . . . . 1-170
9.17 FNS adjustment of the folding force (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS-606) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-172
9.18 FNS adjustment of the three-holding position (only for FS-215/FN-9/FS-606) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-173
III SERVICE
9.13 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-158
9.19 FNS adjustment of the stapler drive belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-174

9.20 TU adjustment of the sheet cutting parallelism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-178
9.22 LCT skew adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-181
9.23 LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-183
9.24 LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-184
9.25 LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185
9.26 LCT paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-186
9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-188
SERVICE TOOL
1. Description of the ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

1.1
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1.1
Board used for the ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1.2
Data flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1.3
ISW transfer type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1.4
Instances of ISW transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
1.1.5
Setup procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
V ERROR CODE LIST
II
IV JAM CODE LIST
9.21 LCT tray mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179
2. USB ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

What is the USB ISW? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
3. INTERNET ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

3.1
What is the Internet ISW? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
3.2
Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
3.3
Main features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

iii
VI DIAGRAMS
2.1
CONTENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
3.4
3.5
3.6
II SERVICE TOOL
3.7
Initial setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

3.4.1
Setting on Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
3.4.2
Setting on Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

3.5.1
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
3.5.2
Transmitting E-Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Internet ISW using Web utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

3.6.1
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
3.6.2
How to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Precautions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

3.7.1
III SERVICE
3.8
Prior announcement to administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
3.7.2
If power failure occurs during data rewriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
3.7.3
ISW of multiple programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
3.7.4
If ISW fails in low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Proxy server authentication in Internet ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

3.8.1
What is a proxy server? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
3.8.2
Authentication of proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
3.8.3
Type and command list for authentication on proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
3.8.4
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
IV JAM CODE LIST
4. MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

4.1
What is the Mail remote notification system?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
4.2
Operation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
4.3
Initial setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
4.4
How to use the Mail remote notification system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
4.5
Disabling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
III SERVICE
V ERROR CODE LIST
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

1.1
Service schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.2
Maintenance items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
1.3
Periodic check items (main body) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
1.4
Periodic check items (DF-319/AFR-20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
1.5
Periodic check items (LT-211/C-208) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
1.6
Periodic check items (FS-115/215/FN-120/9/FS-513/606) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
1.7
Periodic check items (PI-110) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
1.8
Periodic check items (TU-109/TMG-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
1.9
Replacement parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
1.10 Important maintenance parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

2. COPY MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
2.1
Product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
2.2
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
2.3
PM parts kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
VI DIAGRAMS
3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

4. CE TOOLS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
iv
CONTENTS
1. JAM CODE LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
ERROR CODE LIST
1. ERROR CODE LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

2. ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
I ADJUSTMENT
IV JAM CODE LIST
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

1.1
8050/CF5001/C500/8150 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1.2
DF-319/AFR-20 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
1.3
LT-211/C-208 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
1.4
FS-115/FS-215/FN-120/FN-9/FS-513/FS-606 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
1.5
TU-109/TMG-3 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
1.6
PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
II SERVICE TOOL
VI DIAGRAMS
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

2.1.1
Relay connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
2.1.2
Connector in the board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
2.2
DF-319/AFR-20 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
2.3
LT-211/C-208 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
2.4
FS-115/FS-215/FN-120/FN-9/FS-513/FS-606 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
2.5
TU-109/TMG-3 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
2.6
PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
3. TIMING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53

3.1
8050/CF5001/C500/8150 timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
3.2
DF-319/AFR-20 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
3.3
LT-211/C-208 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
3.4
FS-115/215/FN-120/9/FS-513/606 timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
3.5
TU-109/TMG-3 timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
3.6
PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
III SERVICE
8050/CF5001/C500/8150 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
IV JAM CODE LIST
2.1
DF-319/AFR-20 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
4.2
LT-211/C-208 Overall Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
4.3
FS-115/215/FN-120/9/FS-513/606 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
4.4
TU-109/TMG-3 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
4.5
PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
5. APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-1
5.1
8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (6/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-11
5.7
5.8

v
VI DIAGRAMS
4.1
V ERROR CODE LIST
4. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
III SERVICE
II SERVICE TOOL
I ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
VI DIAGRAMS
V ERROR CODE LIST
IV JAM CODE LIST
Blank page
vi
Introduction
Introduction
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement
of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued
with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
To indicate clearly a section revised, show

A number within
To indicate clearly a section revised, show

A number within
to the left of the revised section.
represents the number of times the revision has been made.
in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.
represents the number of times the revision has been made.
Note:
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
2004/12
3.0
Change of design and correction of errors in writing
2004/04
2.0
Change of design and correction of errors in writing
2003/08
1.0
Date
Service
manual Ver.
Issue of the first edition
Revision mark
Descriptions of revision
vii
Introduction
Composition of the service manual

This service manual consists of the following sections and chapters:
<Theory of Operation section>
I OUTLINE:
System configuration, product specifications, unit configuration, paper
II UNIT EXPLANATION:
Configuration of each unit, explanation of the operating system, and
path, drive system, and image creation process *

explanation of the control system
III DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY:
Removal/reinstallation method of periodically replaced parts and

major parts.
As information for the CE to have a better understanding of the product, this part outlines the object of each
functions, its role, the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing
of the operations of each part, and then explains the removal and reinstallation procedure of the periodically
replaced parts and the major parts.
The contents of * are described only in the service manual of the main body.
<Field service section>
I ADJUSTMENT:
General description of items to be adjusted, 25 mode, 36 mode, 47

mode, and other adjustments (mechanical adjustments)
II SERVICE TOOL:
Various types of ISW *, and mail remote notification system
III SERVICE:
Service schedule, copy materials, service materials, and CE tools *
IV JAM CODE LIST:
List of jam codes, causes, operations when a jam occurs, and removal
methods
V ERROR CODE LIST:
List of error codes, causes, operations when a warning is issued, and
VI DIAGRAMS:
Parts layout drawing, connector layout drawing, timing chart, and
expected defective parts

overall wiring diagram
As information that the CE requires at the job site (customer's premise), this part explains the service schedule and its contents, the object and role of each adjustment, error codes and supplementary information.
viii
Introduction
Notation of the service manual

1. Product name
In this manual, each of the products is described as follows:
(1) IC board:
Standard printer
(2) KonicaMinolta 8050/CF5001/bizhub PROC500/8150:

Main body or this machine
(3) Microsoft Windows 95:
Windows 95
Microsoft Windows 98:
Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Me:
Windows Me
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0:
Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT
Microsoft Windows 2000:
Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP:
Windows XP
When the description is made in combination of the OS's mentioned above:

Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0/2000
Windows NT/2000/XP
Windows 95/98/Me/ NT/2000/XP
2. Brand name
The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or the registered
trademark of each company.
3. Electrical parts and signals
Those listed by way of example below are not exhaustive, but only some instances among many.
Classification Load symbol
Ex. of signal name
Description
IN
PS
Sensor
PS
Door PS1
Sensor detection signal
SIG
102 PS
24V
Solenoid
SD
Power to drive the solenoid
DRV
Drive signal
SOL
24V
Clutch
CL
Power to drive the clutch
DRV
Drive signal
SOL
Motor
24V
Power to drive the motor
CONT
Drive signal
DRV1
DRV2
Drive signals of two kinds
D1
D2
ix
Introduction
Classification Load symbol
Ex. of signal name
Description
_U
_V
_W
Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds
DRV1
DRV2
DRV3
D1
D2
D3
D4
DRV A
DRV A
Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds
DRV B
Motor, phases A and B control signals
DRV B
Motor
A
/A
B
/B
AB
BB
CLK, PLL
PLL control signal
LCK, Lock, LD
PLL lock signal
FR
Forward/reverse rotation signal
EM, Lock, LCK, LD
Motor lock abnormality
BLK
Drive brake signal
P/S
Power/stop
S/S
Operating load start/stop signal
SS
Others
Ground
Serial
communication
CW/CCW, F/R
Rotational direction switching signal
ENB
Effective signal
TEMP_ER
Motor temperature abnormality detection signal
TH1.S, ANG
Analog signal
SG, S.GND, S_GND
Signal ground
PG, P.GND
Power ground
DCD
Data carrier detection
SIN
Serial input
SOUT
Serial output
DTR
Data terminal operation available
GND
Signal ground (earth)
DSR, DSET
Data set ready
RTS
Transmission request signal
CTS
Consent transmission signal
RI
Ring indicator
TXD
Serial transmission data
RXD
Serial reception data

x
Measures to take in case of an accident
Measures to take in case of an accident

1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct onsite checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in "Serious Accident Report/Follow-up Procedures."
xi
List of major differences
List of major differences between the old type and the new type
Classification
Material
Old type
Developer (each
New type
Used exclusively by the old type Used exclusively by the new type
color)
Toner (each color)
Drum
Common to Old type/New type
Registration/
Registration roller
Torque limiter not provided
Torque limiter provided
ADU/Reverse/
ADU reverse roller
Rubber roller
Spike roller (metal)
(Driven roller is of resin)
(Driven roller is of rubber)
Rubber roller
Spike roller (metal)
(Driven roller is of resin)
(Driven roller is of rubber)
Normal
Surface fluorine-treated
Paper exit
Reverse/exit roller /2
Paper exit roller
Periodic replace-
Every 1,000,000 copies/prints
ment cycle of paper
*1
Every 200,000 copies/prints
exit roller
Exit paper upper
Not provided
Provided
White
Black
face cooling fan

Secondary
Secondary transfer
transfer
pressure cam
Control
Printer control
Cam distance: Small
Cam distance: Large
Spring pressure: Large
Spring pressure: Small
board
Printer control pro-
gram
Image control pro-
gram
Fixing
Paper exit roller /Up
Resin roller
Ceramic coated roller
Paper exit roller /
Every 200,000 copies/prints
Up replacement
cycle
*1
For the old type, the paper exit roller is replaced only when it is provided with a kit against uneven wax.
The discrimination of the old type from the new type is made according to the list of product numbers as
shown below. The judgement is made based on the upper 4-digit alphanumeric characters of the serial number.
And also in this manual the model name is not given, but only "Old type" and "New type" given.
Product number
Model name
Old type
New type
8050
65AE, 65AJ, 65AF, 65AN, 65AK, 65AT, 65AP
65LT, 65LU
CF5001
65BE, 65BF
65LQ
C500
65LE, 65LF, 65LJ, 65LN, 65LG
8150
65LK, 65LP
xii
ADJUSTMENT
is shut off. So, be sure to unplug the power cord

from the power outlet. Also, when operating the
machine with the power supplied, be careful of
1. HOW TO USE THE

ADJUSTMENT SECTION
1.1
the scan of the exposure unit and be sure not to

get caught by the gear.
2. The fixing section may be very hot. Be careful
not to get burnt when handling it.
Composition
3. The developing unit is strongly magnetized. Be
This part "Adjustment" describes items to be
careful not to bring a watch and instrument near
adjusted and their method of adjustment that are
to the unit.
required by this machine and gives detailed expla-
4. Be careful not to damage the drum with a tool.
nations.
5. Be careful not to touch IC directly with bare

hands.
A. Checking before starting work

When conducting claims in the field, it is necessary
to check in advance the following:
1. Are the power source and voltage secured in
2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN
REPLACING PARTS
accordance with the specifications?

2. Is the power source properly grounded?
Adjustments and setting are required when there
3. Is any equipment that consumes repeatedly a
occurs a claim for poor image quality. However,
lot of electricity connected to the same power
these adjustments (including checking) and setting
source? (e.g.: Electric noise sources such as
are also required when a part is replaced with a new
elevator and air conditioner)
one.
4. Are environmental conditions suitable for the

machine?
[How to use the tables]
High temperature and high humidity, direct sun-
Each item represents the following:

1. Mode
light, ventilation, etc.

Levelness of the location on which the machine
is installed.
Shows which mode is used for adjustments.

"25": 25 mode
5. Does the cause of poor images lie in the original

itself?
"36": 36 mode
"47": 47 mode
6. Is density selected properly?
2. A circle "{" in the table
7. Is the original glass stained?
................. :
Shows that the order of
8. Is proper paper used for copy?
priority has been speci-
9. Are copy materials replaced with new ones at
fied
for
adjustments
their life? (e.g.: Developer, drum, cleaning
(including checking) and
blade, etc.)
setting.
10. Is toner filled?
{ (Empty circle)
Shows that adjustments

(including checking) and
B. Checkpoints when conducting on-site ser-
setting can be done

independently.
vice
Due attention should be paid to the following when
repairing the machine.
1. In this machine, when the main power switch
(SW1) is turned off, only one side of the AC line
1-1
I ADJUSTMENT
HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION
LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
PM count
Parts counter
ISW
Board change mode
Process adjustment
Image adjustment
PM counter resetting
PM cycle set
Count of special parts
Drum peculiarity adjustment
Magnification adjustment
Timing adjustment
Image quality
adjustment
Scanner gamma adjustment

Printer gamma adjustment
Sharpness adjustment
Image judge adjustment
Other adjustment
*1
*2
*3
Belt cleaning blade
Mode
Adjustment items
" by the pri-
Transfer belt
Replacement parts
Drum cartridge (drum) /Y, M, C, K
This table shows the list of adjustment items when replacing a part. Items are numbered in "
ority if there is any.
Developer *1
I ADJUSTMENT
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
25
1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K
Fixing cleaning unit
Developer /Y, M, C, K
Decurler roller
Blade setting mode

LD bias adjustment
Automatic gamma adjustment (0)
Automatic developer charge
L detection initial auto. adjustment
Initial drum rotation
Printer vertical mag. adjustment
Printer horizontal mag. adjustment
Belt line speed adjustment
Fixing line speed adjustment
Printer lead edge timing adj.
Auto. color registration adj.
Color registration manual adjustment
36
5
3
1
2
3*3
4
3
4
5
6
Printer gamma offset adj.

Printer gamma sensor adj.
Printer screen gradation adj.
Dot detect adjustment
Color text adjustment
ACS adjustment
FNS stapler position adjustment
Setting powder application
Mirror unit positioning (require the jig)
After replacing the developer, be sure that you do not make any copies until you have first performed
the L detection adjustment.
When replacing memory board (MB), be sure to replace the developer, 1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K,
and fixing cleaning unit.
When adjust the belt line speed adjustment, be sure to adjust the fixing line speed adjustment and auto
color registration adj.
When replacing the overall control board (OACB) due to the OACB being damaged, the memory board
(MB) that was installed on the damaged OACB should be used on the new OACB. Contact the service
manager of the authorized distributor if it is considered that the MB is also damaged. Never perform the
47 mode - 92 (output).
1-2
7
2
3
5
6
2
3
8*3
9
1
2
4
1
7
5
6
1
6
2
3*3 2*3
4 3
4
5
4
2
3
7
6
5
4
2
3
7
6
5
1-3
1
4
3
2
0
1
2
1
2
Memory board (MB) *2
1
2
1
Stapler unit
I ADJUSTMENT
FNS control board (FNSCB)
RADF control board (DFCB)
Registration roller
Operation board /1 (OB1)
Image processing board (IPB)
Printer control board (PRCB)
1
Overall control board (OACB)
Original glass
Exposure lamp (L1)
Each scanner mirror
CCD unit
Dust-proof glass /Y, M, C, K
Write unit /Y, M, C
Write unit /K
Decurler roller
Fixing roller /U, L
Charging corona /Y, M, C, K
Image correction unit
1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K
Drum cartridge (drum) /Y, M, C, K

Developer, Transfer belt,
Belt cleaning blade

LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
1
1
2
3
4
3
2
MODE CHANGE MENU
I ADJUSTMENT
4. MODE CHANGE MENU

4.1
5. CHECKING BY
THE P FUNCTION
Setting method
The P function is a function that allows you to conFrom this screen, the following modes can be
firm the following various numeric values by using
selected without turning off/on the power.
the P button.
"1 Basic screen"

"2 36 mode"
[1] Total counter
"3 25 mode"
[2] Full color counter
"4 Key operator mode"
[3] Mono color counter
"5 47 mode"
[4] Monochrome counter

[5] Copier counter
A. Procedure
[6] Printer counter
1. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the

sub power switch (SW2).
5.1
Checking method of the

P function
2. Press the P button and wait until "Enter 4-digit

A. Procedure
password to change mode" appears.

3. Input 9272 as the password and press the
START button. (The password is fixed and
cannot be changed.) "Mode changing menu
screen" is displayed.
1. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the

2. Press the P button.
3. "Counter list screen" appears.
4. Press any desired key.

5. To return to the "Mode changing menu
screen," press the P button and wait until the
4. Press the ! button in "Counter list screen," and

the PM counter is displayed.
5. To output the counter value list, press the
"Mode changing menu screen" appears.

6. After completion of adjustment, press the [Exit]
[Counter list output] key.

6. Pressing the [Exit] key, or the stop or clear but-
key to return to the basic screen.
ton returns to the basic screen.
1-4
25 MODE
6.1
List of adjustment items for

25 mode
Adjustment item menu
Remarks
1. Software SW setting
See the "List of software DIPSW".
2. Paper size setting
LCT paper size setting
3. PM count
1. Count reset
4. Data collection
1. Total count of each paper setting
2. Change setting
2. Copy count of each paper size
3. Print count of each paper size
4. RADF count
5. Page fill of each section
6. JAM data of time series
7. JAM count
8. Count of each copy mode
9. SC count
10. JAM count of each section
11. SC count of each section
5. Parts counter
1. Count of special parts

2. Count of each parts
6. Password setting
7. Telephone number setting

8. M/C serial number setting
1. Key operator password
4 digits
2. EKC master key code
8 digits
3. Weekly timer password
4 digits
1. Service centre Telephone number
16 digits
2. Service centre FAX number
16 digits
1. Main body
2. Option tray
3. RADF
4. Finisher
9. Indication of ROM version

10. KRDS setting
See the KRDS manual

provided separately
11. ISW
12. Setting date input
13. Board change mode
1-5
I ADJUSTMENT
6. 25 MODE
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
6.2
Setting method
6.3
Setting software DIPSW
This machine is provided with the 25 mode as an
A. Setting method
adjustment method. This mode is used when the
The software DIPSW is set on "Software SW setting
memory board (MB) is rewritten or various settings
screen."
are made.
Note:
Please note that DIPSW bits are written into
A. Procedure
1. Turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) with the
the memory board (MB) each time a change is

made.
main power switch (SW1) left ON.

2. While pressing the numeric keys 2 and 5 at the
same time, turn on the SW2. the "25 mode
B. Meaning of the values displayed on the

screen
menu screen" appears.

At this point, the machine enters the 25 mode
with normal copy operations unavailable.
3. Press the item keys on the liquid crystal display (LCD). A setting screen corresponding to
each item appears.
[1]
4. Confirm the input data on the setting screen of

each item.
5. Turn off the SW2 to release the 25 mode.
6. New data will be effective after restarting.
[2]
[3]
[4]
8050fs1026e
[1]
DIPSW number
[2]
Bit number (0 to 7)
[3]
Bit data : 1:ON, 0:OFF
[4]
8-bit switch values in indicated in hexadecimals from 00 to FF.
C. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. "25 mode menu screen"
Press the [1. Software SW setting] key.
3. "Software SW setting screen"
Select a DIPSW number by using the arrow
key on the left.
4. Select a bit number of the DIPSW by using the
arrow key on the right.
5. Select the ON (1) or OFF (0) of the DIPSW by
using the [ON] or [OFF] key.
6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
to the "25 mode menu screen".
For each function of the DIPSW, see "List of software DIPSW."
1
1-6
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
List of software DIPSW

Note:
Be sure not to change bits data with no particular reference made of the function.
Bit number of the default values in parentheses is the default value for the new type.
DIPSW No. Bit
Functions
Default values
Japan
DIPSW1
Inch
Metric
Print stop method after toner
*1
*1
supply or waste toner full dis-
*1
*1
Prohibition of printing when
Not prohibited
Prohibited
play
the PM count is reached
DIPSW2
Print number setting until
*2
*2
printing is prohibited after PM
*2
*2
is displayed
*2
*2
Hard disk connection
Disconnected
Connected
Switchover of the main body
For machines with For machines with
paper exit speed (measures
measures not taken measures taken
against uneven wax)
Speed increased while Speed not increased

in the paper exit
while in the paper exit
Paper exit full sensor (PS12)
For machines with
For machines with
type (Measure against
measures not taken
measures taken
uneven wax)
Photo interrupter type
Reflective type
DIPSW3
Switchover of the rotational
*4
*4
speed of the polygon motor
*4
*4
SC latch (SC34/35/36)
Password request for 25, 36,
Unlatched
Latched
Not requested
Requested
47 mode (password: 9272)

3
47 mode 15-01, 02 counter clear
Disabled
Enabled
1-7
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit

DIPSW4
Functions
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
0 (1)
0 (1)
0 (1)
Recovery from removal of the
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Count as 1
Count as 2
*27 Standard
*27 Restrained
*27 Standard
*27 Restrained
*27 Standard
*27 Restrained
*27 Standard
*27 Restrained
B4, 8.5 x 14 or
A3, 11 x 17 or
key counter
5
APS when change magnifica-
Change of fixed magnifications
tion
setting in key operator mode
7
Large size paper counting

method (Other than PM
counter)
DIPSW5
Image background restraint

(toner density) Y

(toner density) M

(toner density) C

(toner density) K
Change of the size of the
larger
larger
large size paper
DIPSW6
1-8
DIPSW7
Functions
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
*33 Standard
*33 Restrained
*33 Standard
*33 Restrained
*33 Standard
*33 Restrained
*33 Standard
*33 Restrained
(potential difference) Y
1
(potential difference) M
(potential difference) C
3
Large size paper PM counting
Count as 1
Count as 2
Operation when the key
Same as
Immediate stop
the stop button
jam
0
(potential difference) K
DIPSW8
method
DIPSW9
counter is removed (copier)

1
Operation when the key
Ignored
counter is removed (IP)

2
Message switchover
3
4
DIPSW10
Same as
DIPSW9-0
*5
*5
*5
*6
*6
*6
*6
*6
*6
*6
*6
No reservation
94MB (177MB
Copy quantity limit selection
*5
Page memory reservation at

power on
when MU-412
is installed)
Black characters for printer
*28
*28
output (IP)
1-9
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
25 MODE
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit

DIPSW11
Functions
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
Filter for jagged edges on
Disabled
Enabled
slanting lines
DIPSW12
Jam code display
Adjustment of the image qual-
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Black text screen with overlay
ity in the key operator mode
*7 Screen
*7 Error diffusion
function
7
DIPSW13
Size detection switchover 1
A5, A4R
5.5 x 8.5, 8.5x11R
A6R
Post card
8.5 x 14
F4
*8
*8
*8
*8
F4 size setting
*9
*9
*9
*9
4
5
6
DIPSW14

(main body)
B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR

8.5 x 11 / B5R
(bypass)
4

(platen)

(ADF)

(PI)
B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR

8.5 x 11 / B5R
B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR
8.5 x 11/B5R
B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K/16K / 16KR
8.5 x 11 / B5R
B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR
8.5 x 11 / B5R
1-10
DIPSW15
Functions
Japan
Inch
Metric
Telephone line
E-mail
Selection of the KRDS type
FNS alarm stop method
*10
*10
*10
*10
Disconnected
Connected
DIPSW16
Default values
KRDS connection
Remote diagnostic system
KRDS
RD mode
selection
1
Recognizing the copy reservation function/coin vendor
Copy reservation Copy reservation

function enabled function prohibited
Coin vendor disabled Coin vendor enabled
Coin vendor type
Parallel
Serial
communication communication
3
Counting of the key counter in
Not counted
Counted
Displayed
Not displayed
the printer mode (IP)

4
Display of the total count start

date (P function)
NIC selection for E-Mail
IP NIC
Copier NIC
KRDS
DIPSW17
*11
*11
Summer time setting
*11
*11
*11
*11
*11
*11
Density selection at scanning
*12
*12
the tabed paper
*12
*12
*12
*12
6
DIPSW18
Tray 1 faulty part isolation
Normal
Unavailable
Normal
Unavailable
Normal
Unavailable
Tray 4 (LCT) faulty part isolation
Normal
Unavailable
Folding, stitch & folding, tri-fold,
Normal
Unavailable
trimmer faulty part isolation

6
PI faulty part isolation
Normal
Unavailable
HDD faulty part isolation
Normal
Unavailable
1-11
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
25 MODE
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit

DIPSW19
Functions
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
Fixing upper and lower roller
*13
*13
temperature selection
*13
*13
*13
*13
Normal
Unavailable
*14
*14
DIPSW20
PK faulty part isolation
Default resolution of the IP
scanner
Group stapling mode
Image scanning area with
*14
*14
Disabled
Enabled
*15 Normal
* 15 Original priority
Based on
Based on
original
transfer paper
shift function
2
Selection of the stamped

page number
Keyboard layout
ABC layout
QWERTY layout
Periodical black toner band
*29 Normal
*29 Increased at
Switchover of the fixing con-
*30 Measures
*30 Measures
creation on the transfer belt

trol table (Old type only)
the edges
against uneven against uneven
wax not provided wax provided
Front and back registration of *31 Not provided
*31 Provided
Not provided
Provided
0 (1)
0 (1)
0 (1)
Disabled
Enabled
Displayed
Not displayed
Disabled
Enabled
the tray
DIPSW21
Paper exit cooling fan (M61,
LCT size setting in the key
62, 63)
operator mode
2
Display of the original count

2
210 to 256 g/m paper exit
Type of paper selection with
with its face up
APS
*34 Special paper *34 Paper weight

not applicable
6 not applicable
1-12
DIPSW22
Functions
IP address setting
Number of punch holes
Japan
Inch
Metric
Disabled
Enabled
*16
*16
*16
*16
2
3
4
Image reference position for
Based on user Based on APS at
Default values
the non-standard size original
selection
ADF
Function of the power save
Enabled
Disabled
Staple supply
Selecting between
button
5
Operation when FNS runs out

of staple
request
staple supply or
staple release
IP gamma correction when
Not requested
Requested
machine is powered ON
DIPSW23
Output when EKC (ECM)
Enabled (counted
Disabled (regis-
user ID is unmatched (IP)
as the other user)
tered in JOB list)
Precision of the color registration
*17 Normal
*17 Fine
*18 Enabled
*18 Disabled
*19 Enabled
*19 Disabled
*20 Enabled
*20 Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
automatic correction (periodical correction)

3
Control of the color registration automatic

correction (periodical correction)
Main scan correction of the color

registration automatic correction
(periodic correction)
IP gamma correction
Job memory registration of the special paper setting on the bypass tray
7
DIPSW24
DIPSW25
Vs/Vp switch control
*21 Disabled
*21 Enabled
Image stabilization control
*22
*22
timing
*22
*22
Color registration correction
*23
*23
control
*23
*23
Color registration fine correction
Yes
No
De-humid heater
ON
OFF
1-13
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
25 MODE
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit

DIPSW26
DIPSW27
DIPSW28
Functions
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
Toner refresh mode (at job end)
*24 Disabled
*24 Enabled
*24 Disabled
*24 Enabled
Toner refresh mode (periodical)
Printer gamma offset adjust-
*25 Only high light *25 Whole area
ment
DIPSW29
PK punch mode restriction
Enabled
Disabled
6
7
Toner refresh mode cycle
*24
*24
(periodical)
Increase transfer current against
Not
Correspond
white spots image (Old type only)
correspond
Include of proof copy to the
Not included
Included
set copy quantity
DIPSW30
Restriction of the display of
Restricted
Not restricted
the 25 mode data correction
1-14
DIPSW31
DIPSW32
Functions
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
Reset condition for the spe-
Auto reset, reset
Power OFF
cial paper setting of the
button, tray selec
bypass tray
tion, power OFF
Measures against paper
For machines with For machines with
reverse/exit jam
measures not taken measures taken

Rubber roller
Spike roller
1-15
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
25 MODE
25 MODE
*1
Print stop method after toner supply or waste
*6
Copy quantity limit selection
I ADJUSTMENT
toner full display

Mode
Mode
9-6
9-5
9-4
1-3
1-2
No limit
1 sheet
3 sheets
5 sheets
9 sheets
10 sheets
20 sheets
30 sheets
50 sheets
99 sheets
No limit
No limit
Stops after ejecting

paper in the machine
Stops at a break
between copy set
Stops at the end of the
current job
Does not stop
*2
9-7
Print number setting until printing is prohibited

after PM is displayed
1-7
1-6
1-5
No limit
1,000 prints
No limit
2,000 prints
No limit
3,000 prints
4,000 prints
5,000 prints
1,000 prints
1,000 prints
1,000 prints
Mode
*7
Black text screen with overlay function

When using the overlay of the applied function, the image creation method of black characters is switched between the error diffusion
and the screen.
Mode
*4
12-6
Screen
Error diffusion
Switchover of the rotational speed of the polygon motor

Mode
2-7
2-6
1/1 speed
1/1 speed
2/3 speed
1/2 speed
*5
*8
Mode
13-4
13-3
A5R
B6R
5.5 x 8.5R
13-6
13-5
Message switchover
Mode
*9
F4 size setting
9-3
9-2
0
8 x 13
Please insert copy card
8.25 x 13
Please insert coin
8.125 x 13.25
Please insert key
8.5 x 13
Please insert key
Mode
counter
counter
1-16

*12
FNS alarm stop method
Density selection when scanning the tabed

paper
This setting is used to determine when to stop

if a FNS full alarm is detected.
Mode
Functions detected are;
17-6
17-5
17-4
80
Lower limit of the FNS tray, the number of the

FNS trays, FNS booklet tray, PK punch
scraps, TU scraps and TU stacker
40 (most lighter)
60
100
Mode
15-4
15-3
120
Stops immediately after
160
200
255 (most darker)
detection
Stops at a break
I ADJUSTMENT
*10
25 MODE
between copy set after

detection
Does not stop while in
*13
Fixing upper and lower roller temperature

selection
printing
Does not stop while in
Temperature up:
Decrease a insufficient
fixing or fixing winding
printing
jam
Temperature down: Decrease paper exit curl*11
ing or waving
Summer time setting

Mode
17-3 17-2 17-1 17-0

Note:
0 minute
10 minutes
20 minutes
30 minutes
40 minutes
50 minutes
-30C (-15C)
60 minutes
-20C (-10C)
70 minutes
-10C (-5C)
80 minutes
Standard
90 minutes
Upper roller: standard (+5C)
100 minutes
Lower roller: +10C (+5C)
110 minutes
Standard (+10C)
120 minutes
Standard (-25C)
130 minutes
Standard (-20C)
140 minutes
150 minutes
Parentheses are setting value for the new

type.
Mode
*14
19-2
19-1
Default resolution of the IP scanner

Mode
1-17
19-3
19-7
19-6
400dpi
600 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
25 MODE
*19 Main scan correction of the color registration
*15 Image scanning area with shift function
I ADJUSTMENT
Normal: Compare the original size and the
auto correction (periodical correction)
transfer paper size and the smaller
The color registration corrections, in the main
one is to be the image area.
scanning direction that are periodically performed can be omitted. This is used tempo-
Original priority:
Original size is to be the image
rarily when there is a registration error along
area.
the main scan as a result of a trouble around
Mode
the transfer belt unit, or when separating
20-1
Normal
Original priority
faulty points.
Mode
23-4
Enabled
Disabled
*16 Number of punch holes

Mode
22-2
22-1
2 holes (for Japan)
3 holes (for inch area)
4 holes (for metric area)
*20 IP gamma correction

In order to separate defective items when
there is poor images sent from IP. The gamma
correction can be omitted. The gamma correction table is stored in the printer controller.
*17 Precision of the color registration automatic
Note:
When installing the printer controller, be sure
correction (periodical correction)

"Fine" is used when the precision of the color
that the setting is made to "1."
registration correction that is periodically conducted is increased with the amount of error
reduced. However, it takes about 2 minutes
longer for correction.
Mode
Mode
23-5
Enabled
Disabled
23-2
Normal
Fine
*21 Vs/Vp switch control

This Vs/Vp switch control is used when there
is an image erasure around a solid image in
*18 Color registration auto correction control (peri-
the half-tone section in early stage after the

change of developer.
odical correction)
Down time while in the continuous printing is
reduced with the color registration correction
omitted that is periodically performed (color
registration correction at power ON is not
omitted).
Mode
23-3
Enabled
Disabled
1-18
Mode
24-1
Disabled
Enabled

*24
Image stabilization control timing
Toner refresh mode

When printing coverage is low (5% or less of
Correction made:
Correction is performed by sus-
each color), rough image, white spot or toner
pending print at specified print.
spillage tend to occur due to toner deterioration.
No correction made:
Correction is omitted temporarily to
The effective measure against these are as
reduce
follows.
down
time
when
the
machine cannot be used with SC
DIPSW 28-2
due to the malfunction of the drum
Toner refresh mode (at Job end)
potential sensor or gamma sensor.
For the colors of which print coverage of

the previous job is 5% or less (convert into
No correction while in printing:

Correction that is performed by
A4), solid toner of the difference amount
suspending print at every specified
from the 5% is developed to consume
print is performed after the print job
toner.
to reduce down time.

Mode
Mode
28-2
24-3
24-2
Disabled
Correction made
Enabled
Correction not made
No correction while in
DIPSW 28-3
Toner refresh mode (periodical)
printing
Check the average print coverage for each
color at prescribed distance of developing

sleeve drive develops the toner amount
*23
Color registration correction control
equivalent of 8-sheet A3 solid for the color
Correction made:
of which the average print coverage is 5%

or less (convert into A4).
Correction is performed by suspending print at specified print.
Mode
No correction made:
Correction is omitted temporarily to
reduce
down
time
when
Disabled
Enabled
the
machine cannot be used with SC
DIPSW29-0,1
due to malfunctions around the
Toner refresh mode cycle (periodical)
color registration sensor.
Effective only when the DIPSW 28-3 is set

to "1". The execution cycle of the toner
No correction while in printing:

Correction that is performed by sus-
refresh mode is changed. The cycle varies
pending print at every specified
according to the developer drive distance
print is performed after the print job
and the temperature.
to reduce down time.

Mode
Mode
25-4
25-3
Correction made
1,000 prints
Correction not made
Equivalent to every 500
No correction while in
prints
Equivalent to every
printing
28-3
Equivalent to every 330

1
29-1
29-0
prints
1-19
I ADJUSTMENT
*22
25 MODE
25 MODE
*28 Black characters for printer output (IP)
I ADJUSTMENT
*25 Printer gamma offset adjustment

Change the area in which the printer gamma
Change the black laser PWM for printing from
offset of the 36 mode can be adjusted.
PC.
0:
High light area only
However, if the black laser is set thinner, the
1:
Possible in whole area
gradation changed. Check the gradation after
Mode
changing the setting.
28-4
High light area only
Possible in whole area
Mode
*27 Image background restraint (toner density)
10-7
10-6
Standard
Make black characters thin. (Mild)
Make black characters thin.
(Medium)
Y, M, C, K
Make black characters thin.
Restrain image background by reducing the
(Intense)
toner density of the developer (toner and carrier ratio) by about 0.2%.
This setting changes the toner density of the
*29 Periodical black toner band creation on the
developer so that image density does not
transfer belt
change at once.
When set to "1," the black toner band periodi-
After changing the DIPSW, set the test pattern
cally created on the transfer belt, more toner
density of the color changed to 128 (with the
is supplied to the both edges of the belt clean-
density of other colors set to 0), and output 10
ing blade to prevent the occurrence of white
sheets of the test pattern No. 1 to check
stripes on the image and the flipping of the
image background.
both edges of the belt cleaning blade.
And also, after changing the DIPSW, be sure

to conduct the automatic gamma adjustment
(0) of the process adjustment.
Mode
20-4
Normal
Increased at the edges
There are two DIPSW that restrain image

background: toner density (DIPSW 5-0 to 3)
and a potential difference (DIPSW 7-0 to 3).
*30 Switchover of the fixing control table (Old type only)
Image background can be restrained more
When set to "1", the fixing temperature in the
effectively with the DIPSW 7-0 to 3. When
slower line speed mode is controlled low to
image background occurs, be sure to use the
improve uneven wax. However, when tray
DIPSW 7-0 to 3 for the first priority. If it is not
switches to a tray in which paper of different
sufficiently effective, use the DIPSW 5-0 to 3
fixing temperature control is loaded (tempera-
at the same time.
ture is lowered), it takes long waiting time.

Max. approx. 150 seconds. (It takes long only
Note:
when the memory switch "No.52 Time lag to
Since the DIPSW 7-0 to 3 changes the potential, the carrier may stick to the drum and
switch tray" is set to "Standard" in the key

operator mode.)
damage the drum and the cleaning blade.

Therefore, use this DIPSW only when necessary.
Mode
Measures against uneven wax not
provided
Measures against uneven wax pro-
Mode
20-5
5-3
5-2
5-1
5-0
Standard
Restrained
vided
1-20

*34
Front and back registration of the tray
Type of paper selection with APS
The image timing and the magnification for
Select a type of paper that can be selected for
each tray and paper type can be adjusted.
the APS.
(user mode)
Special paper not applicable:
Mode
Coated, tab and exclusive paper are
20-7
Not provided
Provided
not applicable. All types of paper from

paper weight 4 (106 to 162 g/m2) to 6
(210 to 256 g/m2) are not applicable.
Paper weight 6 not applicable:
All types of paper in paper weight 6
(210 to 256 g/m2) are not applicable.
*33
Image background restraint (potential difference)

Increase the potential difference between the
Mode
21-6
Special paper not applicable
Paper weight 6 not applicable
charging potential and the developing bias to

restrain image background. After changing
the DIPSW, be sure to conduct the automatic
gamma adjustment (0) of the process adjustment.
There are two DIPSW that restrain image
background: toner density (DIPSW 5-0 to 3)
and a potential difference (DIPSW 7-0 to 3).
Image background can be restrained more
effectively with the DIPSW 7-0 to 3. When
image background occurs, be sure to use the
DIPSW 7-0 to 3 for the first priority. If it is not
sufficiently effective, use the DIPSW 5-0 to 3
at the same time.
Note:
Since the DIPSW 7-0 to 3 changes the potential, the carrier may stick to the drum and
damage the drum and the cleaning blade.
Therefore, use this DIPSW only when necessary.
Mode
7-3
7-2
7-1
7-0
Standard
Restrained
1-21
I ADJUSTMENT
*31
25 MODE
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
6.4
Paper size setting
6.4.3 Wide paper setting
Conduct this setting when changing the paper size

of the LCT.
The paper size is available in the standard size,
non-standard size and wide paper.
A. Procedure
Press the [2. Paper size setting] key.
6.4.1 Standard size setting

3. "Paper size setting screen"
A. Procedure
Press the [Wide paper] key.
4. Press the arrow keys and select the standard

size of the wide paper.
5. Press the [Enter size] key.

6. Press the main scan direction key and enter
Press the [Standard size] key.
the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric

keys.
4. Press the arrow key to select the paper size.
7. Press the sub-scan direction key and enter the
5. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu screen."
paper size using the arrow keys or numeric
To invalidate the setting that you have
keys.
changed, press the [Cancel] key and return to

8. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu
"25 mode menu screen."
screen."
6.4.2 Non-standard size setting
changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return

to "25 mode menu screen."
A. Procedure
Press the [Non-standard size] key.
4. Press the main scan direction key and enter
the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric
keys.
5. Press the sub-scan direction key and enter the
paper size using the arrow keys or numeric keys.
screen."
1-22
PM count setting
6.5.2 Change setting
Reset the PM count after implementation of the PM

and set and/or change the PM cycle.
The selection of the PM cycle is available in the
total count and the distance in operation of the
developing unit /K. In default, the total count is set.
A. Procedure
Press the [3. PM count] key.
3. "PM count/cycle screen"
6.5.1 Count reset
Press the [Page] or [Distance] key.

A. Procedure
4. Enter a cycle value through the numeric keys.
Only the upper three digits can be entered.
Press the [3. PM count] key.
screen."
3. "PM count/cycle screen"
Press the [Count reset] key.
4. "PM count reset confirmation screen"

Press the [YES] key when resetting the PM
count. The PM count is reset and the starting
date of the PM count is automatically entered.
When the [NO] key is pressed, the PM count is
not reset and return to "PM count/cycle
screen."
1-23
I ADJUSTMENT
6.5
25 MODE
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
6.6
Data collection
B. Data collection confirmation method

(1) Procedure
It is possible to confirm various data held in the

machine. It is also possible to confirm collected data
by the KRDS, list output and the mail remote notification system.

Press the [4. Data collection] key.
3. "Data collection menu screen"
A. Data that can be confirmed

1. Total count of each paper size
Press the key of a data collection item that you
2. Copy count of each paper size
want to confirm.
3. Print count of each paper size
To select any succeeding key to the key 11,
4. RADF count
press the arrow key.
5. Page fill of each section
4. "Individual data confirmation screen"
6. JAM data of time series
Press the arrow key to scroll the screen.
7. JAM count
8. Count of each copy mode
Count of each copy mode (1)
Count of each copy mode (2)

9. SC count
10. JAM count of each section
Note:
11. SC count of each section
The [Count reset] key is shown in the individual data confirmation screen of the [10. JAM
Note:
count of each section] and the [11. SC count
When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, 6 to 11 can be

confirmed.
of each section].
When pressing the [COUNT RESET] key,
"Count reset confirmation screen" is shown,
and when pressing the [YES] key, the section
data is reset.
Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Individual
data confirmation screen" with the interval
data not reset.
Reset these data while in the PM implementation to confirm the jam or SC occurrence
count after it was visited last time.
1-24
25 MODE
(1) Data collection No. 1 to 3: Total, copy and

printer counts of each paper size
NO
KRDS parameter
For
Remark
(B1, B6, B8, BD, BE, BF)
Japan
Inch
Metric
00
A2
17 x 22
A2
01
A3
11 x 17
A3
02
B4
8.5 x 14
B4 (8K)
03
A4
8.5 x 11
A4
04
B5
5.5 x 8.5
B5 (16K)
05
A5
A5
06
B6
F4
07
8.5 x 14
08
8.5 x 11
A4
10
09
Special
Special
Special
Maximum count: 99,999,999

1 count is made for paper of All types regardless
of the paper size.
All sheets of paper that do not come under the
size of No. 1 to No. 9 are counted as special.
However, SEL and LEF are counted as the same
size.
The non-standard and the wide paper are
counted as special.
1-25
Not used
I ADJUSTMENT
C. Details of the data collection
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
(2) Data collection No. 4: RADF count

NO
KRDS parameter (F0)
Item
00
No. of originals fed in ADF mode
01
No. of originals fed in RADF mode
02
No. of originals fed in RDH mode
03
No. of originals fed in RRDH mode
04
No. of originals fed in LDH mode
05
No. of originals fed in CFF mode
06
No. of 1 sided SDF original fed
07
No. of mix originals fed in ADF mode
08
No. of mix originals fed in RADF mode
10
09
No. of originals fed in 2 in 1 mode
11
0A
No. of 1 sided z-folded original fed
12
0B
No. of 2 sided z-folded original fed
13
0C
No. of 2 sided SDF original fed
14
0D

(3) Data collection No. 5: Page fill of each section
It is possible to confirm the average pixel ratio of
5,000 print sheets of the latest 30 data for each of Y,
M, C and K.
This pixel ratio is a calculated value based on the
dot area of pixels and the transfer paper area, and
is different from the print ratio when actually printed.
(4) Data collection No. 6: JAM date of time
series
With respect to the latest 100 jam data, it is possible
to confirm originating jam code, total count, date of
occurrence, time of occurrence, tray, paper size and
magnification.
1-26
Remark
Not used
Not used
Not used

NO
KRDS
Parameter
(J0)
Jam code is shown on

the LCD display when
DIPSW11-7 is set to 1
33
20
J72-16
34
21
J72-17
35
22
J72-18
JAM count of each section

KRDS
Parameter
(J0)

00
J10-01
01
J10-02
36
23
J72-19
02
J10-03
37
24
J72-20
25
J72-21
NO
Section
Bypass
03
J11-01
Tray 1
38
04
J12-01
Tray 2
39
26
J72-22
05
J13-01
Tray 3
40
27
J72-23
06
J14-01
LCT
41
28
J72-24
Paper
feed
42
29
J72-25
43
2A
J72-26
07
J17-01
08
J17-02
10
09
J17-03
44
2B
J72-28
11
0A
J17-04
45
2C
J72-29
2D
J72-30
Section
FNS
12
0B
J17-05
46
13
0C
J17-06
47
2E
J72-32
14
0D
J17-07
48
2F
J72-33
15
0E
J17-08
49
30
J72-34
50
31
J72-35
PI
51
32
J72-38
Not used
52
33
J72-39
16
0F
J17-09
17
10
J31-02
18
11
J32-08
19
12
J32-04
53
34
J72-40
35
J72-41
Reversed
paper exit
TU
20
13
J32-01
54
21
14
J32-05
55
36
J72-42
22
15
J32-07
56
37
J72-43
PK
23
16
J32-02
57
38
J72-44
Not used
58
39
J72-45
59
3A
J72-46
3B
J72-47
24
17
J32-03
25
18
J92-01
26
19
J93-01
60
27
1A
J94-02
61
3C
J72-48
FNS
J19-01
Vertical
conveyance
62
3D
J72-49
PI
63
3E
J72-50
28
1B
ADU
29
1C
J19-02
LCT
64
3F
J72-51
30
1D
J51-01
Main body
65
40
J72-60
31
1E
J71-01
FNS
66
41
J72-61
32
1F
J71-02
TU
67
42
J72-62
68
43
J72-63
1-27
Not used
69
44
J72-64
70
45
J72-80
PK
71
46
J72-81
FNS
72
47
J72-82
73
48
J72-83
74
49
J72-90
I ADJUSTMENT
(5) Data collection No. 7: Jam count / No. 10.
25 MODE
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
NO
KRDS
Parameter
(J0)

75
4A
J61-01
76
4B
J61-02
77
4C
J61-03
78
4D
J62-01
79
4E
J62-02
80
4F
J62-03
81
50
J62-04
82
51
J62-05
83
52
J62-06
84
53
J62-07
85
54
J17-10
86
55
87
56
88
57
89
58
90
59
Section
DF
LCT
Not used
1-28
25 MODE
NO
KRDS
Parameter
(F1)
Item
Count conditions
00
1-1 mode
01
1-2 mode
02
2-1 mode
03
2-2 mode
04
ADF 1-1 mode
05
ADF 1-2 mode
06
Mixed original mode
07
Tab original mode
08
Z-folded original mode
10
09
LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape (Reg.)
11
0A
LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait (Reg.)
12
0B
LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape (Rev.)
13
0C
LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait (Rev.)
14
0D
Enhance Mode: text/photo
15
0E
Enhance Mode: Text
16
0F
Enhance Mode: Photo
17
10
Enhance Mode: Map
18
11
Non STD size
19
12
1 oblique staple (Upper left)
20
13
1 oblique staple (Upper right)
21
14
2 parallel staples (Left binding)
22
15
2 parallel staples (Upper binding)
23
16
Left binding
24
17
Right binding
25
18
Upper binding
26
19
Three-Folding
27
1A
Stapling & Folding
28
1B
Folding
29
1C
Main tray: Group
30
1D
Main tray: Sort
31
1E
Main tray: Non sort
32
1F
Subtray: Group (FACE DOWN)
33
20
Subtray: Group (FACE UP)
34
21
Subtray: Sort (FACE DOWN)
35
22
Subtray: Sort (FACE UP)
36
23
Subtray: Non sort (FACE DOWN)
37
24
Subtray: Non sort (FACE UP)
38
25
Cover sheet
39
26
Trimmer
40
27
Real size copy
41
28
Preset magnification E4
42
29
43
2A
1-29
I ADJUSTMENT
(6) Data collection No. 8-1: Count of each copy mode (1)
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
NO
KRDS
Parameter
(F1)
Item
Count conditions
44
2B
45
2C
Preset magnification R4
46
2D
47
2E
48
2F
49
30
User lens mode 1
50
31
User lens mode 2
51
32
User lens mode 3
52
33
Zoom
53
34
Vertical/Horizontal zoom
54
35
Maximum zoom
55
36
Minimum zoom
56
37
APS
57
38
AMS
58
39
AE (AES)
59
3A
User density level 1 (Not used)
60
3B
User density level 2 (Not used)
61
3C
Interrupted copy
62
3D
Auto image rotation cancellation
63
3E
Sheet insertion
64
3F
Chapter control
65
40
Combination
66
41
Booklet copy
67
42
OHP interleave (copy) (Not used)
68
43
OHP interleave (blank) (Not used)
69
44
Image insert
70
45
Book copy
71
46
Program job
72
47
Non-image area erase
73
48
Reverse image
74
49
Auto repeat
75
4A
Manual repeat
76
4B
STD size repeat
77
4C
Frame erasure
78
4D
Fold erasure
79
4E
Auto layout
80
4F
All-image area (Not used)
81
50
Image Shift
82
51
Reduction shift
83
52
Overlay
84
53
Water mark
85
54
Stamp
86
55
Date/Time
87
56
Page
1-30

KRDS
Parameter
(F1)
Item
Count conditions
I ADJUSTMENT
NO
25 MODE
88
57
Numbering
89
58
Set quantity 1
90
59
Set quantity 2-5
91
5A
Set quantity 6-10
92
5B
Set quantity 11 or more
93
5C
Time while power remote 1 is ON
Accumulation of time during which the

overall control board is powered
94
5D
95
5E
remote power 1 is on (in minutes)

remote power 2 is on (in minutes)
96
5F
97
60
Time during Low Power mode
Accumulation of time in the low power
built-in controller operates (in minutes)

mode (1 count for each minute)
98
61
Time during warm up time
Accumulation of warm-up time (in min-
99
62
Time during front door open
Accumulation of time during which the front
utes)
door is open (in minutes)
100
63
Ope. Time in 1side straight exit
Accumulation of time from the start of
101
64
Ope. Time in 1side reverse exit
print to the end of print (in minutes)
102
65
Operation time in 2 side print
Down time due to jam omitted
103
66
Operation time in ADF mode
Accumulation of time during which ADF

operates (in minutes)
104
67
Morning Correction count (Not used)
105
68
Time during APS sensor ON

APS sensor is on (in minutes)
106
69
N of main tray used jobs
107
6A
N of subtray used jobs
108
6B
N of stapling & folding used jobs
109
6C
N of folding used jobs
110
6D
N of ADF NF occurred
111
6E
N of ADF special error1 occurred
Wrong detection of original size
112
6F
Next original information error
113
70
Error in size for which mixed paper is

not allowed
114
71
N of scanner scanned
115
72
N of electrode cleaned (Not used)
No. of scans in platen mode
116
73
N of memory overflow
117
74
N of fixing alarm occurred (Not used)
118
75
N of no toner stop occurred (Not used)
119
76
N of AGC retry (Not used)
120
77
N of sub scan beam correct error (Not used)
121
78
N of mis-centering correct error (Not used)
1-31
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
NO
KRDS
Parameter
(F1)
Item
Count conditions
122
79
N of distortion adjust error (Not used)
123
7A
N of ADF distortion data error (Not used)
124
7B
Compression memory overflow
125
7C
Page memory overflow (scan)
126
7D
Page memory overflow (print)
127
7E
FNS alarm (tray/trimming)
128
7F
FNS alarm (staple)
129
80
Scanner count
130
81
N of ADF special error4 occurred (Not used)
131
82
Store for HDD (Sync. With Copying)

(Not used)
132
83
Store for HDD (SRVmode Scan HDD)
133
84
Store for PC (SRVmode Scan PC)
(Not used)
(Not used)
134
85
Store for PC (SRVmode HDD PC)
135
86
Recall from HDD (SRVmode HDD) (Not used)
136
87
Recall from PC (SRVmode PC) (Not used)
137
88
Image edit count by SRV
138
89
Wide paper count (A3W) or (11 x 17R)
139
8A
Wide paper count (A4W) or (8.5 x 11W)
140
8B
Wide paper count (A4WR) or (8.5 x 11RW)
141
8C
Wide paper count (A5W) or (5.5 x 8.5W)
142
8D
Wide paper count (Others)
143
8E
Punch
144
8F
Z-Folding (Not used)
145
90
146
91
MixPlex (1 side)
147
92
MixPlex (2 side)
148
93
ADF original-thin
149
94
150
95
151
96
152
97
153
98
(Not used)
154
99
155
9A
156
9B
157
9C
158
9D
159
9E
160
9F
1-32
25 MODE
NO
KRDS
Parameter
(F1)
Item
00
ACS
01
Full color
02
Monochrome
03
Mono color (Y)
04
Mono color (M)
05
Mono color (C)
06
Mono color (R)
07
Mono color (G)
08
Mono color (B)
10
09
DF thick paper
Count conditions
11
0A
DF thin paper
12
0B
Original type: Printed paper
13
0C
Original type: Photo paper
14
0D
Original type: Copied paper
15
0E
Original type: Inkjet paper
16
0F
Original type: Pencil
17
10
Original type: Newspaper
18
11
Screen: Line screen/Smooth tone
19
12
Screen: Line screen/High resolution
20
13
Screen: Dot screen/Smooth tone
21
14
Screen: Dot screen/High resolution
22
15
Screen: High compression
23
16
Gloss mode
24
17
Density shift
25
18
Background adjustment
26
19
Red adjust
27
1A
Green adjust
28
1B
Blue adjust
29
1C
Hue adjustment
30
1D
Saturation adjustment
31
1E
Brightness adjustment
32
1F
Color balance adjustment
33
20
Sharpness adjustment
34
21
Contrast adjustment
35
22
Image judge adjustment
36
23
Paper Type: Normal paper
37
24
Paper Type: Recycle paper
38
25
Paper Type: Color paper
39
26
Paper Type: High quality paper
40
27
Paper Type: Coated paper
41
28
Paper Type: Tab paper
42
29
Paper Type: Color specific paper
43
2A
Paper Type: Exclusive paper A
1-33
I ADJUSTMENT
(7) Data collection No. 8-2: Count of each copy mode (2)
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
NO
KRDS
Parameter
(F1)
Item
Count conditions
44
2B
Paper Type: Exclusive paper B
45
2C
Paper Type: Exclusive paper C
46
2D
Paper Type: Exclusive paper D
47
2E
Paper Weight: 1
48
2F
Paper Weight: 2
49
30
Paper Weight: 3
50
31
Paper Weight: 4
51
32
Paper Weight: 5
52
33
Paper Weight: 6
53
34
Multi page enlargement
54
35
Main Tray: Face up
55
36
N of no toner stop occurred (Y)
56
37
N of no toner stop occurred (M)
57
38
N of no toner stop occurred (C)
58
39
N of no toner stop occurred (K)
59
3A
N of toner recovery box is full
60
3B
N of color regist. auto. adj.
Counts 1 per every correction operation
61
3C
N of auto stability control
Counts 1 per every correction operation
62
3D
63
3E
64
3F
65
40
OFF mode time
Sum of the OFF mode time (unit: minute)
66
41
ON time of heater (Main body)
Sum of the time the heater is on (unit: minute)
67
42
ON time of heater (tray 4)
Sum of the time the LCT heater is on (unit: minute)
68
43
Polygon motor operation time
Sum of the time the polygon motor is on (unit: minute)
69
44
Develop motor ope. time (color)
Sum of the time the developing motor

(color) operates (unit: minute)
70
45
Develop motor ope. time (black)
71
46
ON time of PCL (color)
Sum of the time the developing motor

(black) operates (unit: minute)
Sum of the time the PCL (color) is on
(unit: minute)
72
47
ON time of PCL (black)
Sum of the time the PCL (black) is on
73
48
Operation time in Scanner motor
Sum of the time the scanner motor oper-
(unit: minute)
ates (unit: minute)
74
49
Time while power (ADF)
Sum of the time the 24V is applied to the
75
4A
76
4B
77
4C
78
4D
Number of the executions of the toner
ADF (unit: minute)
1 count for each execution
refresh Y (auto)
79
4E

refresh M (auto)
1-34

KRDS
Parameter
(F1)
80
4F
Item
Count conditions
I ADJUSTMENT
NO
25 MODE
refresh C (auto)
81
50
refresh K (auto)
82
51
Number of the manual executions of the
toner refresh
83
52
Number of the executions of the filming
recovery mode
84
53
Paper type selection: Exclusive paper E
85
54
Paper type selection: Exclusive paper F
86
55
Paper type selection: Exclusive paper G
87
56
Paper type selection: Exclusive paper H
88
57
Paper type selection: Exclusive paper I
89
58
Paper type selection: Exclusive paper J
1-35
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
(8) Data collection No. 9: SC occurrence count/
NO
No. 11: Sectional SC occurrence count

NO
KRDS
Parameter
(E0)
SC code
00
SC10-10
Section
KRDS
Parameter
(E0)
SC code
Section
High voltage
abnormality
36
23
SC28-01
37
24
SC28-02
Communication
abnormality
38
25
SC28-03
39
26
SC28-04
Paper feed motor

abnormality
40
27
SC29-01
41
28
SC29-02
Paper feed tray

abnormality
42
29
SC29-03
43
2A
SC29-04
01
SC13-01
02
SC13-02
03
SC18-01
04
SC18-02
05
SC18-03
44
2B
SC29-06
06
SC18-04
45
2C
SC29-07
07
SC18-50
46
2D
SC29-08
LT abnormality
Process
abnormality
08
SC18-51
47
2E
SC29-09
10
09
SC18-60
48
2F
SC29-10
11
0A
SC18-61
49
30
SC29-11
12
0B
SC18-70
50
31
SC29-12
13
0C
SC18-71
51
32
SC29-13
14
0D
SC20-10
52
33
SC29-14
15
0E
SC20-11
53
34
SC29-15
16
0F
SC20-12
54
35
SC29-16
17
10
SC21-01
55
36
SC29-17
18
11
SC21-02
56
37
SC29-18
19
12
SC21-03
57
38
SC29-19
20
13
SC21-04
58
39
SC29-20
21
14
SC23-01
59
3A
SC29-21
22
15
SC23-02
60
3B
SC29-22
23
16
SC23-03
61
3C
SC29-23
24
17
SC23-04
62
3D
SC30-01
25
18
SC23-05
63
3E
SC30-02
26
19
SC23-06
64
3F
SC30-10
27
1A
SC23-07
Communication
abnormality
28
1B
SC23-08
65
40
SC32-01
Fan abnormality
29
1C
SC23-09
66
41
SC32-02
30
1D
SC23-10
Transfer belt
section abnormality
67
42
SC32-03
31
1E
SC23-11
Toner supply
abnormality
68
43
SC32-04
69
44
SC32-05
Communication
abnormality
PCL abnormality
Developing motor
abnormality
Drum motor
abnormality
32
1F
SC27-01
L-detection
abnormality
70
45
SC32-06
71
46
SC33-01
33
20
SC27-02
72
47
SC33-02
34
21
SC27-03
L-detection
abnormality
73
48
SC33-03
35
22
SC27-04
74
49
SC33-04
1-36
Motor
abnormality

NO
KRDS
Parameter
(E0)
SC code
Section
115
72
SC45-01
116
73
SC45-03
Color registration
abnormality
117
74
SC45-07
118
75
SC45-08
SC34-05
119
76
SC45-09
SC34-06
120
77
SC45-10
50
SC34-07
121
78
SC45-11
82
51
SC34-08
122
79
SC45-12
83
52
SC35-01
123
7A
SC45-20
84
53
SC35-02
124
7B
SC46-01
85
54
SC35-03
125
7C
SC46-02
86
55
SC35-04
126
7D
SC46-03
87
56
SC35-05
127
7E
SC46-05
88
57
SC35-06
128
7F
SC46-06
89
58
SC36-02
129
80
SC46-07
90
59
SC36-04
130
81
SC46-08
91
5A
SC36-05
131
82
SC46-09
92
5B
SC36-06
132
83
SC46-11
93
5C
SC36-07
133
84
SC46-12
94
5D
SC36-08
134
85
SC46-13
95
5E
SC36-09
135
86
SC46-14
96
5F
SC36-10
136
87
SC46-15
97
60
SC36-11
137
88
SC46-16
98
61
SC36-12
138
89
SC46-17
NO
KRDS
Parameter
(E0)
SC code
75
4A
SC34-01
76
4B
SC34-02
77
4C
SC34-03
78
4D
SC34-04
79
4E
80
4F
81
Section
High fixing
temperature
abnormality
Low fixing
temperature
abnormality
Fixing sensor
abnormality
99
62
SC38-02
139
8A
SC46-18
100
63
SC38-03
140
8B
SC46-19
101
64
SC39-01
141
8C
SC46-21
102
65
SC41-01
Scanner
abnormality
142
8D
SC46-23
143
8E
SC46-24
103
66
SC41-02
144
8F
SC46-25
104
67
SC41-03
Write
abnormality
145
90
SC46-26
105
68
SC41-04
146
91
SC46-31
106
69
SC41-05
147
92
SC46-32
107
6A
SC41-06
Scanner
abnormality
148
93
SC46-35
108
6B
SC41-07
149
94
SC46-40
109
6C
SC41-08
Write
abnormality
150
95
SC46-41
110
6D
SC41-09
151
96
SC46-42
111
6E
SC41-10
152
97
SC46-43
112
6F
SC41-11
153
98
SC46-58
113
70
SC42-01
154
99
SC46-59
114
71
SC42-02
155
9A
SC46-62
156
9B
SC46-63
157
9C
SC46-64
158
9D
SC46-66
Fan abnormality
1-37
Image
processing
abnormality
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
NO
KRDS
Parameter
(E0)
SC code
159
9E
SC46-80
160
9F
SC46-81
161
A0
SC46-82
162
A1
163
164
Section
NO
KRDS
Parameter
(E0)
SC code
Section
197
C4
SC77-02
FNS abnormality
198
C5
SC77-03
199
C6
SC77-04
SC46-83
200
C7
SC77-05
A2
SC46-90
201
C8
A3
SC46-91
202
C9
SC77-06
165
A4
SC46-98
203
CA
SC77-07
166
A5
SC46-99
204
CB
SC77-08
167
A6
SC49-00
205
CC
SC77-11
168
A7
SC49-01
206
CD
SC77-12
169
A8
SC49-02
207
CE
SC77-13
170
A9
SC50-01
208
CF
SC77-14
171
AA
SC50-02
209
D0
SC77-21
172
AB
SC50-03
210
D1
SC77-22
173
AC
SC50-04
211
D2
SC77-25
174
AD
SC50-05
212
D3
SC77-26
175
AE
SC50-10
213
D4
SC77-31
176
AF
SC50-11
214
D5
SC77-32
177
B0
SC52-01
215
D6
SC77-33
178
B1
SC52-02
216
D7
SC77-34
179
B2
SC52-03
217
D8
SC77-35
180
B3
SC56-02
218
D9
SC77-36
181
B4
SC56-11
219
DA
SC37-37
182
B5
SC56-12
220
DB
SC77-41
183
B6
SC56-13
221
DC
SC77-42
184
B7
SC60-01
222
DD
185
B8
SC61-01
223
DE
SC77-43
186
B9
SC61-02
224
E0
SC77-44
PK abnormality
187
BA
SC61-03
225
E0
SC77-45
Not used
188
BB
SC61-04
226
E1
SC77-46
189
BC
SC61-05
227
E2
SC77-47
PK abnormality
190
BD
SC61-06
228
E3
SC77-52
Not used
191
BE
SC61-07
229
E4
SC77-53
192
BF
SC61-08
230
E5
SC77-54
PK abnormality
193
C0
SC61-09
231
E6
SC77-55
Not used
194
C1
SC61-10
232
E7
SC77-56
195
C2
SC70-01
233
E8
SC77-57
196
C3
SC77-01
234
E9
SC77-81
235
EA
SC77-91
236
EB
SC77-92
237
EC
SC77-98
238
ED
SC77-99
Image
processing
abnormality
Communication
abnormality
Fan abnormality
Operation board
abnormality
DF abnormality
1-38
TU abnormality
PI abnormality
FNS abnormality
NO
KRDS
Parameter
(E0)
SC code
Section
239
EE
SC80-01
240
EF
SC80-02
Communication
abnormality
241
F0
SC80-03
242
F1
SC80-11
243
F2
SC80-21
244
F3
SC80-30
245
F4
SC80-31
246
F5
SC80-32
247
F6
SC80-40
248
F7
SC89-01
249
F8
SC89-02
250
F9
SC89-03
251
FA
SC89-04
252
FB
SC32-07
253
FC
254
FD
255
FE
256
FF
257
G0
258
G1
259
G2
260
G3
262
G4
263
G5
264
G6
265
G7
266
G8
267
G9
268
GA
269
GB
270
GC
271
GD
272
GE
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
ISW abnormality
Main body
abnormality
Fan abnormality
1-39
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
6.7
Parts counter
The following are conducted with respect to each

replacement part: display of copy count used, resetting of count, setting of limit value, and new registration of replacement parts.
The copy count by parts that need to be replaced
includes the following:
Count of special parts
Count of each parts
6.7.1 Count of special parts
When a periodically replaced part is replaced, reset
the counter of the part that has been replaced.
Display the name, part number and the copy count
of a replacement part that has been registered, and
reset the count.
A. Procedure
Press the [5. Parts counter] key.
3. "Parts counter menu screen"
Press the [1. Count of special parts] key.
4. "Parts counter (fixed) screen"
Press the arrow key to select a part that you
want to reset.
5. Press the [Count reset] key.
6. "Parts count reset screen"
Press the [YES] key when resetting the part
count. The part count is reset.
Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Parts counter
menu screen" with the part count not reset.
1-40
25 MODE
NO
KRDS
Parts name
Parameter
P/N
I ADJUSTMENT
B. Count of special parts list

Count conditions
(Parts No.)
(F1)
1
00
Toner collection box
65AA-245
01
Ozone filter /1 (Right side)
65AA1043
02
Deodorant filter (Rear side)
65AA1137
03
Dust-proof filter /1 (Right side)
65AA1044
04
Dust-proof filter /2 (Rear side)
65AA-142
05
Charging dust proof filter
65AA-387
06
Drum cartridge /Y
65AA-200
07
Drum /Y
65AA-219
08
Drum cleaning blade /Y
65AA2003
10
09
Lubricant applying unit /Y
65AA-202
11
0A
12
0B
Drum cartridge /M
65AA-200
13
0C
Drum /M
65AA-219
14
0D
Drum cleaning blade /M
65AA2003
15
0E
Lubricant applying unit /M
65AA-202
16
0F
17
10
Drum cartridge /C
65AA-200
18
11
Drum /C
65AA-219
19
12
Drum cleaning blade /C
65AA2003
20
13
Lubricant applying unit /C
65AA-202
21
14
22
15
Drum cartridge /K
65AA-200
23
16
Drum /K
65AA-219
24
17
Drum cleaning blade /K
65AA2003
25
18
Lubricant applying unit /K
65AA-202
26
19
27
1A
Charging corona /Y
28
1B
Charging wire assy /Y
65AA-252
29
1C
Charging grid plate /Y
65AA2507
30
1D
Charging corona /M
65AA-250
31
1E
Charging wire assy /M
65AA-252
*1
*2
*2
*1
65AA-250
32
1F
Charging grid plate /M
65AA2507
33
20
Charging corona /C
65AA-250
34
21
Charging wire assy /C
65AA-252
35
22
Charging grid plate /C
65AA2507
36
23
Charging corona /K
65AA-250
37
24
Charging wire assy /K
65AA-252
38
25
Charging grid plate /K
65AA2507
39
26
Transfer belt unit
*2
*1
Old type:
65AA-260
New type:
65LA-260
40
27
Transfer belt
65AA2642
1-41
25 MODE
NO
KRDS
Parts name
I ADJUSTMENT
Parameter
P/N
Count conditions
(Parts No.)
(F1)
41
28
1st transfer roller /Y
65AA2612
42
29
1st transfer roller /M
65AA2612
43
2A
1st transfer roller /C
65AA2612
44
2B
1st transfer roller /K
65AA2604
45
2C
2nd transfer roller /U
65AA2611
46
2D
Transfer belt separation claw
65AA-287
47
2E
Transfer belt cleaning
Old type:
unit
65AA-275
*2
*1
New type:
65LA-275
48
2F
Belt cleaning brush unit
Old type:
65AA-288
New type:
65LA-288
49
30
Toner collection sheet /1
65AA-293
50
31
Belt cleaning blade
65AA2630
51
32
2nd transfer roller /L
65AA4501
52
33
Separation discharging
65AA-452
53
34
65AA-573
54
35
Fixing roller /U
65AA5301
55
36
Fixing roller /L
65AA5302
56
37
Developer /Y (Page)
unit
Old type:
*2
65AA3079
New type:
65LA (/LK/LQ) 3079
57
38
Developer /M (Page)
6Old type:
65AA3080
New type:
65LA (/LK/LQ) 3080
58
39
Developer /C (Page)
Old type:
65AA3081
New type:
65LA (/LK/LQ) 3081
59
3A
Developer /K (Page)
Old type:
*1
65AA3082
New type:
65LA (/LK/LQ) 3082
60
3B
Developing unit /Y
65AA-300
61
3C
Developing unit /M
65AA-300
62
3D
Developing unit /C
65AA-300
63
3E
Developing unit /K
65AA-300
1-42
*2
*1

KRDS
Parts name
Parameter
P/N
Count conditions
(Parts No.)
I ADJUSTMENT
NO
25 MODE
(F1)
64
3F
Developer /Y (Distance)
Old type:
65AA3079
Displays developing sleeve travel distance

(in meters)
New type:
65LA (/LK/LQ) 3079
65
40
Developer /M (Distance)
Old type:
65AA3080
New type:
65LA (/LK/LQ) 3080
66
41
Developer /C (Distance)
Old type:
65AA3081
New type:
65LA (/LK/LQ) 3081
67
42
Developer /K (Distance)
Old type:
65AA3082
New type:
65LA (/LK/LQ) 3082
68
43
69
44
FNS tray up/down motor
13QE-115
70
45
FNS stapler /F
20AK4241
1 count for each FNS main tray paper exit

1 count for each 1 paper exit in staple mode
1 count for each paper exit in each of
the 1-staple at front, 2-staple and the
stitch-and-fold modes
71
46
FNS stapler /R
20AK4241
1 count for each paper exit in each of

the 1-staple at front, 2-staple and the
stitch-and-fold modes
72
47
FNS shift motor
12QR-361
1 count for each paper exit at even num-
73
48
FNS exit opening motor
12QR-361
1 count for starting the job of "large size"
ber of copies in the sort mode

(A4R/8.5 x 11R or larger) in the staple
mode, and 1 count for each paper exit
1 count for starting each of the stitchand-fold and folding jobs
74
49
FNS folding knife motor
13QJ-502
1 count for each copy exit in each of the

stitch-and-fold and folding and the threefolding modes
75
4A
Bypass gate solenoid
12QR-263
1 count for each A4 / B5 / 8.5 x 11 / 16K

copy exit in the staple mode
76
4B
Tri-folding gate SD
12QR-263
1 count for each copy exit in the three-
77
4C
Pl conveyance clutch /U
13QN8201
1 count for each paper feed in PI upper
78
4D
Pl feed roller /A /U
50BA-574
stand
79
4E
Pl feed roller /B /U
50BA-575
80
4F
Pl reverse roller /U
13QN-443
1 count for each paper feed in PI upper
81
50
Pl torque limiter /U
13QN4073
stand
folding mode
1-43
25 MODE
NO
KRDS
Parts name
I ADJUSTMENT
Parameter
P/N
Count conditions
(Parts No.)
(F1)
82
51
Pl conveyance clutch /L
13QN8201
1 count for each paper feed in PI lower
83
52
Pl feed roller /A /L
50BA-574
stand
84
53
Pl feed roller /B /L
50BA-575
85
54
Pl reverse roller /L
13QN-443
86
55
Pl torque limiter /L
13QN4073
87
56
Trimmer blade
13LHK001/002 1 count for each cutter operation
88
57
PK punching unit (2 hole)
14EA/14EF
89
58
14EB
90
59
14EE/14EG
91
5A
92
5B
ADF paper feed roller
13YH4064
93
5C
ADF feed roller
13YH4039
94
5D
95
5E
ADF Dfeed prevention
96
5F
1 count for each punch operation
Original passage count in all modes
20AJ4015
Original passage count in all modes
20AJ8251
1 count for each original passage in the
roller
ADF exit solenoid
double side copy mode and the mixing

original mode
97
60
ADF feed clutch
13YH8059
Single side copy mode: 1 count for each

original
Double side copy mode: 3 counts for
each original
98
61
ADF reversal solenoid
20AJ8251
1 count for each original passage in the

double side copy mode and the mixing
original mode
99
62
100
63
Exposure ON time
65AA8301
Accumulation of on-time (in: minute)
101
64
Sub power switch
65AA8603
1 count each time the sub power switch

turns off the power
102
65
Door SW
40AA8501
1 count each time the front door is
103
66
Toner supply door switch
13GG-802
1 count each time the toner supply door
opened
is opened
104
67
Main power SW
55GA8601
1 count each time the main power
105
68
Pl regist clutch
13QN8202
1 count each time PI feeds a sheet
106
69
Punch motor
54008004
1 count for each punch operation
107
6A
108
6B
Paper exit roller /A
122H4825
1 count for each FNS main tray paper exit
109
6C
Intermediate conveyance
13QE4531
1 count for each sheet in each of the
switch turns off the power
roller
110
6D
Stacking assist roller
111
6E
112
6F
Fixing torque limiter
FNS flat stapling, stitch-and-fold, folding

20AK4210
and three-folding modes
65AA5365
*1
1-44

KRDS
Parts name
Parameter
P/N
Count conditions
(Parts No.)
I ADJUSTMENT
NO
25 MODE
(F1)
113
70
Registration cleaning
65AA462
sheet
1 count for each paper exit in the single

side copy mode
2 counts in the double side copy mode
114
71
Ball bearing /U
45407504
*1
115
72
Heat insulating sleeve /U
45405339
116
73
Intermediate convey. clutch /1
56AA8201
117
74
56AA8201
side copy mode
118
75
56AA8201
119
76
Feed/Dfeed rubber (Tray-1)
25SA4096
1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1
120
77
25SA4096
121
78
25SA4096
122
79
Feed/Dfeed rubber (Bypass)
25SA4096
1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the bypass tray
123
7A
Registration roller
65AA4601
124
7B
Separation claw solenoid
26NA8251
side copy mode
125
7C
Fixing upper lamp /1
65AA8303/
1 count for each paper exit of paper sup-
65AF8303
plied from the tray 1
126
7D
65AA8304/
*1
65AF8304
65AA: For Japan and inch area
127
7E
Fixing lower lamp
65AA8305/
65EA: For metric area
65AF8305
128
7F
Fixing temp. sensor /3
65AA-553
129
80
Fixing temp. sensor /4
65AA-554
130
81
Paper feed roller (Tray-1)
56AA-458
131
82
56AA-458
132
83
56AA-458

133
84
Paper feed roller (Bypass)
65AA-520
134
85
ADU conveyance clutch /1
56AA8201
1 count for each paper exit in the double
135
86
56AA8201
side copy mode (no count is made in the
136
87
ADU pre-registration clutch
56AA8201
single side copy mode)

*1
plied from the bypass tray
137
88
Ball bearing /L
26NA5371
138
89
Heat insulating sleeve /L
65AA5341
139
8A
Fixing drive gear
65AA7727
140
8B
Decurler roller
65AA4905

side copy mode
1-45
25 MODE
NO
KRDS
Parts name
P/N
I ADJUSTMENT
Parameter
Count conditions
(Parts No.)
(F1)
141
8C
LCT paper feed roller
55VA-484
142
8D
LCT feed/Dfeed roller
55VA-483
plied from the LCT
143
8E
LCT feed clutch
56AA8201
144
8F
LCT pre-registration clutch
56AA8201
145
90
Paper feed clutch (Tray-1)
56AA8201
146
91
Pre-regist. clutch (Tray-1)
56AA8201
147
92
56AA8201
148
93
56AA8201
149
94
56AA8201
150
95
56AA8201
151
96
Paper feed clutch
56AA8202
(Bypass)
152
97
1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the bypass tray
Transfer earth plate unit
65AA-456

side copy mode
153
98
Center fixing temp. sensor /U
65AA8801
154
99
Center fixing temp. sensor /L
65AA8802
155
100
Paper exit guide roller /2
65AA4818
156
101
Paper exit roller
(New type only)

65LA4808
(New type only)

157
102
Paper exit roller /U
65LA5343
(New type only)

*1
Count in all color modes

25DIPSW8-6 = 0: 1 count for each paper exit
in the single side copy mode, and 2 counts in
the double side copy mode
= 1: 2 counts for each large size paper exit in
the single side copy mode, and 4 counts in the
double side copy mode
*2
Count only in full color or single color mode

25DIPSW8-6 = 0: 1 count for each paper exit
in the single side copy mode, and 2 counts in
the double side copy mode
= 1: 2 counts for each large size paper exit in
the single side copy mode, and 4 counts in the
double side copy mode
1-46
*1
25 MODE
(1) Procedure
This is used when you want to control the part
counter.
Set the part name, part number and the limit value,
and display and reset the copy count.

Up to 30 data from No. 01 to No. 30 can be set. A

count is taken for each passage of paper, regardless of the paper size.

Press the [2. Count of each parts] key.
4. "Count of each part screen"
Reference:
When the copy count is in excess of a limit
value, an asterisk [*] is shown to the left of No.
A. Setting of each replacement part and dis-
Press the arrow key to select a number you

want to set or change.
5. Press the [COUNT RESET] key.
6. "Parts count reset screen"
play of the copy count

(1) Procedure
Press the [YES] key when resetting a part

count. This resets the part counter.
Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Count of

each part" with the part count not reset.

Press the [2. Count of each parts] key.
4. "Copy count of each part screen"
Press the arrow key to select a number you
want to set or change.
5. Press one of the [Parts name setting], [P/N
setting] and [Limit setting] key.
6. Press an item you want to set or change out of
the [Parts name setting], [P/N setting] and
[Limit setting] key, and enter it with the alphanumeric keys.
[Part name setting]: Enter a part name (8 digits
in alphanumeric)
[P/N setting]: Enter a part number (9 digits in
alphanumeric)
[Limit setting]: Limit value (8 digits in numeric)
7. Press the [OK] key to update the data.
changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
1-47
I ADJUSTMENT
B. Resetting of each replacement part
6.7.2 Count of each parts
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
C. Relationship between each data No. and

KRDS parameter
NO PARTS NAME
P/N
COUNT
LIMIT
Z4:00
Z3:00
G0:00
H0:00
Z4:01
Z3:01
G0:01
H0:01
Z4:02
Z3:02
G0:02
H0:02
Z4:03
Z3:03
G0:03
H0:03
Z4:04
Z3:04
G0:04
H0:04
Z4:05
Z3:05
G0:05
H0:05
Z4:06
Z3:06
G0:06
H0:06
Z4:07
Z3:07
G0:07
H0:07
Z4:08
Z3:08
G0:08
H0:08
10
Z4:09
Z3:09
G0:09
H0:09
11
Z4:0A
Z3:0A
G0:0A
H0:0A
12
Z4:0B
Z3:0B
G0:0B
H0:0B
13
Z4:0C
Z3:0C
G0:0C
H0:0C
14
Z4:0D
Z3:0D
G0:0D
H0:0D
15
Z4:0E
Z3:0E
G0:0E
H0:0E
16
Z4:0F
Z3:0F
G0:0F
H0:0F
17
Z4:10
Z3:10
G0:10
H0:10
18
Z4:11
Z3:11
G0:11
H0:11
19
Z4:12
Z3:12
G0:12
H0:12
20
Z4:13
Z3:13
G0:13
H0:13
21
Z4:14
Z3:14
G0:14
H0:14
22
Z4:15
Z3:15
G0:15
H0:15
23
Z4:16
Z3:16
G0:16
H0:16
24
Z4:17
Z3:17
G0:17
H0:17
25
Z4:18
Z3:18
G0:18
H0:18
26
Z4:19
Z3:19
G0:19
H0:19
27
Z4:1A
Z3:1A
G0:1A
H0:1A
28
Z4:1B
Z3:1B
G0:1B
H0:1B
29
Z4:1C
Z3:1C
G0:1C
H0:1C
30
Z4:1D
Z3:1D
G0:1D
H0:1D
1-48
Password setting
6.9
Telephone number setting
Set the following passwords.
Set the customer support center telephone and FAX
Key operator password (4 digits): Password
numbers that are used in an emergency for a ser-
used to enter the key operator mode.
vice call and shown on the basic screen for help.
EKC master key code (8 digits): Password

required when entering various EKC setting
modes.
Weekly timer password (4 digits): Password
required when entering various weekly timer setting modes.
A. Procedure
Press the [7. Telephone number setting] key.
Note:
A password can be set only when the set-
3. "Customer support TEL/FAX setting screen"
ting for use of the weekly timer is set to
Press either of the [Service centre Telephone
"Use" in the key operator mode.
number (16 digits)] and [Service centre FAX

number (16)] keys that you want to set.
A. Procedure
4. Enter a TEL or FAX number through the
numeric keys.
Press the [6. Password setting] key.

3. "Password setting mode screen"

Press the key of an item you want to set.
Key operator password (4 digits)
Note:
EKC master key code (8 digits)
When a number is less than 16 digits, be sure
Weekly timer password (4 digits)
to use hyphens to fill up the blanks.
4. Enter a new password through the numeric

keys.
Note:
Setting "0000" for the key operator password
and the weekly timer password allows you to
use each mode with no password.
1-49
I ADJUSTMENT
6.8
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
6.10 M/C serial number setting
6.11 Indication of ROM version
Display and set the serial numbers of the main body
Display the ROM versions of the main body and the
and options.
option and a product number that discriminates a

new ROM from an old ROM.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure
Press the [8. M/C serial number setting] key.
Press the [9. Indication of ROM version] key.
3. "Serial number setting mode screen"

Press the key of an item you want to set and
3. "Indication of ROM version screen"
enter a serial number through the alphanu-
Each ROM version and product number are
meric keys.
displayed.

5. To invalidate the setting that you have
Old type
New type
Image control I
65AA
65LA
Printer control C
65AA
65LA
Operation O
65A*
65L*
Finisher N
20AK
20GA
Note:
Note:
The serial number of the main body cannot be
changed.
* varies according to the destination.

6.12 KRDS setting

See the "KRDS manual."
6.13 ISW
See chapter "Service tools."
1-50
6.14 Setting date input
6.15 Board change mode
Set the starting date of the total counter that is dis-
When changing any of the following four types of
played on the LCD in the P function.
boards, be sure to set the serial number of the main

body in this setting.
A. Procedure
OPERATION (operation board /1)

OVERALL CB (overall control board)
NVRAM (memory board)

PRINTER (printer control board)

Press the [12.Setting date input] key.
Note:
3. "Setting date input screen"
The number of boards that can be replaced at
Enter an installation date through the numeric
the same time is restricted only to two boards.
keys.
A. Procedure

5. To invalidate the setting that you have

Press the [13. Board change mode] key.

3. "Board change mode screen"
Select a key of the board that you have
replaced a part.
4. "Serial number input screen"
Enter the serial number of the main body
through the alphanumeric keys.
1-51
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
7. 36 MODE
7.2
7.1
Make various adjustments around the process.
Setting method
This machine is provided with the 36 mode to make

various adjustment in this mode.
Process adjustment
A. Procedure
A. Procedure
1. With the main power switch (SW1) left ON,

turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2).
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.

3. "Process adjustment mode menu screen"
2. Turn ON the SW2 while pressing the numeric

buttons 3 and 6 at the same time. The "36
For the process adjustment, there are the following items provided:
[1. High voltage adjustment]
mode menu screen" is shown.

At this point, the machine enters the 36 mode
[2. Drum peculiarity adjustment]

[3. Sensor output adjustment]
with the normal copy operation unavailable.
[4. Exclusive paper setting]

3. Press the item key on the liquid crystal display
(LCD) to show a setting screen of each item.
[5. Recall standard data]

4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
4. Confirm the details of input in the setting

screen of each item.

from each of the adjustment screen to the
5. Turn OFF the SW2 to release the 36 mode.
"Process adjustment menu screen."
6. New data will be effective after restarting.
1-52
36 MODE
Perform this adjustment when changing the belt

For the high voltage adjustment, the following items
cleaning blade or the transfer belt. In this mode,
are provided. However, be sure not to conduct a
apply toner onto the transfer belt then clean with the
high voltage adjustment in the field.
belt cleaning blade. This prevents the damages of
[1. 1st transfer manual adj.]
the transfer belt and the belt cleaning blade.
[2. 2nd transfer manual adj.]

a.
[3. HV adjustment (Separation AC)]

[4. HV adjustment (Separation DC)]
Procedure
[5. Pre-transfer guide HV check]
7.2.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment
Conduct the blade setting, charging potential correction, gamma, developer charge, L-detection
adjustment and the initial drum rotation.
3. "Process adjustment menu screen"

Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key.
4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen"
Press [1. Blade setting mode] key.
A. Procedure
5. "Blade setting mode screen"
Press the [Start] key. This process completes
in about 15 seconds and complete message is
shown on the screen.
to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu

screen."

For the drum peculiarity adjustment, the following items are provided:
[1. Blade setting mode]
[2. Automatic drum potential adj.]
[3. Automatic gamma adjustment]
[4. LD bias adjustment]
[5. Automatic developer charge]
[6. L-detect initial auto. adj.]
[7. Initial drum rotation]
from each of the adjustment screens to the
"Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen.
1-53
I ADJUSTMENT
(1) Blade setting mode
7.2.1 High voltage adjustment
36 MODE
(2) Automatic drum potential adjustment
I ADJUSTMENT
Measure the charging potential of each drum of Y,

M, C and K to adjust automatically the developing
bias value and the charging voltage.

This adjustment is not necessary because of the
automatic gamma adjustment contain this adjust4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen"
ment.
Press the [3. Automatic gamma adjustment]

a.
key.
Procedure
5. "Automatic gamma adjustment 0 screen"
There are 8 kinds of the gamma adjustment (0

to 7). However, conduct "Gamma auto adjust-
ment 0" in the field.

"Automatic gamma adjustment 0": Perform the

Dmax density adjustment, dot diameter adjustment, automatic drum potential adjustment,
and the gamma adjustment. The developing

Press [2. Automatic drum potential adjustment]
bias value is shown for each line speed (1/1
key.
speed, 1/2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each

color (Y, M, C and K) with a complete mes-
5. "Automatic drum potential adjustment screen"
sage.
in about 20 seconds and the charging potential
in about 2.5 minutes and the developing bias
is displayed for each line speed (1/1 speed, 1/
value is displayed for each line speed (1/1
2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each color (Y,
speed, 1/ 2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each
M, C and K) on the screen, with an exit mes-
color (Y, M, C and K) on the screen with a com-
sage shown.
plete message.

screen."
Note:
When an abnormality occurs, an error code
is displayed. Correct the error referring to
the following.
Error 1: The gamma correction is unavailable
due to the abnormal gamma sensor
(3) Automatic gamma adjustment

The gamma adjustment is performed automatically.
This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
mode by setting DIPSW12-1 to 1.
output.
When
an
error
occurs,
machine is controlled by using a

correction value previously used.
a.
Procedure

screen."
1-54

(4) LD bias adjustment
unit.
For the LD bias adjustment, the following items

are provided. Press the arrow key to select the
color of the write unit you just replaced.
"LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/1)"
Note:
Do not perform this adjustment except when
replacing the write unit.

"LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/1)"
Procedure
1. Read the numeric value on the bar code
"LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/1)"

labeled [1] on the replacing write unit.

"LD bias adjustment K (LS 1/1)"
7. Enter the numeric value on the bar code
labeled on the replacing write unit through the
numeric keys and press the [SET] key.
Note:
Be sure to enter the same numeric value in
LS 1/1, LS 1/2, and LS 1/3.
[1]
8050fs1025

screen."

Press the [4. LD bias adjustment] key.
1-55
I ADJUSTMENT
6. "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/1) screen"
Perform this adjustment when replacing the write
a.
36 MODE
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
(5) Automatic developer charge

In this mode, after discharging developer from the
developing unit manually, a new developer is automatically charged.
3. Set the developer charging plate /L [2] to the

shoulder screws [1] provided above the developing unit of a color the developer of which is
changed.
Note:
Do not open the upper cover of the developing unit. Otherwise, dust gets in the unit caus-
[2]
ing image failure.

a.
[1]
Procedure
1. Open the toner supply section.

2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the
developer charging plate [3] provided inside
the toner supply section [2]. Remove 2 screws
[4] and then remove the developer charging
funnel /L [5].
[2]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
8050fs1002
[1]
8050fs1003
1-56
developer charging plate [1].

Note:
Be sure to attach the tip of the developer
charging funnel /L [2] securely to the toner
supply opening [3].

Press the [5. Automatic developer charge] key.
[1]
10. "Automatic developer charge Y screen"

Press the arrow key to select the color of
developer you want to charge.
For the automatic developer charge, the following items are provided:
Automatic developer charge Y
Automatic developer charge M
Automatic developer charge C
Automatic developer charge K
11. Press the [Start] key to introduce a new developer into the developer charging funnel /U.
[3]
[2]
12. Make sure that the developer has been
8050fs1004
charged successfully before pressing the

5. Set the developer charging funnel /U [2] packaged together with developer to the developer
charging funnel /L [1].
[CANCEL] key.
13. When charging another developer, repeat
steps 3 to 11.
Note:
The developer charge funnel /U [2] is pack-
aged together with each developer. So, be
sure to avoid its reuse.
screen."
15. Return the installed parts back to their original
positions.
Note:
After completion of this adjustment, be sure
to perform the L-detect initial auto. adjustment. If printing is started without performing the L-detect initial auto. adjustment, a
proper image density cannot be obtained,
thus resulting in the change of developer
again.
[1]
[2]
8050fs1005
1-57
I ADJUSTMENT
4. Set the developer charging funnel /L [2] to the
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
(6) L-detect initial automatic adjustment
(7) Initial drum rotation
Be sure to conduct this adjustment after a new
When remove the drum cartridge, be sure to con-
developer is charged.
duct this operation to securely set the drum coupling.
Note:
Do not print without conducting the L-detect
initial auto. adjustment. Otherwise, a proper
image density cannot be obtained, thus
resulting in the change of developer again.
a.
Procedure

a.
Procedure
Press the [7. Initial drum rotation] key.

5. "Initial drum rotation screen"

in about 10 seconds and complete message is

Press the [6. L-detect initial auto. adjustment]
key.
shown on the screen.

5. "L-detect initial auto. adj. ALL screen"

Press the arrow key to select the color of a
developer that has been newly charged, and
then press the [Start] key.
For the L-detect initial auto. adj., the following
items are provided:
L-detect initial auto. adj. All: Conduct all colors
of Y, M,C and K.
L-detect initial auto. adj. YMC: Conduct Y, M
and C only.
L-detect initial auto. adj. K: Conduct K only.
L-detect initial auto. adj. Y: Conduct Y only.
L-detect initial auto. adj. M: Conduct M only.
L-detect initial auto. adj. C: Conduct C only.
6. A message "Completed" is displayed.
screen."
1-58
screen."

7.2.3 Sensor output check
7.2.4 Exclusive paper setting
For the sensor output check, the following items are
This setting is used when the user cannot obtain the
provided; however, do not conduct them in the field:
satisfactory results of transfer, separation or fixing
[1. Surface potential sensor output]
with the standard setting due to a special paper
[2. Max. density sensor output]
being used.
[3. Gamma sensor output]
This setting is applicable when [Exclusive paper A

to J] is selected in the key operator mode [Paper
type/ Special paper size set].
In default, the following paper data is entered for
each destination area.
For Japan: 80 g/m2 color specified paper
For inch area: 105 g/m2 color specified paper
For metric area: 90 g/m2 color specified paper
Note:
When setting data, be sure to follow the
instructions given by Konica Minolta Technology Support Section.
A. Procedure
Press the [4. Exclusive paper setting] key.
4. "User paper setting menu screen"
For the user paper setting menu, the following
items are provided which correspond to the
setting key of the same name in the key operator mode.
[1. Exclusive paper A setting]
[2. Exclusive paper B setting]
[3. Exclusive paper C setting]
[4. Exclusive paper D setting]
[5. Exclusive paper E setting]
[6. Exclusive paper F setting]
[7. Exclusive paper G setting]
[8. Exclusive paper H setting]
[9. Exclusive paper I setting]
[10. Exclusive paper J setting]
1-59
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
5. For setting, press the key of an item you want
Fixing (L) roller temp (print) *1
to set. Set the following 12 types of setting for
Change the fixing lower roller control tempera-
each exclusive paper A to J.
ture while in the printing.

Setting range: 0 to 255 (unit: C)
2nd transfer offset Side 1

Change the 2nd transfer current for 1-sided
Fixing (U and L) roller temp. difference
mode.
Change the control temperature difference
+ direction: decrease current value
between fixing upper and lower rollers from
- direction: increase current value
print start to 20th print.

Setting range: 0 (1C) to 255 (256C)
2nd transfer offset Side 2

Change the 2nd transfer current for 2-sided
Compulsion off (upper heater) paper width <
mode.
261 mm
+ direction: decrease current value
Temperature to turn off the fixing upper roller
- direction: increase current value
edge heater when printing paper less than 261

mm width (main scan direction). If it is lowered,
Separation AC offset Side 1

Change the separation AC current for 1-sided
the paper edge crease is improved, however,
mode.
do not lower more than 10C from the default
+ direction: increase current value up
(215C). Fixing related SC may occur.
- direction: decrease current value down

Compulsion off (upper heater) paper width >=
Separation AC offset Side 2

Change the separation AC current for 2-sided
261 mm
copy mode.
Temperature to turn off the fixing upper roller
edge heater when printing paper 261 mm or
more width (main scan direction). If it is lowered, the paper edge crease is improved, how-
Separation DC offset Side 1

Change the separation DC current for 1-sided
ever, do not lower more than 10C from the
copy mode.
default (235C). Fixing related SC may occur.

Line speed
Select from 1/1, 1/2 and 1/3.
Separation DC offset Side 2

Change the separation DC current for 2-sided
CPM down
copy mode.
Widen paper intervals without changing the line
speed and make the print speed 1/2 to prevent
tacking.
LCT fan
Fixing (U) roller temp (idle) *1
ON/OFF setting of LCT paper feed assist fan.
Change the fixing upper roller control temperature while in the idling.
*1
limit. The temperature limit changes accord-
Fixing (U) roller temp (print) *1

Change the fixing upper roller control temperature while in the printing.
ing to other setting values.

to the "User paper setting menu screen."
Fixing (L) roller temp (idle) *1

Change the fixing lower roller control temperature while in the idling.
For safety reasons, there is a temperature
1-60
36 MODE
Reset the adjusted set values of process adjustment to the standard data. (factory default data)
Note:
Data for automatic drum potential, automatic
gamma, L-detect initial auto. and exclusive
paper setting adjustment cannot be reset to
the standard data.
A. Procedure
Press the [5. Recall standard data] key.
4. "Recall standard data: Process adjustment
screen"
Press the [YES] key when recalling the standard data. Pressing the [NO] key or the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key returns to the "Process
adjustment menu screen" without recalling the
standard data.
1-61
I ADJUSTMENT
7.2.5 Recall standard data
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
7.3
Image adjustment
7.3.1 Magnification adjustment
Conduct various image adjustments.
Adjust various magnifications.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure

Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key.
For the image adjustment, the following items

are provided:
4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen"
[1. Magnification adjustment]
For the magnification adjustment, the following
[2. Timing adjustment]
items are provided:
[3. RADF adjustment]
[1. Printer vertical mag.adj.]
[4. Centring adjustment]
[2. Printer horizontal mag.adj.]
[5. Non-image area erase check]
[3. Scanner vertical mag.adj.]
[4. Belt line speed adjustment]

[5. Fixing line speed adjustment]

"Image adjustment menu screen."

"Magnification adjustment menu screen."
1-62
Adjust the vertical magnification of the printer system.
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the

START button to output a test pattern (No. 16).
This adjustment changes the line speed of the reg-
7. Measure the vertical magnification with a scale.
istration roller, drum, transfer belt and the fixing.
Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size)
Within 1 mm against 205.7 mm
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.

Note:
For the printer vertical magnification adjustment, the following two methods are avail-
205.7 1
able. Be sure to take care when an adjustment

is made.
8050fs1006
(1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment

Used when the vertical magnification has
been changed due to the wear of the regis-
8. When the value is not within the standard,
tration roller or the heat shrinkage of
press the C button while pressing the P button.
paper.
9. "Printer
(2) Belt line speed adjustment

been changed due to causes other than
the above.
In default, the printer vertical magnification
adjustment on side 2 is not reflected to the
image. When adjusting the vertical magnification on side 2, use the memory switch in the
key operator mode to turn ON side 2 drum
clock adjustment mode. However, since the
line speed is switched for each image creation
process on side 1 and side 2, the print speed
is reduced to about 1/4.
a.
vertical
magnification
adjustment
screen"
For the printer vertical magnification adjustment, the
following items are provided. Press the [NEXT
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT]
key to select an item you want to adjust.
"Printer vertical mag. adjustment": Side 1 and
side 2 are adjusted at the same time.
Setting range: -300 to +300, 1 step = 0.01%
"Tray 1 offset (ADU)": Tray 1 side 2 adjustment
Procedure

"Bypass tray offset (ADU)": Bypass tray side 2
adjustment
"Back tray 4 offset": LCT side 2 adjustment


10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric

keys and press the [SET] key.

Press the [1. Printer vertical mag. adj.] key.
11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the standard value

can be obtained.
5. "Printer vertical mag. adjustment screen"

Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
1-63
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT

to
the
"Magnification
adjustment
menu
screen."

9. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment
screen"
(2) Printer horizontal magnification adjustment
For the printer horizontal magnification adjust-
Adjust the horizontal magnification of the printer
ment, the following items are provided. Press
system.
the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS
This adjustment changes the horizontal magnifica-
ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want
tion in image processing prior to the laser exposure.
to adjust.

"Printer horizontal magnification adjustment":

Side 1 and side 2 are adjusted at the same
a.
Procedure
time.



"Bypass tray offset (ADU)": Bypass tray side 2
adjustment
Press the [2. Printer horizontal magnification

adjustment] key.

"Tray 4 offset (ADU)": LCT side 2 adjustment
5. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment

screen"


7. Measure the horizontal magnification with a
scale.

can be obtained.
to

Within 1 mm against 190 mm
190
8050fs1007
1-64
the
screen."
"Magnification
adjustment
menu
Adjust the vertical magnification of the scanner sys-

to
tem.
the
"Magnification
adjustment
menu
screen."
This adjustment changes the scan speed.


Adjust the vertical magnification of the printer sys-
a.
Procedure
tem.
This adjustment charges line speed of the transfer
belt.

Note:
For the printer vertical magnification adjust3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
ment, the following two methods are avail-
able. Be sure to take care when an adjustment

is made.
Press the [3. Scanner vertical mag. adj.] key.

been changed due to the wear of the regis-
5. "Scanner vertical mag. adjustment screen"
tration roller or the heat shrinkage of
paper.
START button with a test chart set to the origi-
nal glass.
been changed due to causes other than

the above.
7. Measure the vertical magnification with a

scale.
Within 1 mm against 200 mm
a.
Procedure

200
8050fs1008
Press the [4. Belt line speed adjustment] key.

8. When the value is not within to the standard,
9. "Scanner vertical mag. adjustment screen"
5. "Belt line speed adjustment screen"

Enter a numeric value through the numeric

can be obtained.
1-65
I ADJUSTMENT
(3) Scanner vertical magnification adjustment
36 MODE
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
7. Measure the vertical magnification with a

scale.
Within 1 mm against 205.7 mm
(5) Fixing line speed adjustment

When replacing the fixing roller /U, /L and transfer
belt, use this adjustment method to adjust the fixing
roller line speed.
These parts are made from rubber. Accordingly,
every parts has different diameter and thickness,
they must be adjusted for each one.
When the fixing line speed is faster than the transfer
belt, the vertical magnification gets large, thus
205.7 1
resulting in a transfer jitter. When it is slower than

the transfer belt, the trailing edge of the image gets
soiled or the toner scattering occurs.
8050fs1006
8. If the specification is not satisfied, press the C
Note:
When adjusting it, be sure to use the "paper
button while pressing the P button.
for fixing speed adjustment" (P/N 65AA-991*).

9. "Belt line speed adjustment screen"
Otherwise, the fixing line speed cannot be

accurately adjusted.
Be sure to conduct this adjustment after
checking to see if the key operator mode

memory switch [No. 52: Time lag to switch
tray] is set to "Short."
can be obtained.
When the switch is set to "Standard," change

it to "Short" before conducting this adjust-

to
the
"Magnification
adjustment
ment. After completion of the adjustment, be
menu
sure to bring it back to "Standard." When con-
screen."
ducting this adjustment with the switch set to

"Standard," 8 sheets of test pattern may not
be output.
a.
Procedure

Press the [5. Fixing line speed adjustment]
key.
5. "Set the cyan density screen"
Press the [DENSITY] key.
1-66

6. With the fixing adjustment paper set to the
14. The fixing roller line speed varies automatically
bypass tray, press the START button to output
at intervals of about 25 seconds to output 8
a test pattern.
sheets of test pattern based on a cyanic half
Based on a cyan half-tone, a test pattern is
tone.
output.
15. With a pen, write serial numbers from 1 to 8 on

the output sheets in order of the paper exit
Note:
When adjusting it, be sure to use the "paper
for fixing speed adjustment." Otherwise, it
cannot be accurately adjusted.
(bottom to top).
16. Comparing the output image on the first sheet
with the remaining 7 output sheets, find the
7. Compare the fixing adjustment density patches
next greatest number in which the distance
(upper and lower limit samples of density that
between the magenta line at the lead edge and
are packed with the "paper for fixing speed
the first black line at the trail edge (10 lines at
adjustment") with the cyan density of the out-
intervals of 1 mm) becomes greater than 1 mm
putted paper, and check to see if the cyan den-
longer.
sity of the output paper is within the limit of the

fixing density standard patches.
Note:
An accurate adjustment is available only
when the density is correctly set.
8. When it is not within the limit, press the C button while pressing the P button.
8050fs1009

Note:
The image does not stretch gradually for
Setting range: 0 to 255
each output sheet. It suddenly stretches at a
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the density ges inside

the limit.
certain sheet. Therefore, be sure to measure

each sheet in order of output.
17. Press the C button while pressing the P button.

Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key.

Enter the number of the output sheet that
12. "Push [Sample] and print 8 sheets screen"
stretches 1 mm through the numeric keys and
Press the [8 SAMPLES] key.
press the [SET] key.

13. With 8 sheets of the fixing adjustment paper
set to the bypass tray, press the START button

to
to output a test pattern.
the
"Magnification
adjustment
menu
screen."
Note:
Be sure to conduct this operation with the
copy count set to 1.
1-67
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
7.3.2 Timing adjustment
(1) Printer lead edge timing adjustment

Adjust the lead edge timing.
Adjust various timings.
This adjustment changes the paper restart timing

from the registration roller.
A. Procedure
mode by setting DIPSW12-1 to 1.
Note:
Be sure the printer vertical magnification has
been adjusted.
Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key.
a.
Procedure
4. "Timing adjustment menu screen"

For the timing adjustment, the following items
are provided:

[1. Printer lead edge timing adj.]

[2. Printer registration loop adj.]
[3. Printer pre-registration adj.]
[4. Printer erasure amount adj.]

4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen"
[5. Scanner re-start timing adj.]

[6. RADF registration loop adj.]
Press the [1. Printer lead edge timing adj.] key.
[7. Writing unit skew initial adj.]

[8. Auto. color registration adj.]
[9. Color registration manual adj.]
"Timing adjustment menu screen."
1-68

5. "Lead edge timing (Tray 1) screen"
36 MODE
For the printer lead edge timing adjustment,
I ADJUSTMENT
9. Measure the lead edge timing with a scale.

Standard value: 20 mm 0.5 mm
the following items are provided. Press the

20
[NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS

ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want
to adjust.
"Lead edge timing (Tray 1)"
"Lead edge timing (Bypass)"
8050fs1010

"Lead edge timing (ADU)"
"Tray large size normal paper offset"
"Tray large size thick paper offset"

"Tray small size normal paper offset"
11. "Printer lead edge timing screen"
"Tray small size thick paper offset"
"Bypass large size normal paper offset"
"Bypass large size thick paper offset"
Setting range: -60 to +60, 1 step = 0.1 mm
"Bypass small size normal paper offset"

12. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is
"Bypass small size thick paper offset"

"Large size normal paper offset (ADU)"
obtained.
"Large size thick paper offset (ADU)"
"Small size normal paper offset (ADU)"
to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
"Small size thick paper offset (ADU)"

Note:
(2) Printer registration loop adjustment
Large size: 300 mm or more in length in the

paper feed direction
Adjust the paper loop amount in the registration

roller section to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or
Small size: 300 mm or less in length in the

paper jamming in the registration section.

Thick Paper: 106 g/m2 or more

a.
Procedure
7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.

8. Set the copy setting according to the item
adjusted and press the START button to output
a test pattern (No. 16).

Press the [2. Printer registration loop adj.] key.
1-69
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
5. "Printer registration loop adjustment screen

(Tray 1)"
For the printer registration loop adjustment, the
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to
(3) Printer pre-registration adjustment

Adjust the paper loop amount in each tray and the
ADU pre-registration roller section to remove paper
adjust.
"Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 1 L)"
"Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 1 S)"
skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the pre-registration section.

"Printer registration loop adjustment (Bypass L)"
a.
Procedure
"Printer registration loop adjustment (Bypass S)"

"Printer registration loop adjustment (ADU L)"

"Printer registration loop adjustment (ADU S)"
"Printer registration loop adjustment (Thick)"
Note:
Press the [3. Printer pre-registration adj.] key.

5. "Printer pre-registration adj. screen (Tray 1)"

Thick Paper: 106
g/m2
For the printer pre-registration adjustment, the

or more
ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST-

MENT] key to select an item you want to

adjust.
"Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 1)"
8. Set the copy according to the item that has
been adjusted and press the START button to

output a test pattern (No. 16).
"Printer pre-registration adj. (ADU)"

9. If the printer registration loop amount is not

appropriate, press the C button while pressing
the P button.

10. "Printer registration loop adj. screen"


9. When the printer pre-registration amount is not

obtained.
1-70
the P button.
36 MODE

Adjust re-start timing of original scanning.

In this adjustment, the starting position for reading
while in the original scanning mode is adjusted.
Setting range: -99 (large) to +99 (small),
1 step = 0.1 mm
11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is obtained.

Note:
Make sure that the printer timing adjustment
has been completed.

a.
(4) Printer erasure amount adjustment

Conduct an erasure amount adjustment.
Procedure


a.
Procedure

Press the [5. Scanner re-start timing adj.] key.
5. "Scanner re-start timing adjustment screen"

Press the [4. Printer erasure amount adj.] key.
START button with a test chart set to the original glass.
5. "Printer erasure amount adjustment screen"
7. Check the scanner re-start timing.
Standard value: 3 mm or less

6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START
button with a test chart set to the original glass.

7. Check the printer erasure amount.
9. "Scanner re-start timing adjustment screen"

9. "Printer erasure amount adjustment screen"

obtained.


10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is obtained.
1-71
I ADJUSTMENT
(5) Scanner re-start timing adjustment
10. "Printer pre-registration adj. screen"
36 MODE

(7) Writing unit skew initial adjustment
(6) RADF registration loop adjustment
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the original loop amount in the RADF registration roller section to remove paper skew and
wrinkle, or paper jamming in the registration section.
a.
Procedure

Press the [6. RADF registration loop adj.] key.
5. "RADF registration loop adjustment screen"
6. Select the A3 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass.
7. If the RADF registration loop amount is not
the P button.
8. "RADF registration loop adjustment screen"
obtained.
1-72
Note:
This adjustment is inhibited in the field.
Make this adjustment when there is a color registra-
7. "Color registration adj. screen"

When pressing the [LIST] key, the main scan,
tion error. The main scan, sub-scan, horizontal
sub-scan, horizontal magnification and the
magnification and the skew of color registration
skew of Y, M and C compared based on K after
error are automatically adjusted.
adjustment are shown.


Note:
This auto. color registration adjustment has a
larger correction area than that of the color
(9) Color registration manual adjustment (partial horizontal adjustment)
registration auto correction in the user mode.

So, be sure to perform this adjustment when a
With respect to the main scan, entire horizontal
SC45-20 occurs.
magnification, partial horizontal magnification, subscan, inclination and the scan inclination, the regis-
a.
tration error amount of Y, M and C compared based
Procedure
on K is shown on the operation panel. The partial

horizontal magnification that cannot be corrected

automatically is manually adjusted.

Note:
Be sure that the printer vertical and horizontal
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen"
magnifications have been complete.
Make sure that the auto. color registration

4. "Timing adjustment menu screen"
adjustment has been completed.
Press the [8. Auto. color registration adj.] key.

a.
5. "Color registration adj. screen"

Press the [Start] key.
Procedure
6. The color registration adjustment starts and a

message "Complete" is shown in about 2 min-

utes.
When the error message appears, perform an
error correction referring to the below.

Error 1: It does not converge within the standard value.
The patch density may be too light.
Check around the drum unit and perform the gamma automatic adjustment
(0). Then perform this adjustment.
is too much.
Error 3: The other error
SC other than the color registration
adjustment
may

Press the [9. Color registration manual adj.]
key.
5. "Color registration manual adj. screen"
Error 2: The difference of the color registration
automatic
occur.
Restart the main body in the normal

mode to check for SC code.
1-73
I ADJUSTMENT
(8) Auto. color registration adjustment
36 MODE
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
9. The amount of error of the "MainScan" (main
START button to output a test pattern.
scan), "Mag(ALL)" (entire horizontal magnifica-
Place the test pattern [1] outputted securely
tion), "Mag(PART)" (partial horizontal magnifi-
against the original positioning plate /L [2] and
cation),
the original positioning plate /R [3] to set it to
(inclination) and the "ScanBend" (scan incline)
the original glass, and close the DF or platen
of Y, M and C are compared based on K and
cover.
result are shown at "Rest" section on the oper-
"SubScan"
(sub-scan),
"Incline"
ation panel (unit is pixel).

Note:
When setting the test pattern to the original
10. Make sure that "OK" is displayed for all the items.
glass, be sure to take check of the setting
When any item is not within the standard, an
direction (with printing face down) and posi-
error code is displayed for each cause together
tion.
with an NG. Make an error correction referring
Check that the settings for all colors (Y, M, C,
to the below:
K) in the [Test pattern density setting] of 36
When a "NG" occurs in the "MainScan",
mode is set to 255. If not, it results in an
"Mag(ALL)", "SubScan" or "Incline," perform
error.
the auto. color registration adjustment again.

Error 1: A chart pattern cannot be detected.
Improper positioning of the chart.
[3]
Error 2: The setting direction of a chart is
[2]
upside down.
A different type of chart.
Error 4: Adjustment is impossible.
Software bugged.
Error 5: Not within the standard value.
Re-adjust it.
Error 6: Nonvolatile data abnormality.
Check the installation of memory board.
[1]
Error 7: Memory other than those specified is

accessed.
Software bugged.
Error 8: Memory related error.
Software bugged.
Error 9: Program error.
Software bugged.
Error 10: The chart is skew.
8050fs1011
Error 11: Image header information read error.

Software bugged.
Error 12: An argument set error.

Software bugged.
8. "Color registration manual adj. screen"
Error 13: A measurement error.
Press the [SCAN] key to scan the test pattern.
Improper positioning of the chart, or a

defective chart.
1-74
36 MODE
11. When a "NG" occurs in the "MainScan",
"Mag(ALL)" or "Mag(PART)," open the toner
supply section and loosen 2 screws [1] provided near the developing unit of a color from
which an "NG" is displayed. Then, slide the
adjustment plate [2] up and down to adjust the
partial horizontal magnification. Moving the
adjustment plate [2] upward reduces the partial
horizontal magnification data (minus) and moving the plate downward increases it (plus).
Adjustment target
Move the adjustment plate [2] by referring to
the "Rest" of "Mag(PART)" (partial horizontal
magnification) (unit: pixel) displayed at the
operation panel. The scale of the adjustment
plate [2] changes about 0.5 pixel per notch.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1012

to the "Timing adjustment menu screen."
13. Conduct the color registration adjustment
referring to (8) Auto. color registration adjustment.
14. Repeat steps 4 to 13 until "OK" is displayed.
1-75
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
7.3.3 RADF adjustment
5. "RADF original size adjustment (A4) or (8.5 x
Conduct the original size adjustment, original stop

position adjustment and the sensor adjustment of
the RADF.
11) screen"
With the A4 (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11
(for inch machine) paper set to the RADF,
press the [Start] key.
A. Procedure
6. After confirmation of a message "Complete,"

press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key.
7. "RADF original size adjustment (A5R) or (5.5 x
8.5R) screen"
With the A5R (for metric machine) or 5.5 x

8.5R (for inch machine) paper set to the RADF,
Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key.
4. "RADF adjustment menu screen"

For the RADF adjustment, the following items
are provided:
press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key.

9. "RADF original size adjustment (A4R) or (8.5 x
[1. RADF original size adjustment]
11R) screen"
[2. RADF orig. stop position adj.]
With the A4R (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11R
[3. RADF sensor adjustment]
(for inch machine) paper set to the RADF,


"RADF adjustment menu screen."

press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
11. Make sure that the RADF original size is properly detected.
(1) RADF original size adjustment
12. Press the C button while pressing P button.
Conduct this adjustment when the RADF original

size is not properly detected.
to the "RADF adjustment menu screen."

a.
Procedure

Press the [1. RADF original size adjustment]
key.
1-76
Conduct the original stop position leading edge tim-

can be obtained.
ing (leading edge timing) adjustment of the RADF.

Note:
to the "RADF adjustment mode menu screen."
Make sure that the printer lead edge timing

adjustment and the scanner re-start timing
(3) RADF sensor adjustment
adjustment have been completed.
Conduct this adjustment when malfunction occurs

a.
in the reflective type sensors.
Procedure
a.
Procedure


Press the [2. RADF orig. stop position] key.

5. "Front plain paper/thick paper screen"
For the RADF orig. stop position adj., the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT
adjust.
[Normal & Thick paper (Front side)]
[Thin paper (Front side)]
[Normal & Thick paper (Back side)]
[Thin paper (Back side)]
7. With the original setting set to the copy mode
according to an item you want to adjust, set the
test chart to the RADF. And select the A3
paper and press the START button.
8. Check the RADF leading edge timing.
1-77

Press the [3. RADF sensor adjustment] key.
5. "RADF sensor adjustment screen"
Close the RADF and press the [Start] key.
The sensitivity of the RADF sensors are automatically adjusted.
to the "RADF adjustment mode menu screen."
I ADJUSTMENT
(2) RADF original stop position adjustment
36 MODE
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
7.3.4 Centring adjustment
4. "Centring adjustment mode menu screen"
Adjust the mis-centering of images vertical to the

paper feed direction.
Press the [1. Printer centring adjustment] key.

5. "Printer centring adj. (Tray 1) screen"
For the printer centering adjustment, the fol-
A. Procedure
lowing items are provided. Press the [NEXT


adjust.
"Printer centring adj. (Tray 1)"

Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key.
"Printer centring adj. (Bypass)"


For the centering adjustment, the following
items are provided:
"Printer centring adj. (ADU)"

"Large size offset (Tray 1)"
"Small size offset (Tray 1)"
[1. Printer centring adjustment]
"8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 1)"
[2. Scanner centring adjustment]
[3. RADF centring adjustment]


"Centring adjustment mode menu screen."
"Large size offset (Bypass)"

"Small size offset (Bypass)"
"8.5 x 5.5 offset (Bypass)"
(1) Printer centring adjustment
This adjustment changes the laser writing start tim-
ing.
"Large size normal paper offset (ADU)"
"Large size thick paper offset (ADU)"
"Small size normal paper offset (ADU)"

"Small size thick paper offset (ADU)"
Note:
"8.5 x 5.5 normal paper offset (ADU)"
Be sure that the printer horizontal magnifica-
"8.5 x 5.5 thick paper offset (ADU)"
tion has been completed.

Note:
a.
Procedure



Thick Paper: 106 g/m2 or more
1-78
5. "Scanner (platen) centring adjustment screen"
according to an item you want to adjust, and

press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16).

8. Fold the outputted paper in the paper feed

direction and check the amount of error of the
lines on both sides.
nal glass.
Standard value: Within 2 mm





can be obtained.


to the "Centring adjustment mode menu
screen."
obtained.
screen."
(2) Scanner centring adjustment

Adjust the centring when scanning the platen origi(3) RADF centring adjustment
nal.
Adjusts the centring when scanning the RADF origiThis adjustment can be shown in the key operator
nal.

Note:
Make sure that the printer centering adjust-
Note:
ment has been completed.
Make sure that the printer centering and scana.
ner centring adjustment has been completed.
Procedure
a.
Procedure
Press the [2. Scanner centring adjustment]

key.
4. "Centring adjustment menu screen"

Press the [3. RADF centring adjustment] key.
1-79
I ADJUSTMENT
7. Select the paper size and the type of paper
36 MODE
36 MODE

7.3.5 Non-image area erase check
I ADJUSTMENT
5. "RADF centring adjustment (Front) screen"

For the RADF centering adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT
adjust.
When installing this machine or when moving the

installation site, check to see if the erasure function
on the outside of the original of the copy-applied
functions operates correctly at this installation site.
Preparations made in advance:
"RADF centring adjustment (Front)"
Open fully the RADF or platen cover.
"RADF centring adjustment (Back)"
There should not be anything on the original
glass.
Clean the original glass.
START button with a test chart set to the origiA.
nal glass.
Procedure



Press the [5. Non-image area erase check]
key.
4. "Non-image area erase check screen"

obtained.
5. Make sure that a message "Normal adjustment

selected..." is shown on the operation panel.
When a message "Does not function satisfac-
torily..." is shown, refer to "B. Error message
and Handling," to conduct the non-image area
screen."
erase check again.

to the "Image adjustment menu screen."
1-80

B. Error message and Handling
If the error is detected while perform the "non-image
Reset the adjustment values of image adjustment to
area erase check" mode, following error message
the standard data. (factory default data)
will be displayed on the operation panel.

Note:
Data for the printer vertical magnification,
(1) Error message 1

Adjust for Moderate Brightness.
RADF registration loop, auto. color registra-
The Non-image area erase function may not oper-
tion, color registration manual, RADF original
ate correctly with dark (density) originals.
size, RADF original stop position and RADF
Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 MODE", columns
sensor adjustment cannot be reset to stan-
of Service Manual.
dard data.
A. Procedure
Handling 1
When the "non-image area erase" function is not
used very frequently, or when copy originals that
have a dark background are not copied very frequently in the "non-image area erase," the copier

can be used in the current installation location.

However, when copy originals that have a dark
background are frequently copied, install the copier
in a location or in a direction where less external
light get in (darker) than the present installation

4. "Recall standard data (image adjustment data)
location, and check the "non-image area erase
screen"
check mode" again.
Press the [YES] key when recalling the standard data. Pressing the [NO] key or [PREVI-
(2) Error message 2
OUS SCREEN] key returns to the "Image
Adjust for Extreme Brightness.
adjustment menu screen" without recalling the
In many case, the non-image area erase function
standard data.
will not operate correctly.

Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 MODE", columns
of Service Manual.
Handling 2
When the "non-image area erase" function is not
used very frequently, the copier can be used in the
current installation location. However, the outsideoriginal erasure function is frequently used, install
the copier in a location or in a direction where less
external light get in (darker) than the present installation location, and check the "non-image area
erase check mode" again. At this time, when there
is a bright light source such as a fluorescent light
installed directly above this machine, reconsider the
installation location or direction, or take some measures to shield the light source and check the "nonimage area erase check mode" again.
1-81
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
7.4
Image quality adjustment
7.4.1 Scanner gamma adjustment
Conduct various image quality adjustments.
Conduct the gradation correction of the scanner.

When color reproduction is a poor condition, usually
A. Procedure
conduct the printer gamma correction of the process adjustment.
When changing the CCD unit, exposure lamp (L1),

original glass or each scanner mirror, conduct this
adjustment.
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.

3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
Note:
For the image quality adjustment, the following
Scanner gamma has been adjusted for each
items are provided:
machine. Please be noted that the scanner
[1. Scanner gamma adjustment]
gamma data is rewritten to the mean value if
[2. Printer gamma adjustment]
the [Adj. data reset] key in the "Scanner
[3. Sharpness adjustment]
gamma adjustment screen" is pressed.
[4. Contrast adjustment]

[5. Image judge adjustment]
A. Procedure
[6. ACS adjustment]
1. After replacing a part, place a test chart on the
[7. Density adjustment]

[8. Tone adjustment]
original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and
press the START button.
Note:
For the start button, be sure to press the

hard button, not the soft key on the LCD.

2. Check for the foggy background or color bal-
"Image quality mode menu screen."
ance.
3. If there is abnormality, enter the 36 mode.
Press the [1. Scanner gamma adjustment] key.
6. "Scanner gamma adjustment screen"
Press the [Adj. data reset] key.
Press the [YES] key when rewriting the scanner gamma mean value. Press the [NO] to
return to the "Scanner gamma adjustment
screen" without rewriting.
to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
1-82
36 MODE
Conduct this adjustment when the color reproducWhen the color reproduction is in poor condition,
tion varies with copy modes to correct the gradation
conduct this adjustment to correct the gradation.
in a high light density section and adjust the density
This adjustment is not reflected on the output from
in the background.
the IP.
Note:
For the printer gamma offset adjustment,
A. Procedure
adjustment methods of 0 to 5 are available for
each screen type. It is possible to divide the

gradation in 256 into 6 parts of 0 to 5 and
adjust the entire ranges from "0: Low density
section" to "5: High density section."

In default, adjustment is limited only to "0 (low
Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key.
density section)." When setting DIPSW 28-4 to

1, adjustment can be made on the entire
4. For the printer gamma adjustment, the following items are provided:
ranges of 0 to 5.
Be sure not make the adjustment of "Printer
[1. Printer gamma offset adj.]
gamma offset adjustment (ED-8) (0 to 5)."
[2. Printer gamma sensor adj.]

[3. Printer screen gradation adj.]
a.
Procedure

from each of adjustment screen to the "Printer

gamma adjustment menu screen."

4. "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen"
Press the [1. Printer gamma offset adj.] key.
1-83
I ADJUSTMENT
(1) Printer gamma offset adjustment
7.4.2 Printer gamma adjustment
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
5. "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS200) (0) screen"
10. "Printer gamma offset adjustment screen"
For the printer gamma offset adjustment, the
Press the key of a color (C or K) you want to
adjust, enter a numeric value through the
numeric keys and press the [SET] key.
Setting range: -128 (lighter) to +127 (darker)
adjust.
"Printer gamma offset adj. (LS200) (0 to 5)"
Note:
"Printer gamma offset adj. (LS150) (0 to 5)"
There are three keys: [1/1], [1/2] and [1/3]
"Printer gamma offset adj. (DS200) (0 to 5)"
provided for each line speed. Be sure to use
"Printer gamma offset adj. (DS150) (0 to 5)"
the key [1/1] for adjustment. A value entered
"Printer gamma offset adj. (ED-8) (0 to 5)"
by the key [1/1] is automatically inputted into
"Printer gamma offset adj. (ED-2) (0 to 5)"
keys [1/2] and [1/3].
The following shows the copy mode to which

each adjustment is reflected.

obtained.
(LS200): Line screen/High resolution

(LS150): Line screen/Smooth tone
12. Take notice of the gray gradation pattern [1]
(DS200): Dot screen/High resolution
created in C, M and Y, make sure that the gray
(DS150): Dot screen/Smooth tone
balance at the square marks line [2] and [3] is
(ED-8): Text section to be used together with
the same.
the screens above.

(ED-2): High compression
Y
M
C
K
7. Set A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the bypass tray and

press the START button to print a test pattern.
8. Check the test pattern that has been outputted.
Make sure that the high light density starting
section of C and K is uniform, and even
between the gray reference lines [1].
[6]
[1]
Y
M
C
K
8050fs1015
9. When they are not even, press the C button

while pressing the P button.
1-84
[5]
[4] [2]
[3]
[1]
8050fs1016
the key of a color (Y or M) you want to adjust,

enter a numeric value through the numeric
(2) Printer gamma sensor adjustment

When a poor color reproduction results even after
the automatic gamma adjustment of the process
adjustment, conduct this adjustment to correct gradation.
The printer gamma correction that is carried out

automatically and periodically uses a gamma sen-
Note:
There are three keys: [1/1], [1/2] and [1/3]
provided for each line speed. Be sure to use
the key [1/1] for adjustment. A value entered
by the key [1/1] is automatically inputted into
keys [1/2] and [1/3].
sor to read patterns on the transfer belt. So, there is

a possibility of the gamma sensor not being accurately adjusted due to the change in characteristic
of the gamma sensor. This adjustment use the
scanner to correct the gamma sensor for accurate
printer gamma adjustment.
How to match the gray balance

Take notice of the gray patches [4] made up of
49 colors of C, M and Y. In the 49 patches, M
gets darker as going right to left. And Y gets
darker as going down from up. However, C is

a.
Procedure
fixed. The patch [5] at the center is the same

color as the gray [2]. The patches [6] positioned
at the four corners of the patch [5] is the same
color as the gray [3]. Out of the 49 patches,
select a gray of the same gray balance as the
gray [6].
e.g.) When a patch on the lower right side is
more suitable than the patch [5] at the center:

Press the [2. Printer gamma sensor adj.] key.
Adjust M and Y in the positive direction.

When a patch on the upper left side is more
suitable than the patch [5] at the center: Adjust
M and Y in the negative direction.
15. Set A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the bypass tray and
press the START button to print a test pattern.
16. Repeat steps 13 to 15 until you can get a satisfactory result.
to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu
screen."
1-85
I ADJUSTMENT
13. When the gray balance is not the same, press
36 MODE
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
5. "Printer gamma sensor adj. (LS200) screen"
8. "Please load output paper... screen"
For the printer gamma sensor adjustment, the
After completion of the test pattern output, the
display returns automatically to the adjustment
screen.
The outputted test pattern [1] pressed securely
adjust.
against the original positioning plate /L [3] and
"Printer gamma sensor adjustment (LS200)"
the original positioning plate /R [4], set it to the
"Printer gamma sensor adjustment (LS150)"
original glass.
"Printer gamma sensor adjustment (DS200)"
Note:
"Printer gamma sensor adjustment (DS150)"
Make sure to set it with the green triangular
"Printer gamma sensor adjustment (CONTONE)"
mark [2] on the left side.
"Printer gamma sensor adjustment (ED)"
(with printing face down)
The following shows the copy mode to which

each adjustment is reflected:
[3]
(LS200): Line screen/High resolution
[4]
(LS150): Line screen/Smooth tone

(DS200): Dot screen/High resolution
(DS150): Dot screen/Smooth tone
(CONTONE):
Text
section
together
to
with
the
be
used
screens
above.
[2]
(ED): High compression

Note:
A screen in which the screen selection is
turned off by the key operator mode-memory
switch is not displayed.
[1]
When any one of the screen adjustments is

made, be sure to conduct the CONTONE
8050fs1017
adjustment at the same time.

9. With 10 sheets of copy paper (white) placed on
7. With the A4 (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11

(for inch machine) paper set in the bypass tray,
press the START button to output a test pattern.
the test chart, close the RADF or platen cover.

Note:
Be sure to use white copy paper. Otherwise,
the printer gradation cannot be corrected
properly.
10. Press the [Start] key.
Note:
Start cannot be made when paper is not set
in the bypass tray.
11. When the chart is scanned with no problem
found, the gamma sensor is adjusted, the
printer gamma correction is made and a message "Complete" is displayed.
1-86

13. "Printer gamma sensor adj. screen"
displayed for each cause. Repair the error
Press the [Adj. data reset] key if you want to
referring to the below.
return to the factory default data.
Error 1: Improper positioning of the chart.
Press the [YES] key to reset the adjusted
Error 2: The setting direction of a chart is
printer gamma sensor data and return to the
upside down.
factory default data.
Press the [NO] key to return to the "Printer

gamma sensor adj. screen" without data reset.

A different type of chart.
Error 4: Adjustment is impossible.
Software bugged.
screen."
Error 5: Not within the standard value.

Re-adjust it.
Error 6: Nonvolatile data abnormality.
(3) Printer screen gradation adjustment
Check the installation of memory

board.
Adjust a tone jump (in which gradation is not continuous).
Error 7: Memory other than those specified is

accessed.
a.
Procedure
Software bugged.
Error 8: Memory related error.

Software bugged.
Error 9: Program errorSoftware bugged.
Error 10: The chart is skew.

3. "Image quality adjustment menu screen"
Error 11: Image header information read error.
Software bugged.
Error 12: RGB data abnormality.

Chart is wrong, or software is bugged.
Error 13: Argument set error.
Press the [3. Printer screen gradation adj.] key.

5. "Printer screen gradation adj. (Y) screen"
Software bugged.
Error 31: Sensor value abnormality - Re-adjust
For the printer screen gradation adjustment,

the following items are provided.
it.
Error 51: Regression calculation abnormality -
"Printer screen gradation adj. (Y)"

"Printer screen gradation adj. (M)"
Re-adjust it.
Error 52: Array number overflow - Software
"Printer screen gradation adj. (C)"

"Printer screen gradation adj. (K)"
bugged.
Error 53: Regression order abnormality - Software bugged.
Error 54: Selected screen information abnormality - Software bugged.

7. Set the A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the bypass tray
and press the START button to output a test
Error 55: Color information abnormality - Software bugged.
pattern.
8. Five sheets of test pattern are automatically
outputted. Check them to see if there is a tone
jump found in them.
1-87
I ADJUSTMENT
12. If any trouble should be found, an error code is
36 MODE
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
9. When a tone jump is found in them, press the

C button while pressing the P button.
7.4.3 Sharpness adjustment

Conduct the sharpness adjustment or, this is carried
out when moire reproduced.
10. "Printer screen gradation adj."

Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PRE-
Use this adjustment for changing the center value
VIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a color in
for the sharpness adjustment in the user mode.
which a tone jump has occurred.

A. Procedure
11. Enter one less numeric value than the current
and press the [SET] key.
Setting range: -3 to +1

12. Repeat steps 6 to 11 until the tone jump disappears.


screen."
Press the [3. Sharpness adjustment] key.

4. "Sharpness adjustment menu screen"
keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key.
Setting range: -5 (soft/less moire) to +5 (sharp/
more moire)
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until it becomes suitable.
1-88

7.4.4 Contrast adjustment
7.4.5 Image judge adjustment
Adjust the contrast.
Adjust the threshold value of the original image
judgement.
for the contrast adjustment in the user mode.

A. Procedure
A. Procedure
Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key.
Press the [4. Contrast adjustment] key.
4. "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen"
4. "Contrast adjustment menu screen"
For the image judge adjustment, the following
items are provided:

[1. Dot detect adjustment]
[2. Color text adjustment]
[3. Dot/Text area adjustment]
nal glass.

"Image judge adjustment mode menu screen."
Setting range: -5 (contrast increased) to +5

(contrast reduced)
(1) Dot detect adjustment
original image.
Adjust the dot discrimination threshold value of the

a.
Procedure

4. "Image judge adjustment menu screen"
Press the [1. Dot detect adjustment] key.
5. "Dot detect adjustment R screen"
1-89
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT

(2) Color text adjustment

Adjust the color text discrimination threshold value
of the original image.
for the color text adjustment in the user mode.
7. A dot detection pattern is outputted.

This output pattern shows how the original
a.
image is discriminated as an image.

Cyan section: Discriminated as a dot.
Procedure
White section: Discriminated as a picture.

Black section: Discriminated as a black text.
Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text.


9. "Dot detect adjustment R screen"

For the dot detection adjustment, the following
items are provided:
4. "Image judge adjustment menu screen"

Press the [2. Color text adjustment] key.
[Dot detect adjustment R]

5. "Color text screen"
[Dot detect adjustment G]
[Dot detect adjustment B]

10. Select a color you want to adjust as necessary,
keys, and press the [SET] key.
nal glass.
Setting range: -5 (dot area reduced) to +5 (dot

area increased)
7. A color text detection pattern is outputted.


to the "Image judge adjustment mode menu

screen."
9. "Color text screen"

Setting range: -5 (color text area reduced) to +5
(color text area increased)
to the "Image judge adjustment menu screen."
1-90
36 MODE
Adjust the dot discrimination and text discrimination

threshold values of the original image.
Conduct this adjustment when the ACS (Auto color
selection) does not function properly.
for the letter adjustment in the user mode.

A. Procedure
a.
Procedure
3. "Image quality adjustment menu screen"
Press the [6. ACS adjustment] key.
4. "Set the chart and push [SCAN] screen"
4. "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen"

Press the [3. Dot/Text adjustment] key.
With an original in which the ACS does not

function properly set to the original glass,
press the [SCAN] key.
5. "Dot/Text adjustment screen"
5. In the "JUDGE," the result of the ACS is shown

6. Select the A3 paper and press the START but-
as "COLOR" or "MONOCHROME."
ton with a test chart set to the original glass.
7. A dot and text detection pattern is outputted.
Setting range: -5 (MONOCHROME) to +5
(COLOR)

Cyan section: Discriminated as a dot.

White section: Discriminated as a picture.

9. "Dot/Text area adjustment screen"
Setting range: -5 (dot area reduced and text
area increased) to +5 (dot area increased and
text area reduced)
to the "Image judge adjustment menu screen."
1-91
I ADJUSTMENT
7.4.6 ACS adjustment
(3) Dot/Text area adjustment
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
7.4.7 Density adjustment
6. A numeric value is shown in the "RESULT."
Adjust the AE (AES) density, copy density and the
7. When the adjustment result is other than 0,
background density.

keys and press the [SET] key (e.g.: if the
A. Procedure
adjustment result is 2, input -2).

Setting range: -5 to +5
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the adjustment result
becomes 0.
to the "Density adjustment mode menu
Press the [7. Density adjustment] key.
screen."
4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen"

For the density adjustment, the following items
are provided:
(2) Copy density adjustment
[1. AE (AES) adjustment]
Adjust the copy density.
[2. Copy density adjustment]
[3. Background adjustment]
for the density shift function in the user mode.

a.
"Density adjustment mode menu screen."
Procedure

(1) AE (AES) adjustment
Conduct this adjustment when you want to change
the center value selected by the AE (Auto density

selection) in the user mode.
Press the [2. Copy density adjustment] key.

a.
Procedure

Press the [1. AE (AES) adjustment] key.
5. With a chart in which you want to change the
AE density set to the original glass, press the
[SCAN] key.
1-92
For the copy density adjustment, the following
Procedure
items are provided. Press the arrow key to

select an item you want to adjust.
"Text/Photo (Full color)"

"Photo (Full color)"
"Text (Full color)"
"Map (Full color)"

"Text/Photo (Mono color)"
"Photo (Mono color)"
Press the [3. Background adjustment] key.
"Text (Mono color)"

5. "Background adjustment screen"
"Map (Mono color)"

"Text/Photo (Monochrome)"
For the background adjustment, the following
"Photo (Monochrome)"
items are provided. Press the arrow key to
"Text (Monochrome)"
select an item you want to adjust.

"Text/Photo (Full color)"
"Map (Monochrome)"
"Photo (Full color)"

"Text (Full color)"
7. Select a mode you want to adjust and then

select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. With the test
chart set to the original glass, press the START
button.
"Map (Full color)"

"Text/Photo (Mono color)"
"Photo (Mono color)"
"Text (Mono color)"
"Map (Mono color)"
"Text/Photo (Monochrome)"
"Photo (Monochrome)"
"Text (Monochrome)"
"Map (Monochrome)"


7. Select a mode you want to adjust and then

select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. With the test
chart set to the original glass, press the START
screen."
button.
(3) Background adjustment

Adjust the copy background density.

The background adjustment in the user mode only
supports the batch adjustment. It is not possible to
adjust the background for each color mode or original mode.

screen."
1-93
I ADJUSTMENT
a.
5. "Copy density adjustment screen"
36 MODE
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
7.4.8 Tone adjustment

Conduct the tone adjustment of red, green or blue.
nal glass.

for the tone adjustment in the user mode.
A. Procedure


to
Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key.
the
"Image
quality
adjustment
menu
screen."
4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen"

For the tone adjustment, the following items
(2) Green adjustment
are provided:
Adjust the density of green.
[1. Red adjustment]

[2. Green adjustment]
a.
Procedure
[3. Blue adjustment]




"Image quality mode menu screen."

(1) Red adjustment
Press the [2. Green adjustment] key.
Adjust the density of red.

This adjustment is not reflected to the IP.
a.
Procedure
START button with a test chart set to the origi1. Enter the 36 mode.
nal glass.

Press the [1. Red adjustment] key.

1-94
36 MODE
Adjust the density of blue.

Reset the adjustment values of image quality
a.
Procedure
adjustment to the standard data. (factory default

data)
Note:
Data for the scanner gamma adjustment and
the printer gamma sensor adjustment cannot

be reset to standard data.

A. Procedure
Press the [3. Blue adjustment] key.




4. "Recall standard data: Image quality adj.

screen"
Press the [YES] key when recalling the standard date. Pressing the [NO] key or [PREVI-
OUS SCREEN] key returns to the [Image
quality mode menu screen] without recalling

the standard data.

1-95
I ADJUSTMENT
(3) Blue adjustment
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
7.5
Running test mode
7.5.1 Setting method
Conduct a test while in the continuous copy operation.

Select [4. Running test mode] in the 36 mode menu
screen to show the running mode menu screen.
A. Procedure
Press the [4. Running test mode] key.
For this adjustment, the following items can be

3. "Running test mode menu screen"
selected:
A. Intermittent copy mode
Press the mode key of one of the modes 1 to
After completion of the copy operation for the set
5.
copy count, the copier changes into the copy ready

state and waits for 0.5 sec. before resuming the
same operation.
5. After confirmation of the copy operation, press
B. Paperless running mode
the STOP button and turn OFF the sub power
Without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation

is made nearly at the same timing as the normal
copy operation. In the same manner as the intermittent copy mode, after completion of the copy operation for the set copy count, the copier changes into
the copy ready state and waits for 0.5 sec. before
resuming the same operation.
C. Paperless mode
Without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation
is made nearly at the same timing as the normal
copy operation.
D. Paperless endless mode
The copier operates with the copy count infinitely
set automatically. In the same manner as the paperless mode, without detecting paper or jam, the copy
operation is made nearly at the same timing as the
normal copy operation.
E. Running mode
The copy operation is made in the paperless endless mode plus the scanner each-time scan and the
auto paper feed tray switching.
4. "Basic screen"
1-96
switch (SW2).
Test pattern output mode

I ADJUSTMENT
7.6
36 MODE
Output various test patterns to separate abnormalities. Select [5. Test pattern output mode] in the 36
mode screen to show "Test pattern output mode
screen."
Note:
As for modes specifically not given in the Service Manual, be sure not to output test patterns.
A. Procedure
Press the [5. Test pattern output mode] key.
3. "Test pattern output mode screen"
After entering an output pattern number
through the numeric keys, press the [SET] key.
5. "Basic screen"
Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the
START button to output a test pattern.
6. When outputting another test pattern, repeat
steps 3 to 5 while pressing the C button with
the P button being pressed at the same time.
7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] to return to
the "36 mode menu screen."
1-97
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
No.1 Overall halftone

[Check Items]
When the density is set to 70 (halftone)
When there are image stripes or uneven density found, check the printer system for any abnormality.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit and transfer belt unit.
When the density is set to 0 (white)
When there is image foggy back ground, check the printer system for any abnormality.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, and high voltage contact.
When the density is set at 255 (Y, M, C, K)
When the density is light, check the printer system for any abnormality.
[Recommended check point]: Write unit
* For information about setting the density, see "7.7 Test pattern density setting."
Test Pattern
When the density is set to 70
8050fs1019
1-98
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
No.11 Beam check

[Check Items 1]
For development and analysis of the write unit
[Check Items 2]
Check the solid black pattern [1] to see if there is uneven density found in the main scanning and subscanning directions.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, developing unit, transfer belt unit, and 2nd transfer unit
[Check Items 3]
Check to see if there is any image repelling in the gradation pattern [2] at the leading/trailing edge of the
test pattern in the feed direction.
[Recommended checkpoint]: Transfer/separation corona unit
Test Pattern
[1]
[2]
8050fs1020
[1] Solid black pattern
[2] Gradation pattern
1-99
No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern

[Check Items]
Judge from this test pattern which of the scanner system and the printer system is abnormal.
Items that can be checked include horizontal magnification, vertical magnification, skew, and leading
edge timing, etc. of the printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible
on the test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
Test Pattern
[1]
30mm
20mm
237mm
28
0m
190mm
[1]
205.7mm
0m
28
m
190mm
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
190mm
[1] Edge of paper
1-100
8050fs1021
No.80 Line screen resolution priority evaluation pattern

While in use of the copier, check the gradationality of the primary color to the tertiary color when the line
screen high resolution is selected on the screen.
[Check item 1]
Check to see if the gradation of each color is smooth and even with no tone jump found.
[Recommended checkpoint]: Conduct the adjustment of the printer gamma sensor.
[Check item 2]
For development and analysis.
Test Pattern
a
b
c
[1]
[2]
8050fs1120
a: Primary color
b: Secondary color
1-101
c: Tertiary color
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
No.81 Line screen gradation priority evaluation pattern

While in use of the copier, check the gradationality of the primary color to the tertiary color when the line
screen smooth tone is selected on the screen.
[Check item 1]
[Check item 2]
Test Pattern
a
b
c
[1]
[2]
8050fs1120
a: Primary color
b: Secondary color
1-102
c: Tertiary color
No.82 Dot screen resolution priority evaluation pattern

While in use of the copier, check the gradationality of the primary color to the tertiary color when the dot
screen high resolution is selected on the screen.
[Check item 1]
[Check item 2]
Test Pattern
a
b
c
[1]
[2]
8050fs1120
a: Primary color
b: Secondary color
1-103
c: Tertiary color
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
No.83 Dot screen gradation priority evaluation pattern

While in use of the copier, check the gradationality of the primary color to the tertiary color when the dot
screen smooth tone is selected on the screen.
[Check item 1]
[Check item 2]
Test Pattern
a
b
c
[1]
[2]
8050fs1120
a: Primary color
b: Secondary color
1-104
c: Tertiary color
36 MODE
No.84 Character area evaluation pattern

While in use of the copier, check the gradationality of CONTONE used in the character area when the
line screen (smooth tone/high resolution) or the dot screen (smooth tone/high resolution) is selected on
the screen.
[Check item 1]
Check to see if the density increases in incremental step from the lower density side and if the density
in the high density section of each color is dark enough.
[Check item 2]
Test Pattern
[1]
[2]
8050fs1121
1-105
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
7.7
Test pattern density setting
7.8
Finisher adjustment
Set the density of the test pattern.
Adjusting the FNS, PI, PK, TU.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure
2. "36 menu screen"
Press the [6. Test pattern density setting] key.
Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.

3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen"
3. "Test pattern density setting-Y screen"

Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PRE-
[1. Stitch & Fold stopper adj.]
VIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select one of
[2. Fold stopper adjustment]
the colors: "Y, M, C and K" that you want to
[3. Cover sheet tray size adj.]
adjust.
[4. Trimming stopper adjustment]

[5. Punch adjustment]

[6. Three-Fold position adj.]
[7. 2 positions staple pitch adj.]
Setting range: 0 (lighter) to 255 (darker)

6. "Basic screen"
from each of the adjustment screen to the "Fin-
Select the paper size and press the START

button to output a test pattern.
7. When outputting another test pattern, repeat
steps 3 to 5 while pressing the C button with
the P button being pressed at the same time.
8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] to return to
the "36 mode menu screen."
1-106
isher adjustment mode menu screen."

7.8.1 Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FS-
7.8.2 Fold stopper adjustment (FS-215/FN-9/FS-
215/FN-9/FS-606 only)
606 only)
Adjusting the stapling position when stitch and fold
Adjusting the fold position when stitch and fold or
mode.
folding mode.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure
Press the [1. Stitch and Fold stopper adj.] key.

4. "Stitch and Fold stopper adj. (A3) screen"
Press the [2. Fold stopper adjustment] key.

4. "Fold stopper adjustment (A3) screen"
5. Set paper in the tray, set originals (more than 2

sheets) on RADF, and press the START button.
For the machine with platen cover, scan origi-
5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF,

and press the START button.
6. Check the paper center and folding position.
Standard value: 1 mm
nals (more than 2 sheets) with [Store] key.

6. Check the paper center and stapling position.
Standard value: 1 mm

8. "Fold stopper adjustment screen"
Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired
8. "Stitch and Fold stopper adj. screen"
paper size.

paper size.


obtained.

obtained.

to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu
screen."

screen."
1-107
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
7.8.3 Cover sheet tray size adjustment (PI-110
7.8.4 Trimming stopper adjustment (TU-109/
only)
TMG-3 only)
This adjustment should be performed when the
Adjusting the trimming amount.
cover sheet tray size cannot be detected properly

and when centring adjustment for cover sheet tray
is performed.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure

Press the [4. Trimming stopper adjustment]
key.
4. "Trimming stopper adjustment (A3) screen"
Press the [3. Cover sheet tray size adj.] key.

4. Set a A4R (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11R
(for inch machine) paper on the cover sheet
tray (upper/lower) [1] and press the [Start] key.

sheets) on RADF, and press the START button.
A complete message appears on the screen.
For the machine with platen cover, scan originals (more than 2 sheets) with [Store] key.
[1]
6. Check the trimming amount.
Standard value: 2.5 to 4.5 mm
Note:
Setting a trimming amount of 2.5 mm or
less may cause a trimming error.
8050fs1022
8. "Trimming stopper adjustment screen"

Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVI-
to the "Finisher adjustment menu screen."
OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired

paper size.
obtained.
to the "Finisher adjustment menu mode
screen."
1-108

7.8.5 Punch adjustment (PK-120/PK-5/PK-507
36 MODE
(1) Punch kit vertical position adjustment (PK-
I ADJUSTMENT
120/PK-5/PK-507 only)
only)
Adjusting the punch vertical position.

This adjusts the punch vertical positions, punch horizontal positions, and punch registration loop
amount.
a.
Procedure
A. Procedure

Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key.
4. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen"

Punch adjustment includes the following items:
[1. Punch kit vertical pos. adj.]
Press the [1. Punch kit vertical pos. adj.] key.

5. "Punch kit ver. pos. adj. (A3) screen"
[2. Punch kit horizontal pos. adj.]
[5. Punch registration loop adj.]


each adjustment screen to the "Finisher
7. Check the punch vertical position.

8. When the value is not appropriate, press the C
adjustment mode menu screen."
button while pressing down the P button.

9. "Punch kit ver. pos. adj. screen"
paper size.
11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the value is appropriate.
to the "Punch adjustment mode menu screen."
1-109
36 MODE
(2) Punch kit horizontal position adjustment
I ADJUSTMENT
(PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 only)
(3) Punch registration loop adjustment

Adjusting the registration loop amount for the
reversed paper exit, the ADU paper exit (straight
Adjusting the punch horizontal position.
exit) and cover sheet upper/lower.

a.
Procedure
a.
Procedure

Press the [2. Punch kit Horizontal pos. adj.]
key.

Press the [5. Punch registration loop adj.] key.
5. "Punch kit horizontal position adj. screen"
5. Press [1. Punch registration loop adj. (main
body)] key. or [2. Punch registration loop adj.
(PI)] key.
6. "Punch registration loop adj. menu screen"
7. Check the position of punch holes.
OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select the item to
Specification (Length between the edge of

paper and the center of punch hole): 10.5 mm
(2 holes /4 holes/swedish 4 holes), 9.5 mm (3
holes/inch 2 holes)
9. "Punch kit horizontal position adj. screen"
be adjusted.
The screen changes as follows; reverse
ADU or upper tray lower tray.
8. Press the START button to make a copy.
9. Check the punch registration loop amount.
10. When the value is not appropriate, press the C

paper size.
11. "Punch registration loop adj. screen"


11. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the value is obtained.
to the "Punch adjustment mode menu screen."
12. Repeat steps 6 to 11 until the value is appropriate.

to the "Punch registration loop adj. menu
screen."
1-110
606 only)
8. "Three-Fold adjustment screen"

Adjusting the folding positions during the threefolded copy.
OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired

paper size.
a.
Procedure

obtained.
Note:
See "9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS" to adjust
the folded positions "b" and "c."
Press the [6. Three-fold position adj.] key.
4. "Three-Fold adjustment screen"
screen."
6. Check the three-folded position "a."
c
a
Folded
8050fs1023
Standard value
Specification
positions
A4R
8.5 x 11R
95 mm
89.4 mm
2 mm
101 mm
95 mm
2 mm
101 mm
95 mm
2 mm

1-111
I ADJUSTMENT
7.8.6 Three-folding adjustment (FS-215/FN-9/FS-
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
7.8.7 2 positions staple pitch adjustment
7.9
List output mode
Adjusting the pitch of the 2 positions staple.
Output a variety of data.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure

Press the [8. List output mode] key.
3. "List output mode menu screen"

Press the [7. 2 positions staple pitch adj.] key.
List output mode items are as follows:

[1. Machine management list 1]
4. "2 positions staple pitch adjustment screen"
[2. Adjustment data list]
[3. Page fill data list]

sheets) on RADF, and press the START but-
[4. Machine management list 2]

[5. Parameter list]
[6. Memory dump list]
ton.
For the machine with platen cover, scan origi-
[7. Font pattern]

Note:
nals (more than 2 sheets) with [Store] key.
Setting DPSW 30-1 to 1, [4. Machine manage6. Check the pitch of the 2 positions staple.
ment list 2] and later appear.

4. Press the key of an item you want to output.
5. Select A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper and press the
START button.

8050fs1024
to the "36 mode menu screen."

7. When changing the dimension A, press the C
8. "2 positions staple pitch adjustment screen"
Enter a value with numeric keys and press the
[SET] key.
Setting range: 120 to 160, 1 step: 1 mm
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the dimension A is
appropriate.
screen."
1-112
8. 47 MODE
5. Input check result will appear in the input
47 mode/multi mode setting

method
check result display area.

6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to perform the other signal
input check.
A. 47 Mode
This mode provides self-diagnostic functions (input/
output check function) to check and adjust the various signals and loads.
See "8.5 Input check list".
(3) Output check method

Follow the following procedure.
B. Operation method for 47 mode
a.
(1) Starting 47 mode

a.
Turn off the sub power switch (SW2).
b.
Turn on the SW2 while holding down 4 and 7
Procedure

of the numeric keys.

c.
*1
The 47 mode is activated if the moment "I/O
Enter the output check code with the numeric keys.
check mode" is displayed in the message
*2
display area at the center of the screen.
3. Press the P button when using the multi mode.
"47 mode menu screen"
4. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys.* 2

5. Press the [Start] key to perform the output
check.
6. Press the [STOP] key to exit from the output
check.
[2]
[1] [3]
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 to check other signal out-
[4]
[1]
Input/Output check code
[2]
Multi code
[3]
Input check
[4]
Output check
put check.
8050fs1001
*2
See "8.6 Output check list".
(4) Exiting from the 47 mode

Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.
(2) Input check method

Follow the following procedure.
a.
Procedure

Enter the input check code with the numeric keys.
*1
3. Press the P button when using the multi mode.
4. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys. *1
1-113
I ADJUSTMENT
8.1
47 MODE
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
8.2
Adjustment data display
8.3
Hard disk check
Lists the adjustment values of the machine (factory-
Perform this operation if you want to check the HDD
set values and current values).
total capacity, the HDD remaining capacity, and the
No adjustment value can be changed in this mode.
error code related to HDD.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure
Press "94" with the numeric keys. Check that
Press "99" with the numeric keys. Check that
"94-00" appears in the message display area.
"99-00" appears in the message display area.
3. Press the P button.
4. Press the [STOP] key at the lower right corner
4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric
of the screen.
keys. Check that "99-xx" (xx represents the
5. Turn off the sub power switch (SW2) to exit

from the 47 mode.
input number) appears in the message display

area.
01: HDD total capacity check
02: HDD remaining capacity check
Note:
03: HDD bad sectors check and recovery
Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.

At checking the total capacity: the total capacity is displayed
At checking the remaining capacity: the
remaining capacity is displayed
At checking and recovering the bad sectors:
During the operation-"NOW" appears
The operation succeeded-"OK" appears
The operation failed-"NG" appears
Press the [Start] key to perform the HDD bad
sectors check and recovery again when "NG"
appears.
6. Press the [STOP] key to exit from the output
check.
7. Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.
Note:
The operation can not be canceled during the
HDD bad sectors check and recovery (the
[STOP] button or the [Change Mode] key are
disabled).
1-114
47 MODE
physical shocks. Be sure to remove the hard

disk when you move the main body.
1-115
I ADJUSTMENT
The hard disk is vulnerable to vibrations and
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
8.4
Input check list
Classification Symbol
Code
Multi code
Name
Display and signal

source
001
High voltage, TEMP/HUM

analog signal
00
Temp/humidity sensor (machine-inside
Temp/humidity sensor (machine-inside
000
0 to 255
humidity)
TEMP/HUM
temperature)
TDB
TLD Y
01
TLD M
Temp detection board
Remaining toner detection sensor /Y
Remaining toner detection sensor /M
0 to 255
Toner
No toner
Box
No box
FULL
EMPTY
Abnormal
Normal
Abnormal
Normal
TLD C
Remaining toner detection sensor /C
TLD K
Remaining toner detection sensor /K
PS53
Waste toner door sensor
PS52
Waste toner full sensor
High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y)
High voltage unit /1 (charging /M)
High voltage unit /1 (charging /C)
High voltage unit /1 (charging /K)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer M)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer C)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K)
Normal
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K) One or more

High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K) color is
abnormal
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K)
Abnormal
Normal
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer M)
10
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer C)
11

Abnormal
Normal
HV1
HV2
02
03
HV2
PS11
04
05
12
High voltage unit /2 (separation)
Gamma sensor
Gamma sensor
11
Gamma sensor
Drum potential sensor /Y
DRPS M
Drum potential sensor /M
DRPS C
Drum potential sensor /C
DRPS K
Drum potential sensor /K
DRPS Y
06
1-116
0 to 255
High voltage,
analog signal
HV2
Code
Multi code
Name
Display and signal

source
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
001
000
High voltage unit /2 (guide plate)
Abnormal
Normal
High voltage unit/2 (2nd transfer)
Abnormal
Normal
High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /Y)
Abnormal
Normal
High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /M)
High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /C)
High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /K)
No paper sensor /1
Paper
No paper
No paper sensor /2
Paper
No paper
5
6
7
HV2
08
0
1
2
3
4
HV1
Paper feed,
conveyance
PS31
09
11
PS37
PS43
No paper sensor /3
PS47
No paper sensor /BP
PS108
No paper sensor (LT-211, C-208)
Remaining paper sensor /1
PS38
PS44
PS102 to
Remaining paper sensor /1 to /4
PS32
12
105
PS33
(LT-211, C-208)
0
Paper size /S1
PS34
Paper size /L1
PS39
Paper size /S2
PS40
Paper size /L2
PS45
Paper size /S3
PS46
Paper size /L3
PS48
Paper size /SBP
PS49
Paper size /LBP
VR1
13
Paper sizeVR /1
VR2
Paper sizeVR /2
VR3
Paper sizeVR /3
VR4
Paper sizeVR /BP
PS30
14
Tray upper limit sensor /1
PS36
PS42
PS25
Tray upper limit sensor /BP
PS109
Upper limit sensor (LT-211, C-208)
Tray set detection /1
0 to 7
16
17
1-117
Paper
No paper
0 to 255
Upper limit
Not at
upper limit
Upper:1, lower:2,
middle:0
Yes
No
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
Paper feed,
conveyance
Code
Multi code
19
Pre-registration sensor /1
PS35
PS41
PS26
Bypass conveyance sensor
PS106
Feed sensor (LT-211, C-208)
Paper feed sensor (LT-211, C-208)
PS23
ADU pre-registration sensor
PS20
ADU conveyance sensor
PS27
Intermediate conveyance sensor /1
PS28
PS22
Registration sensor
PS50
Vertical conveyance sensor
PS13
Paper exit sensor
PS19
Reverse paper exit sensor
PS21
10
ADU paper reverse sensor
PS12
11
Paper exit full sensor
PS36
PS42
PS25
PS29
PS107
PS30
20
23
Name
Display and signal

source
001
000
Paper
No paper
Paper
No paper
Paper
No paper
Full
Other than full
Upper limit Other than

upper limit
4
PS101,
PS109
PS24
24
Lower limit sensor (LT-211, C-208)
Upper limit sensor (LT-211, C-208)
2nd transfer HP sensor
Upper limit:1, lower

limit:2, middle:0
Home
Other than
position home position
2
PS18
25
PS51
Front door open/close sensor
Vertical conveyance door open/close
Open
Close
Installed
Not
installed
Open
Close
sensor
PS54
PS14
Toner supply unit open/close sensor
Fixing unit set detection
PS100
Top cover open/close sensor1 (LT-211, C-208)
PS115
Front door open/close sensor (LT-211, C-208)
SW100
Light
Toner supply door open/close sensor
Tray down switch (LT-211, C-208)
M41
28
Paper feed motor
PS1
30
Scanner HP sensor
PS3
APS detection sensor /S
PS4
APS detection sensor /L
PS2
APS timing sensor
1-118
ON
OFF
Abnormal
Normal
Home
Other than
Paper
No paper
OPEN
CLOSE
Light
Code
Multi code
32
Name
Display and signal

source
001
000
Abnormal
Normal
Normal
(abnormal rotation detection)
One or more
colors are
abnormal
Polygon motor /Y (abnormal tempera-
Abnormal
Normal
Normal
(abnormal temperature detection)
One or more
colors are
abnormal
Index sensor /Y
Abnormal
Normal
INDX SB M
Index sensor /M
INDX SB C
Index sensor /C
INDX SB B
Index sensor /K
INDX SB
Index sensor /Y, /M, /C, /K
Normal
Y, M, C, K
One or more
colors are
abnormal
Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C
Edge detected
Edge
from one or undetected
more color
PS5
Laser correction HP sensor /Y
PS6
Laser correction HP sensor /M
PS7
Laser correction HP sensor /C
PS5, PS6, PS7
PS5
PS6
M3
Polygon motor /Y (abnormal rotation

detection)
M4
Polygon motor /M (abnormal rotation
M5
Polygon motor /C (abnormal rotation
detection)
detection)
M6
Polygon motor /K (abnormal rotation
M3, M4,
Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K
detection)
M5, M6
M3
ture detection)
M4
Polygon motor /M (abnormal temperature detection)
M5
Polygon motor /C (abnormal temperature detection)
M6
Polygon motor /K (abnormal temperature detection)
M3, M4,
M5, M6
INDX SB Y
PS5, PS6, PS7
33
35
Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K
PS7
PS5, PS6, PS7
PS5
1-119
Edge
Edge
detected undetected
Edge detected
Edge
more color
Edge
Edge
detected undetected
Edge detected
Edge
more color
Edge
Edge
detected undetected
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
Code
Multi code
Name
35
10
11
36
Color registration sensor /F
Color registration sensor /R
37
Laser drive board /Y
LDB M
Laser drive board /M
LDB C
Laser drive board /C
Display and signal

source
001
Light
PS6
PS7
PS8
PS9
LDB Y
LDB K
Main body
Laser drive board /K
PS1
38
Scanner HP sensor
PS60,
41
Encoder sensor /Y1, /Y2
PS61
000
Edge
Edge
detected undetected
0 to 255
0 to 255
Home
Other than
Abnormal
Normal
1
2
PS62,
PS63
Encoder sensor /M1, /M2
5
PS64,
PS65
Encoder sensor /C1, /C2
8
PS66,
PS67
10
Encoder sensor /K1, /K2
11
PS69,
12
PS68
13
PS15
15
Encoder sensor /belt 1, /belt 2
14
1st transfer HP sensor
16
Home
Other than
17
18
M2
42
Scanner cooling fan
M42
DCPS cooling fan
M10
Fixing cooling fan /1
M48
Charger intake fan
M47
Drum unit fan
M43, M44,
Writing intake fan /1, /2, Writing
M45, M46
exhaust fan /1, /2
M24
IP cooling fan
M28, M27,
Paper exit fan /F, /M, /R
M26
M12, M13
Drum cooling fan /1, /2
M11
10
Transfer belt cooling fan
M25
11
ICP cooling fan
M61, M62,
12
Paper exit fan /1, /2, /3
M63
1-120
Abnormal
Normal
Main body
Code
Multi code
43
DC power supply unit /1 (12VDC)
C (T)
C (K)
DCPS1
DCPS2
Name
Display and signal

source
001
000
Abnormal
Normal
Total counter
Yes
No
Checking to see if the key counter-
Yes
No
equipped machine is provided with a

key counter or not.
TH1
Fixing temperature sensor /1
TH3
TH2
TH4
TH1
TH1
TH2
TH1 correction temperature
Fixing motor
M29
45
47
0 to 255
Abnormal
Normal
1
2
PS16
Fixing pressure release sensor
Home
Other than
5
M29
Fixing motor
Abnormal
Normal
10
11
PS15
48
Home
Other than
Printer control board
Displays abnormal
code
1
2
3
PRCB
49
(drum motor control)
1-121
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
Intrinsic
functions
M20
Code
Multi code
50
Name
Developing motor /Y
Display and signal

source
001
000
Abnormal
Normal
1
2
M21
Developing motor /M
4
5
M22
Developing motor /C
7
8
M23
Developing motor /K
10
11
TDS Y
12
Toner density sensor /Y output value (a
0 to 255
value reduced when the peak voltage

is set to 128 while in the L detection
adjustment)
TDS M
13
Toner density sensor /M output value (a

adjustment)
TDS C
14
Toner density sensor /C output value (a

adjustment)
TDS K
15
Toner density sensor /K output value (a

adjustment)
PCL Y
51
Pre-charging lamp /Y
PCL M
Pre-charging lamp /M
PCL C
Pre-charging lamp /C
PCL K
TDS Y
54
Pre-charging lamp /K
Toner density sensor /Y output value (a

adjustment)
TDS M
Toner density sensor /M output value (a

adjustment)
TDS C
Toner density sensor /C output value (a

adjustment)
1-122
Abnormal
Normal
0 to 255

Code
Multi code
Name
54
Toner density sensor /K output value (a
10
11
FS
LT-211, C-208
DF-319, AFR-20
Control voltage for the correction of the
Display and signal

source
001
Intrinsic
functions
TDS K
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
000
0 to 255
adjustment)
TDS Y
57
58
Connected Unconnected
0 to 255
toner density /Y
TDS M

toner density /M
TDS C

toner density /C
TDS K

toner density /K
DF-319,
AFR-20
FS
PS17
59
Fixing paper exit sensor
Paper
No paper
PS304
60
No paper sensor
Paper
No paper
PS301
Registration sensor
PS302
Timing sensor
PS305
Reverse sensor
PS306
Paper exit sensor
PS303
Paper feed cover sensor
Open
Close
PS308
Paper feed tray sensor
PS307
Paper exit cover sensor
RS1
DF-319, AFR-20 open/close sensor
Sub-tray paper exit sensor
Paper
No paper
PS702
Tray upper limit sensor

upper limit
PS703
Tray lower limit sensor
Lower limit Other than

lower limit
PS704
FNS entrance sensor
PS705
Stacker entrance sensor
PS706
Main tray paper exit sensor
PS707
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor
PS708
Alignment HP sensor /U
PS709
Paper exit belt HP sensor
Other than
home position
Home
position
PS713
Stapler rotation HP sensor
PS711
10
Stapler movement HP sensor
Home
position
Other than
home position
PS712
11
Paper exit opening HP sensor
PS714
12
Clincher rotation HP sensor
PS701
76
1-123
No paper
Paper
Paper
No paper
Other than
Standby
standby position position
Home
Other than
Other than
Close
close position position
Home
position
Other than
home position
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
FS
PI-110
Code
Multi code
76
13
Counter reset sensor
PS718
14
Shift HP sensor
PS720
15
Stacker no paper sensor
SW702
16
PS730
17
SW701
M710
PS715
Name
Display and signal

source
001
000
Paper
No paper
Other than
home position
Home
position
Paper
No paper
Staple switch /R
No staple
Staple
Stapler HP sensor /R
Other than
home position
Home
position
18
Cartridge switch /R
No cartridge Cartridge
19
Clincher motor /R
Other than start
Start
20
PS732
21
Clincher HP sensor /R
Other than
home position
Home
position
PS719
22
Sub-tray full sensor
Full
Other than full
MS701
23
FNS interlock switch
Front door Front door

opened
closed
SW704
24
Staple switch /F
No staple
Staple
PS731
25
Stapler HP sensor /F
Other than
home position
Home
position
SW703
26
Cartridge switch /F
No cartridge Cartridge
M715
27
Clincher motor /F
Other than start
Start
28
PS733
29
Clincher HP sensor /F
Other than
home position
Home
position
M707
30
Paper exit roller motor lock detection
Other than
control speed
Control
speed
31
FNS connection detection
Connected Unconnected
PS722
32
Folding knife HP sensor
PS723
33
Stopper HP sensor
PS724
34
Alignment HP sensor /L
PS725
35
Folding exit sensor
PS726
36
Folding passage sensor
PS729
37
Folding full sensor
38
M720
39
Folding conveyance motor
40
41
Home
position
Other than
home position
Other than
home position
Home
position
Paper
No paper
Full
Other than full
Other than
control speed
Control
speed
42
43
M203
44
PI conveyance motor
Other than
control speed
Control
speed
45
DIPSW0
Other than
Single
single operation operation
46
47
1-124
PI-110
FS
PI-110
Code
Multi code
001
000
76
48
49
50
Name
51
PS201
52
PI passage sensor /U
PS206
53
PI passage sensor /L
54
Display and signal

source
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
Paper
No paper
55
56
57
58
59
Folding connection detection
60
PS716
61
Gate HP sensor
62
Unconnected Connected
63
PS202
64
No sheet sensor /U
No paper
Paper
PS203
65
Sheet set sensor /U
PS205
66
Tray lower limit sensor /U

lower limit
PS204
67
Tray upper limit sensor /U

upper limit
68
Sheet feeder manual start/clear switch
69
Sheet feeder manual punch button
Switch
OFF
Switch ON
switch
70
Sheet feeder manual function selection

button switch
MS201
71
PI interlock switch
Open
Close
PS207
72
No sheet sensor /L
No paper
Paper
PS208
73
Sheet set sensor /L
PS210
74
Tray lower limit sensor /L

lower limit
PS209
75
Tray upper limit sensor /L

upper limit
76
PS212
77
Sheet size sensor /L
78
79
PI connection detection
80
81
82
1-125
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
PK-120,
PK-5,
PK-507
Code
Multi code
Name
76
83
Punch HP sensor
84
001
000
Other than
home position
Home
position
85
PS802
86
Punch scraps full sensor
Other than full
Full
PS804
87
Punch scraps box set sensor
Set
Other than set
88
Rocking End face detection 1
No paper
Paper
89
90
91
92
PS803
93
Rocking Punch movement home posi-
Home
position
Other than
home position
94
Connection detection
95
Cutting entrance detection
PS801
tion
TU-109,
TMG-3
Display and signal

source
PS101
77
Paper
No paper
Home
position
Other than
home position
Other than
home position
Home
position
Home
position
Other than
home position
Paper
No paper
PS102
Cutting conveyance detection
PS103
Cutting end stopper HP detection
PS104
Cutting clear HP detection
PS105
Cutting press HP detectin
PS106
Cutting knife upper limit HP detection
PS108
Cutting booklet discharge
PS110
Holder board of upper limit detection
Other than Upper limit

upper limit
PS111
Holder board of lower limit detection

lower limit
PS112
Pusher HP
PS114
10
Cutting stacker cover detection 24V
MS2
11
Cutting front door detection 24V
12
Cutting conveyance M lock signal
13
Home
position
Other than
home position
Open
Close
Locked
Unlocked
14
15
PS107
16
Cutting end scraps box set detection
Not set
Other than set
PS109
17
Cutting end scraps box full detection
Other than full
Full
PS113
18
Cutting stucker full detection
No paper
Paper
19
TU connection detection
20
21
22
23
under operation
1-126
Output check list

Do not output items with "x" in the "Cannot be
set or change in the field" column. These
Note:
Do not output items which cannot be set or
items are only for the developping/manufuct-
changed in the field and codes which are not
ing process.
described in the output check list."
Outputs of them may damage the machine.
Code
Multi code
Name
Cannot be set or
changed in the field
High voltage,
L1
analog signal M53, MC14
00
Exposure lamp
01
Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner

bottle clutch /Y
Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner
Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value),
bottle clutch /Y
toner bottle clutch /Y
M53, MC15

bottle clutch /M

bottle clutch /M

toner bottle clutch /M
M53, MC16

bottle clutch /C

bottle clutch /C

toner bottle clutch /C
M53, MC17

bottle clutch /K
10

bottle clutch /K
11

toner bottle clutch /K
HV1
02
High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y: for
current measurement)
5
High voltage unit /1 (charging /M: for
6
High voltage unit /1 (charging /C: for
7
High voltage unit /1 (charging /K: for

1-127
I ADJUSTMENT
8.5
47 MODE
47 MODE
Code
Multi code
Name
Cannot be set or
03
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /M)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /C)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y, /
M, /C, /K)
I ADJUSTMENT

High voltage,
analog signal
HV2
6
7
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K)
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y: for
9
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /M:
10
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /C:
for current measurement)

L1
for current measurement)

11
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K: for
12
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K: for
current measurement at color mode)

x
current measurement at color mode)

HV2
04
High voltage unit /2 (separation, meas-
urement)
PS11
DRPS Y
05
Gamma sensor
Gamma sensor (for individual check)
DRPS M
DRPS C
DRPS K
HV2
06
07
High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning+output)
High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning-output)
High voltage unit /2 (belt clean-
ing+output: for individual check)

7
High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning-out-
put: for individual check)

08
High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer
output1)
1
output2)
2
output1: for current measurement)

3
output2: for current measurement)

4
High voltage unit /2 (guide plate)
output3: for cleaning consideration)*
1-128

Code
Multi code
Name
Cannot be set or
09
High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /Y)
High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /M)
High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /C)
x
x

High voltage,
analog signal
HV1
High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /K)
Counter reset
Job memory clear
98
KRDS setup
Paper feed,
conveyance
SD7
15
Pick up solenoid /1
SD8
20
Pick up solenoid /2
SD9
Pick up solenoid /3
SD5
Pick up solenoid /BP
SD100
Paper feed solenoid (LT-211, C-208)
Paper feed clutch /1
MC9
MC11
MC7
21
MC6
Paper feed clutch /BP
MC101
Paper feed clutch (LT-211, C-208)
Pre-registration clutch /1
MC8
22
MC10
MC12
MC102
Pre-registration clutch (LT-211, C-208)
Tray up drive motor /1
M39
M38
M35
Tray up drive motor /BP (down)
Tray up drive motor /BP (up)
UP/DOWN motor (LT-211, C-208: down)
M40
23
M100
M34
24
UP/DOWN motor (LT-211, C-208: up)
2nd transfer pressure/release motor

(continuous rotation)
(pressure)
(release)
M30
25
Registration motor (1/3 speed)
Registration motor (1/2 speed)
Registration motor (1/1speed)
Registration motor (paper feed line

speed)
Registration motor (hard timer on: 1/1

speed)
M31
26
Loop roller motor (1/3 speed)
Loop roller motor (1/2 speed)
Loop roller motor (1/1speed)
1-129
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
47 MODE
Code
Multi code
26
Name
Cannot be set or
I ADJUSTMENT

Paper feed,
conveyance
M31
Loop roller motor (paper feed line

speed)
M33
27
Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/3
speed)
speed)
2
Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:3
speed)
times speed)
4
Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:1/
3 speed)
2 speed)
6
Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:3
1 speed)
times speed)
M41
28
Paper feed motor
Paper feed motor (LT-211, C-208)
Intermediate conveyance clutch /1
MC4
MC5
M101
MC13
29
SD1
Transfer belt separating claw
M136, M137
Paper feed assist fan /F, /R (LT-211, C-208)
SD6
ADU lock solenoid
Polygon motor /Y (1/1 rotation)
M3
32
M4
Polygon motor /M (1/1 rotation)
M5
Polygon motor /C (1/1 rotation)
M6
Polygon motor /K (1/1 rotation)
M3, M4,
Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (1/1 rota-
Polygon motor /Y (rotates at nonvola-
M5, M6
M3
tion)
tile setting)
M4
Polygon motor /M (rotates at nonvola-
M5
Polygon motor /C (rotates at nonvola-
tile setting)
tile setting)
M6
Polygon motor /K (rotates at nonvola-
M3, M4,
Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (rotates at
tile setting)
M5, M6
nonvolatile setting)
1-130

Code
Multi code
Name
33
LDB M
LDB C
LDB K
LDB Y, M,
Laser drive board /Y, /M, /C, /K
Cannot be set or
Paper feed,
conveyance
LDB Y
C, K
34
PS8
36
PS9
M1
37
Shading correction
3
LD alarm level detection all colors
91
LD alarm level clear (Y)
92
LD alarm level clear (M)
93
LD alarm level clear (C)
94
LD alarm level clear (K)
95
LD alarm level clear (all colors)
38
Scanner motor (back and forth drive 1:

continuous)

continuous)

continuous)

continuous)

continuous)
Scanner motor (HP search)
Scanner motor(moves to the back
Scanner motor (back scan ACS oper-
scan position)
ation+scan operation: one operation)
Main body
ACDB
40
AC drive board (RL1 (main relay)ON)
AC drive board (HTR1, 2 (HTR1, 2

(heater /1, /2) OFF)
M14
M15
M16
M17
41
Drum motor /Y (1/3 speed)
Drum motor /Y (1/2 speed)
Drum motor /Y (1/1speed)
Drum motor /M (1/3 speed)
Drum motor /M (1/2 speed)
Drum motor /M (1/1speed)
Drum motor /C (1/3 speed)
Drum motor /C (1/2 speed)
Drum motor /C (1/1speed)
Drum motor /K (1/3 speed)
10
Drum motor /K (1/2 speed)
11
Drum motor /K (1/1speed)

1-131
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
47 MODE
Code
Multi code
Name
41
12
Transfer belt motor (1/3 speed)
13
Transfer belt motor (1/2 speed)
14
Transfer belt motor (1/1speed)
15
Transfer belt motor (1/3 speed: for nip
Cannot be set or
I ADJUSTMENT

Main body
M18
measurement)
M18
16
measurement)
17

measurement)
M2
42
M25
Scanner cooling fan
IPB cooling fan
M42
DCPS cooling fan
M10, M36,
Fixing cooling fan /1, /3, /2
M48
Charger intake fan
M47
Drum unit fan
M43, M44,
Writing intake fan /1, /2,
M37
M45, M46
Writing exhaust fan /1, /2
M24
IP cooling fan
M26, M27,
Paper exit fan /R, /M, /F
M12
Drum cooling fan /1
M13
10
Drum cooling fan /2
M11
11
M61, M62,
12
Paper exit fan /1, /2, /3
Total counter
T (BK)
Black counter
T (K)
Key counter
M28
M63
T (C)
DCPS2
43
44
DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC

breaking)
L2, L3, L4
45
Fixing upper lamp /1, /2,
Fixing lower lamp
2
3
L2
L3
L4
Fixing lower lamp
L2, L3, L4
Fixing upper lamp /1, /2,
Fixing lower lamp
9
10
1-132

Code
Multi code
Name
47
Fixing motor (1/3 speed)
Fixing motor (1/2 speed)
Fixing motor (1/1speed)
Fixing motor (reverse rotation: release
Cannot be set or
Main body
M29
operation on, full-time rotation)

4
Fixing motor (reverse rotation: moves

to the pressure position)
Fixing motor (reverse rotation: moves

to the release position)
Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/3 speed)
10
11
M29, L2,
13
L3, L4
Fixing motor, Fixing upper lamp /1, /2,

fixing lower lamp (fixing roller pressure+all heater lamps on)
M54
M19
48
15
Web motor
1st transfer pressure/release motor

(full-time rotation)

(stops at the release position)
1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops

at black and white pressure position)
1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops

at color mode pressure position)
M18
49
Transfer belt motor (for checking photo-
sensitive material control 1: 1/1 speed)

1
1st transfer pressure/release motor (for check-
ing photosensitive material control 2: 1/2 speed)

2

3

4

5
1st transfer pressure/release motor (for checking photosensitive material control 6: 1/3 speed)
Intrinsic
functions
M20
M21
50
Developing motor /Y (1/1speed)
Developing motor /Y (1/2 speed)
Developing motor /Y (1/3 speed)
Developing motor /M (1/1speed)
Developing motor /M (1/2 speed)
Developing motor /M (1/3 speed)

1-133
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
Code
Multi code
Name
50
Developing motor /C (1/1speed)
Developing motor /C (1/2 speed)
Developing motor /C (1/3 speed)
Cannot be set or
Intrinsic
functions
M22
M23
PCL Y
51
Developing motor /K (1/1speed)
10
Developing motor /K (1/2 speed)
11
Developing motor /K (1/3 speed)
PLC M
PCL C
PCL K
PCL Y
Pre-charging lamp /Y (turns on the
PCL M
control signal)
Pre-charging lamp /M (turns on the
control signal)
PLC C
PCL K
Pre-charging lamp /C (turns on the

control signal)
Pre-charging lamp /K (turns on the
control signal)
52
L detection reference for all colors
L detection reference for colors (Y, M, C)
L detection reference for K
L detection reference for Y
L detection reference for M
x
x
M49
54
M50
M51
M52
L detection reference for C
Toner supply motor /Y (high speed)
Toner supply motor /Y (low speed)
Toner supply motor /Y (setting value)
Toner supply motor /M (high speed)
Toner supply motor /M (low speed)
Toner supply motor /M (setting value)
Toner supply motor /C (high speed)
Toner supply motor /C (low speed)
Toner supply motor /C (setting value)
Toner supply motor /K (high speed)
10
Toner supply motor /K (low speed)
11
Toner supply motor /K (setting value)
MC14
12
Toner bottle clutch /Y
MC15
13
Toner bottle clutch /M
MC16
14
Toner bottle clutch /C
MC17
SD2
SD3
55
15
Toner bottle clutch /K
Color registration shutter solenoid
Gamma sensor shutter solenoid
1-134

Code
Multi code
Name
56
Indicator lamp (PAT1 on)
Cannot be set or
Intrinsic
functions
FS connection check
LT-211, C-208 connection check
DF-319, AFR-20 connection check
TDS Y
DF-319,
AFR-20
57
Toner density sensor /Y
TDS M
Toner density sensor /M
TDS C
Toner density sensor /C
TDS K
Toner density sensor /K
M301
58
60
Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 300

mm/sec)

mm/sec)

mm/sec)
Paper feed motor (reverse rotation: 300

mm/sec)

mm/sec)

mm/sec)
M302
Conveyance motor (normal rotation:

300 mm/sec)

400 mm/sec)

900 mm/sec)
10
Conveyance motor (reverse rotation:

300 mm/sec)
11

400 mm/sec)
12

900 mm/sec)
M303
13
Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 300

mm/sec)
14

mm/sec)
15

mm/sec)
16
Paper exit motor (reverse rotation: 300

mm/sec)
1-135
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
47 MODE
Code
Multi code
Name
60
17
Cannot be set or
I ADJUSTMENT

DF-319,
AFR-20
M303
mm/sec)
18
SD302
19
Reverse solenoid
SD301
20
Paper exit solenoid
MC301
21
Registration clutch
FNS conveyance motor
Shift motor (HP search)
Shift motor (moves to the shift position)
Shift motor (rotation)
mm/sec)
FS
M701
M702
M703
M705
M707
75
Tray up/down motor (HP search)
Tray up/down motor (down)
Tray up/down motor (up)
Alignment motor /U (HP search)
Paper exit roller motor (HP search)
10
Paper exit roller motor (reverse rotation)
M708
11
M708
12
Paper exit opening motor (HP search)

Paper exit opening motor (moves to
opening)
M709
M714
M711
13
Stapler motor /R (initianl operation)
14
Stapler motor /R (stapling)
15
Stapler motor /F (initianl operation)
16
Stapler motor /F (stapling)
17
Stapler movement motor (HP search)
18
Stapler movement motor (movement

by size)
M713
19
Stacker entrance motor
M718
20
Stopper motor (HP search)
M716
21
Alignment motor /L
M719
23
Folding knife motor
M720
24
SD704
31
Paper exit opening solenoid
SD705
32
M705
33
Alignment motor /U (open)
34
Alignment motor /U (close)
35
Alignment motor /U (rocking)
36
Alignment motor /L (open)
M716
M718
37
Alignment motor /L (close)
38
Alignment motor /L (rocking)
39
Stopper motor (moves to the A4R position)
1-136

Code
Multi code
Name
75
55
Conveyance motor
56
Cutter motor (normal rotation)
57
Cutter motor (reverse rotation)
M103
58
Stopper motor (HP search)
M104
59
Stopper release motor (HP search)
60
Stopper release motor (release)
61
Stopper release motor (set)
62
Press motor (HP search)
63
Press motor (press)
MC202
64
Conveyance clutch /L
M202
65
Tray up/down motor /L (down)
Cannot be set or
TU-109,
TMG-3
M101
M102
M105
PI-110
66
Tray up/down motor /L (up)
SD202
67
Sheet feed solenoid /L
PK-120, PK-5,
PK-507
M801
78
Punch motor
M802
79
Punch shift motor (HP search)
PI-110
MC201
83
Conveyance clutch /U
M201
84
Tray up/down motor (down)
85
Tray up/down motor (up)
SD201
86
Sheet feed solenoid /U
M203
87
PI conveyance motor
M712
88
Gate drive motor (HP search)
89
Gate drive motor (stacker direction
FS
switching)
90
Gate drive motor (straight direction

switching)
M721
91
Sub-tray paper exit motor
M704
92
Clincher rotation motor (HP search)
93
Clincher rotation motor (skew shift)
M706
94
Stapler rotation motor (HP search)
95
Stapler rotation motor (skew shift)
96
Three-folding gate solenoid
SD706
ADU
99
SD4
80
MC2
81
MC1
MC3
M32
84
FNS paperless running mode

Reverse/exit solenoid
ADU reverse motor (forward rotation:

1/3 speed)
1/2 speed)
1/1 speed)
3

paper feed line speed)
1-137
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
Code
Multi code
Name
84
Cannot be set or
ADU
M32
3 times speed)
5
ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation:
1/3 speed)
1/2 speed)
7
1/1 speed)
paper feed line speed)
9
ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation:3

times speed)
Others
94
Adjustment data display
Illuminate all LEDs on the operation

board
Message display
97
E-RDH (DRAM) capacity display
98
E-RDH (DRAM) check
99
HDD bad sectors check and recovery
1-138
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Caution:
Make sure the power cord of the copier is
unplugged from the power outlet
9.1
Paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment
Perform the paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment when the no feed jam occurs at the bypass
feed.
A. Procedure
1. Pull out the ADU.
2. Install the piled plate [3] on the paper feed roller/
BP [2] with 2 screws [1].
[1]
[3]
[2]
3. Replace the ADU.

4. Perform the copy to check the paper feed operation.
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 if the no feed jam continues
to occur at the paper feed.
Note:
The weight plate (P/N:13FG4062*) is a supply
part. It should be purchased separately.
Up to 4 plates can be used at a time.
Perform "9.3 Pick-up movement amount
adjustment (bypass)" when the weight plate is
8050fs1050
added.
1-139
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.2
Paper feed height (upper

limit) adjustment (bypass)
Perform the paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment when the no feed jam occurs, the edge of the
fed paper is folded, or you want to feed curled
paper.
Note:
This adjustment affects the pick-up movement amount. When the adjustment is complete, perform "9.3 Pick-up movement amount
adjustment (bypass)".
A. Procedure
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the paper
[1]
feed solenoid cover [2].
[2]
1-140
[1]
8050fs1051
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
3. Loosen a screw [1] and adjust the position of the
I ADJUSTMENT
tray upper limit sensor/BP (PS25) [2].

Note:
Take note of the original scale.
(1) If it is not within the standard value:
Adjust the vertical position of the sensor mounting
bracket to make the height of the entrance guide
upper surface and the up/down plate upper surface
to be within the standard value.
When raising the height of the up/down plate:
[2]
lower the sensor mounting bracket.

When lowering height of the up/down plate:
lower the sensor mounting bracket.
[1]
(2) If any problem occurs:

When the edge of the fed paper is folded: raise
the position of the sensor mounting bracket.
When paper with a concave curl is fed: raise the
position of the sensor mounting bracket.
When paper with a convex curl is fed: lower the
position of the sensor mounting bracket.
1. Replace the paper feed solenoid cover.
2. Replace the ADU.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 6 to adjust the position of
PS25 again if the problem continues to occur.
1-141
8050fs1052
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.3
Pick-up movement amount

adjustment (bypass)
Perform the pick-up movement amount adjustment

when a no feed jam occurs frequently.
A. Procedure
[1]
feed solenoid cover [2].
[2]
[1]
8050fs1053
3. Loosen a screw [1] and adjust the position of the

pick-up solenoid/BP (SD5) [2].
Note:
Take note of the original scale.
4. Replace the paper feed solenoid cover.
5. Replace the ADU.
7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 to adjust the position of SD5
again if the no feed jam continues to occur.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1054
1-142
Paper feed tray /1 to /3 miscentering adjustment
I ADJUSTMENT
9.4
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Perform this adjustment when the mis-centering

occurs even after "Printer-centering adjustment" in
the 36 mode, has been performed.
A. Procedure
1. Pull out the paper feed tray.
2. Loosen 3 screws [2] for the up/down plate [1].
[1]
3. Move the guide plate and adjust the center posi-
[2]
tion.
4. Tighten 3 screws [2].
5. Print the test pattern (No.16).
[3]
8050fs1055
6. Fold the output in half vertically and check

whether the mis-centering [3] of the center of
[2]
image [2] against the center of paper [1] is
[3]
within the standard value.

7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 until the mis-centering
[1]
amount is within the standard value.

8050fs1056
1-143
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.5
Paper feed tray/1 to /3 sheet

feed pressure adjustment
Perform the sheet feed pressure adjustment when

the no feed jam or the double feed jam occurs at the
paper feed. The sheet feed pressure is affected by
the paper type and the operating environment (the
no feed jam is likely in the low temperature environment and the double feed is likely in the high temperature environment). Excess adjustment may
reverse the symptom.
A. Procedure
1. Pull out the paper feed tray [1].
[3]
feed unit cover [3].
[2]
[1]
[2]
8050fs1057
1-144
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
3. Unplug the connector [1].
I ADJUSTMENT
4. Remove a screw [2] and loosen a hold-down

shaft screw [3].
5. Slide the paper feed unit [4] toward the rear side
[3]
and lift it up. Then, unplug the connector [5] and

remove the paper feed unit [4].
[5]
[4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1058
6. Change the hook position of the spring [1] at the

bottom of the paper feed unit.
Weak[2]: Double feed jam is corrected.
Strong [3]: No feed jam is corrected.
7. Replace the paper feed unit and the paper feed
[1]
tray.
[2]
1-145
[3]
8050fs1059
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.6
FNS adjustment of the

bypass conveyance guide
plate magnet
A. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door.
2. Check whether the stopper piece [4] of the
[1]
bypass conveyance guide plate is in contact

with the bypass conveyance guide plate /L [5]
when the magnet [2] for the bypass conveyance
[5]
[3]
[2]
guide plate [1] is attached to the front panel [3].

If not, perform the following adjustment.
[4]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
8050fs1075
3. Loosen the magnet screw [1].
[2]
4. Push the bypass conveyance guide plate [2]

toward the arrow until the stopper piece [4]
[6]
[5]
comes into contact with the conveyance guide

plate /L [4].
5. Attach the magnet [5] to the front panel [6].
Then, tighten the magnet screw [1].
[1]
6. Close the finisher door.
[4]
[3]
8050fs1076
1-146
FNS adjustment
bypass gate
of
the
I ADJUSTMENT
9.7
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
A. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door.
2. Pull out the stacker unit [1].
3. Remove 2 rail stopper screws [2]. Then, pull out
the stacker unit further.
[2]
Note:
To avoid FNS from falling, make sure to place
a support [3] under the stacker unit.
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1077
4. Open the bypass conveyance guide plate [1].
[2]
5. Visually check whether the clearance between

the bypass gate [2] and the bypass conveyance
plate [3] is within the standard value when the
[1]
bypass gate solenoid (SD705) is off.

Standard value: A = 3.2 0.5 mm
mm
3.2
[3]
0.5
A=
[2]
8050fs1078
1-147
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
6. Remove the rear cover.

7. Unplug all connectors [2] from the FNS control
[2]
board (FNSCB) [1] and remove the wiring har-
[3]
[4]
ness from the clamp [3].

8. Remove 5 screws [4]. Then, remove the FNSCB
[1] with the bracket [5].
[5]
[1]
8050fs1079
9. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the bypass gate solenoid (SD705) [1] and adjust the position of SD
[4]
705 [1] based on the mark [5] to make the clear-
A=
3.2
ance between the bypass gate [3] and the
mm
bypass conveyance plate [4] to be within the
[3]
standard value when SD705 [1] is off.

10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
0.5
[2]
steps in reverse.
[5]
[1]
1-148
8050fs1080
FNS adjustment of the shift

position
I ADJUSTMENT
9.8
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
A. Procedure
1. Remove the following parts.
Top cover or optional PI (if installed)
Top cover /2
2. Turn on the main body, and then drive the shift
motor (M702) in the 47 mode (code 75-2/75-3).
3. Check whether the edge of the actuator [5] for
the slide gear is placed in the notched hole [3] at
[3]
[5]
the slide stay [2] for the shift unit [1] for both the
HP search (home position) and the shift posi-
[4]
tion.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1081
4. Loosen the bracket screw [2] for the shift HP

sensor (PS718) and adjust the position of the
bracket [4] based on the mark [3].
5. Tighten the bracket screw [2] when the adjustment is complete.
[1]
[4]

steps in reverse.
[3]
[2]
8050fs1082
1-149
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.9
FNS adjustment of the paper

exit opening solenoid
A. Procedure
Top cover /1 or optional PI (if installed)
Top cover /2
Rear cover
2. Turn on the main body, and then turn on the
paper exit opening solenoid (SD704) in the 47
mode (code 75-31).
3. Check whether the clearance between the
plunger [2] on the solenoid and the stopper [3]
[1]
on the bracket is within the standard value when

SD704 [1] is on.
A=6.5 0.5mm
[2]
8050fs1083
4. Remove 2 solenoid bracket screws [1] and

remove the solenoid [2] with the bracket [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
1-150
8050fs1084
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[2]
tion of the solenoid [2], and then tighten the

screws.
A=6.5 0.5mm
[1]
8050fs1085
6. Replace the solenoid bracket [1] and tighten the
[5]
[1]
solenoid bracket screws [5] at the position

where the paper exit guide [2] is in contact with
the stopper (rubber) [4] on the paper exit guide
stay [3].
[4]
[3]
Note:
[2]
There should be the gap of 1 mm or more

between the paper exit guide [2] and the paper
exit guide stay [3].
[3]
steps in reverse.
1mm
[2]
8050fs1086
1-151
I ADJUSTMENT
5. Loosen 2 solenoid screws [1], adjust the posi-
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.10 FNS adjustment of the position of paper exit arm

A. Procedure
1. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker
unit.
2. Check whether the upper face of the paper exit
belt arm [4] is located at the center of 2 marks
[3]
[5] when the edge of the actuator [2] for the belt
detection gear [1] is placed in the notched hole
[3] at the rear panel.
If not, perform the adjustment.
3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker
unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further.
[2]
Note:
To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure
[1]
to place a support under the stacker unit.
[4]
[5]
8050fs1087
1-152
4. Remove a screw [2] for the belt detection gear

[1]. Place the paper eject belt arm at the speci-
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[1]
I ADJUSTMENT
fied position. Then, fix the detection gear [1] at

the specified position.
steps in reverse.
[2]
8050fs1088
1-153
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.11 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate /U

A. Procedure
1. Turn on the main body. Once the finisher completes its initial operation, turn off the main body.
unit.
Note:
4. Check whether the actuator [2] for the alignment
[1]
HP sensor /U (PS708) [1] is aligned with the
[2]
home position.
8050fs1089
5. Check whether the clearance A for the alignA=340.6
ment plate /U [1] is within the standard value.
mm
Standard value: A = 340.6 + 0/ -0.5 mm (in to in)

[1]
PS708
8050fs1090
1-154
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
6. Loosen 2 screws [1]. Align the rear side of the
[4]
[1]
[2]
I ADJUSTMENT
alignment plate /U [2] with the long line at the

center of the marking lines [3]. Then, adjust the
front side of the alignment plate /U [4] to be
within the standard value based on the rear
side.
[2]
[1]
[3]
8050fs1091
1-155
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.12 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate /L

(only for FS-215/FN-9/FS606)
A. Procedure
1. Check whether "Adjustment of the position of
FNS alignment plate /U" has been completed.
2. Turn on the main body. In the 47 mode, use one
of the following codes to drive a motor and turn
off the main body.
Code 75-8: alignment motor /U (M705) home
position search
Code 75-21: alignment motor /L (M716) home
position search
Code 75-39: stopper motor (M718) moves to the
A4R or larger position
unit.
Note:
5. Remove the stapler unit cover.
6. Check whether the actuator for the alignment
HP sensor /U (PS708) is aligned with the home
position.
7. Check whether the actuator [3] for the alignment
HP sensor /L (PS724) for the alignment plate /L
[1] is aligned with the home position.
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1092
1-156
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[3]
section and check the position of the alignment

plate /U (rear) [1] and alignment plate /L (rear)
[1]
[2] by placing a sheet [3]. Check whether the

space A between the alignment plate /L (rear)
[2] and the alignment plate /L (front) [4] is within
the standard value.
Standard value: A = 340.6 + 0/ -0.5 mm (in to in)
[2]
[4]
A=340.6
mm
8050fs1093
9. Loosen 2 screws [1] and adjust the position of
[2]
the alignment plate /L [2] to be within the standard value.
[1]
[2]
[1]
1-157
[1]
8050fs1094
I ADJUSTMENT
8. Place a sheet larger than A4R in the stacker
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.13 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling)

Note:
Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal
direction manually (it may cause the teeth to
skip between the belt and gear).
A. Procedure
1. Perform a stapling operation to check whether it
is performed within the standard value.
Standard value for the one-corner stapling (at
[1]
rear) [1]: A = 8.5 3 mm
[2]
A=8.5 3mm
Standard value for the one-corner stapling (at

front) [2]: B=8.5 3 mm
Standard value for the flat stapling [3]: C= B=8.5
3 mm
(In the flat stapling, the paper edge and the line [4]
connecting 2 staples must become parallel)
B=8.5 3mm
[3]
unit.
C=8.5 3mm

Note:
[4]
1-158
8050fs1095
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
5. Loosen the adjustment screws [3] for the

the position of the flat-stapling stopper [5] based
I ADJUSTMENT
clincher /F [1] and the clincher /R [2] and adjust
[5]
on the mark [4].

6. Perform a stapling operation to check whether it
is performed within the standard value.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[4]
[3]
8050fs1096
1-159
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.14 FNS adjustment of the stapling position in a vertical

direction
A. Type of cartridge
Note:
The adjustment method of the FNS stapler
[3]
upper and lower positions varies according to
[2]
[1]
the form of the cartridge.

The adjustment of a cartridge for the new type
can be made by using a stapler positioning jig
(129 X JG 011) for the old type and the old cartridge.
[1] New cartridge
[2] Reinforcing board
[3] Old cartridge
8050fs1122
B. Procedure (New type)

Note:
Be sure to avoid the manual horizontal movement of the stapler unit. (This may cause the
jumping of the belt and the gear teeth)
1. Conduct an actual stapling operation and check
to see if any poor clinch occurs.
No buckled stapling [1] is allowed.
Floating stapling [2] must be less than the stipulated value (L = 1 mm).
[1]
The height of the belt staple-needle [3] must be

L
less than the stipulated value (L = 0.7 mm).

When any defect is found, conduct the following
[2]
L=1mm
[3]
Note:
When the clincher or stapler is replaced or
removed, make adjustments after reinstalling
it.
1-160
adjustments.
L=0.7mm
8050fs1123
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2. Open the door of the finisher and pull out the
I ADJUSTMENT
stacker unit.
3. Remove the rail stopper fixing screw of the
stacker unit and pull further out the stacker unit.
Note:
To prevent the finisher from falling down, be
sure to place a support beneath the unit that
has been pulled out.
5. Remove the cartridge.
6. Loosen the fixing screws [3], 4 each, of the
[2]
[1]
clincher /F [1] and the clincher /R [2].
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
8050fs1124
1-161
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
7. Attach the stapler positioning jig [1] to the car-
I ADJUSTMENT
tridge set section.

Note:
Be sure to push the stapler positioning jig
until it gets locked.
[1]
8050fs1125
1-162
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
8. Rotate the stapler gear [1] in the lower direction
I ADJUSTMENT
and adjust the clincher position so that the 2

pins [2] of the stapler positioning jig get
smoothly into the positioning holes [4] of the
clincher [3]. And then rotate the gear [1] in the
lower direction to set the pin securely into the
positioning hole.
Note:
When fitting forcibly the pin of the stapler
positioning jig, this may result in the pin
being hard to draw out. Be sure to rotate the
[1]
stapler gear with care.
[3]
9. Tighten up each of 4 clincher fixing screws.

10. Rotate the stapler gear in the upper direction to
remove the jig.
[4]
[2]
8050fs1126
11. Bring the cartridge back to the original position.

12. Check the stapling operations.
1-163
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
C. Procedure (Old type)
I ADJUSTMENT
Note:
direction manually (it may cause the teeth to
skip between the belt and gear).
1. Perform a stapling operation to check for the
clinch failure.
Buckled staple-needles [1]
Floating stapling [2] (standard value: L = 1 mm or
less)
[1]
Height of belt staple-needle [3] (standard value:

L
L = 0.7 mm or less)
If there is a failure, perform the following adjust-
[2]
L=1mm
[3]
Note:
ment.
L=0.7mm
8050fs1097
Adjust the clincher or stapler if it is replaced

or removed.
unit.
Note:
5. Remove the cartridge [1], open the cover [2],
and then remove the staple sheet [3] by sliding
it.
[1]
[3]
[2]
1-164
8050fs1098
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[1]
ing jig [1], insert the hooks [3] on the plate into
the hook holes [4] on the cartridge, and then
close the cover [5].
7. Attach the cartridge onto the stapler.
[5]
[3]
[2]
[4]
8050fs1099
8. Loosen 4 screws [3] for the clincher /F [1] and

the clincher /R [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
8050fs1100
1-165
I ADJUSTMENT
6. Remove the plate [2] from the stapler position-
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9. Fold the stacking assist unit [1] and insert 2

guide pins [3] on the stapler positioning jig [2]
[2]
into the holes [5] on the clincher [4].

Note:
[1]
The stapler positioning jig is adequate to be

hooked on the clincher.
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1101
1-166
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
10. Rotate the gear [1] for the stapler downward.
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the position of the clincher [4] for the

plate [2] attached to the cartridge to be inserted
into the slot [3] on the jig smoothly. Rotate the
gear [1] downward further. Then, place the plate
[2] onto the slot [3] on the jig and fully insert the
jig into the clincher unit [4].
11. Tighten 4 screws for each clincher.
12. Remove the jig by rotating the gear for the sta-
[1]
pler upward.
[3]
Note:
Make sure not to snag on Mylar on the
clincher when removing the stapler position-
[2]
[4]
ing jig.
13. Remove the cartridge and plate. Then, replace
the staple sheet removed at the step 5. Replace
the cartridge.
14. Check the operation of the stapler.
[1]
1-167
8050fs1102
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.15 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling)

(only for FS-215/FN-9/FS606)
A. Procedure
Note:
direction manually (it may cause teeth to skip
between the belt and gear).
1. Perform a stapling operation to check whether
[1]
the paper edge and the line [2] connecting 2 staples [1] becomes parallel [3] and the discrepancy L is within the standard value.
[2]
Standard value: discrepancy L = 1 mm or less

If the discrepancy is not within the standard
value, perform the following adjustment.
2. Check whether "adjustment of the position of
[3]
FNS alignment plate /U" and "adjustment of the

position of alignment plate /L" has been com8050fs1103
plete.
unit.
Note:
6. Loosen 3 screws [2] for the alignment plate /L
[1].
[1]
[2]
1-168
8050fs1104
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
7. Adjust the position based on the mark [3] to
I ADJUSTMENT
make the upper edge [1] and lower edge [2] of

paper to be horizontal.
8. Tighten the 3 screws, then perform a stapling
operation to check whether the stitch-and-fold
position is within the standard value.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
1-169
8050fs1105
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.16 FNS adjustment of the angle

of the folding stopper (only
for FS-215/FN-9/FS-606)
Note:
direction manually (it may cause teeth to skip
between the belt and gear).
Never loosen the screw [1] that must not be
removed.
[1]
8050fs1106
A. Procedure
1. Perform a folding operation with A3 paper to
check whether the discrepancy at the folding
edge is within the standard value.
Standard value: A = 1 mm or less
If the discrepancy is not within the standard
value, perform the following adjustment.

unit.
Note:
8050fs1107

1-170
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
5. Loosen 5 screws [2] for the folding stopper [1]
I ADJUSTMENT
and adjust the angle based on the mark [3].

Note:
Never loosen the screw [4] that must not be
removed.
6. Tighten the 5 screws [2], then perform the folding to check whether the discrepancy is within
the standard value.
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
8050fs1108
1-171
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.17 FNS adjustment of the folding force (only for FS-215/

FN-9/FS-606)
A. Procedure
1. Perform the followings to change the pressure
of the folding roller.
2. Remove the rear cover.
unit.
4. Remove the stacker unit cover.
5. Change the positions of each 2 pressure
springs [3] at front [1] and rear [2].
A
B
Note:
[3]
The 4 pressure springs [3] must be hooked on
the hook holes with same symbol.
C
B
A
[1]
C
B
A
[3]
1-172
C
B
A
[2]
8050fs1109
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.18 FNS adjustment of the threeholding position (only for

FS-215/FN-9/FS-606)
A. Procedure
1. Check whether "adjustment of the angle of the
folding stopper" has been completed.
Folding
Standard value
Specification
position
A4R
8.5 x 11R
95 mm
89.4 mm
2 mm
101 mm
95 mm
2 mm
101 mm
95 mm
2 mm
c
a
2. Perform a three-folding operation to check

whether the three-folding position is within the
b
specification.
8050fs1110
If it is not within the specification, perform the

following adjustment.
3. Turn on the main body, adjust the first folding
position (standard value a) in "Finisher adjustment" "Three-holding position adjustment" in
the 36 mode. Then, perform the three-folding for
confirmation.
4. Once the first folding line is adjusted within the
specification, open the finisher door and pull out
the stacker unit.
5. Open the three-folding guide plate [1], loosen 2
three-folding stopper screws [2], and then adjust
the position of the three-folding stopper [4]
based on the mark [3].
6. Tighten the 2 screws [2], then perform the threefolding to check whether the three-folding posi-
[3]
tion is within the standard value.
[2]
[4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1111
1-173
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.19 FNS adjustment of the stapler drive belt position

A. Procedure
Note:
This adjustment is performed only if the position between the drive belt and the gear is displaced during another adjustment by mistake.
unit.
Note:
Rear cover
Stapler unit cover
4. Insert the stacker unit.
5. Loosen 2 screws (M3) [2] for the staple slide
pulley /B [1] from the rear side with the hexagonal wrench [3].
6. Move the stapler and clincher simultaneously
toward center until they contacts with the bearing.
Note:
Make sure to move them simultaneously. The
flat-stapling stopper may be damaged at the
metal frame of the stapler if they are moved
individually.
[2]
[1]
[3]
8050fs1112
1-174
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
the cover [2], and then remove the staple sheet

[3] by sliding it.
[1]
[3]
[2]
8050fs1113
8. Remove the plate [2] from the stapler position-
[1]
ing jig [1], insert the hooks [3] on the plate into
the hook holes [4] on the cartridge, and then
close the cover [5].
9. Attach the cartridge onto the stapler /R.
[5]
[3]
[2]
[4]
8050fs1114
1-175
I ADJUSTMENT
7. Remove the cartridge [1] for the stapler /R, open
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10. Fold the stacking assist unit [1] and insert 2
[2]
guide pins [3] on the stapler positioning jig [2]

into the holes [5] on the clincher [4].
Note:
[1]
The stapler positioning jig is adequate to be

hooked on the clincher.
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1115
11. Rotate the gear [1] for the stapler /R downward.

Adjust the horizontal position of the clincher [4]
[3]
for the plate [2] attached to the cartridge to be

inserted into the slot [3] on the jig smoothly.
Then, adjust the horizontal position of the sta-
[2]
[4]
pler /R and the clincher /R. Then, rotate the gear

[1] downward further. Place the plate [2] onto
the slot [3] on the jig and fully insert the jig into
the clincher unit [4].
Note:
Do not loosen the screws for the clincher at
this time.
The stapler /R and the clincher /R must be
finely adjusted if the position is not matched.
1-176
[1]
8050fs1116
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
plate and the jig joined). Then, tighten 2 screws

for the staple slide pulley /B from the rear side.
13. Pull out the stacker unit. Then, remove the jig by
rotating the gear for the stapler upward.
Note:
Make sure not to snag on Mylar on the
clincher when removing the stapler positioning jig.
14. Remove the cartridge for the stapler /R and
plate. Replace the staple sheet removed at the
step 7 and replace the cartridge. Then check following 3 stapling operations.
1-staple (at rear)
1-staple (at front)
2-staple
15. Replace the rear cover and the stapler cover.
1-177
I ADJUSTMENT
12. Insert the stacker with the jig attached (with the
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.20 TU adjustment of the sheet

cutting parallelism
A. Procedure
1. Measure the length between the folding face [1]
A
and trimming surface [2] and calculate the parallelism. Then, check whether it is within the standard value.
Standard value: parallelism = A-B = 1 mm or
less
[1]
[2]
2. Open the front door [1].
8050fs1117
[2]
3. Push up the pressure release lever [2].

4. Loosen the screw [3]. Then adjust the conveyance guide plate [5] based on the mark [4].
[1]
5. Tighten the screw [3].
[5]
[4]
1-178
[3]
8050fs1118
mis-centering
I ADJUSTMENT
9.21 LCT
tray
adjustment
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Perform this adjustment when the positioning correction cannot be done (the mis-centering amount
exceeds the automatic adjustment range of 5 mm)
even if "Printer centring adjustment (tray 4)" in the
36 mode, has been performed.
A. Procedure
1. Print the test pattern No.16 to check the miscentering amount.
2. Lift up the up/down plate [1].
[4]
3. Open the top cover [2].
[3]
[3]
[5]
4. Loosen 4 screws [3] at the top of LCT. Then,

slide the guide plate/front [4] and the guide
plate/rear [5] in the same direction at the same
amount.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1064
1-179
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
5. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the center positioning

bracket [1] at the bottom of LCT. Then, slide the
guide plate in the same direction at the same
amount with step 4
6. Tighten the 2 screws [2].
7. Replace the LCT and print the test pattern
No.16 again.
8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 until the mis-centering
amount becomes within the automatic adjustment range.
[2]
[1]
1-180
8050fs1065
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.22 LCT skew adjustment

Perform the LCT skew adjustment when the paper
skew is different with paper supplied from the other
tray in such case as LCT is placed on the inclined
surface. However, it has just a little effect because
all paper is corrected at the second paper feed section.
A. When all printouts are skewed:
1. Print the test pattern No.16 in the continuous
copy mode to check the skew amount.
2. Open the front door of the LCT.
3. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the positioning bracket
[1] at the bottom of the LCT.
4. Adjust the position of the positioning bracket [2].
[1]
[2]
8050fs1066
1-181
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
B. When some printouts are skewed:

1. Print the test pattern No.16 in the continuous
copy mode to check the skew amount.
[3]
3. Loosen 6 screws [2] at the top of LCT to loosen
[2]
[2]
[4]
the guide plate/front [3], the guide plate/rear [4],

and the guide plate/right side [5].
4. Tighten the 6 screws at the position where each
guide plate is in contact with paper.
[1]
Reference:
The size indicator on the guide plate is
approximately 2 mm wider than the actual
standard size paper. It may cause the skew for
some paper. The skew amount is reduced if
paper is fixed with each guide plate in tight.
[2]
[5]
8050fs1067
1-182
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.23 LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment

Perform the LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment when the no feed jam occurs at the paper feed
(when coated paper is being used).
Note:
The piled plate kit (P/N: SE95-4330) is a supply part. It should be purchased separately.
A. Procedure
[5]
2. Remove the spring [2].
[4]
3. Install the piled plate holder [4] on the paper

feed roller [3] with 2 screws [5].
[6]
Note:
The piled plate kit is accompanied with the 5
[3]
piled plates [6]. However, the number of the

piled plates [6] should be adjusted while
checking no feed condition. (When the piled
plates are too heavy, this may result in double
[1]
[7]
[2]
feeding.)
The piled plates [6] can be removed by loosening the 2 screws [7].
4. Replace the spring [2].
5. Close the top cover.
6. Perform the continuous copy to check the paper
feed.
7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 if the no feed jam continues
to occur at the paper feed.
8050fs1068
1-183
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.24 LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment

Perform the LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment when the paper feed jam occurs frequently or
the up/down wire is replaced.
A. Procedure
3. Loosen 4 screws [3] at the front and rear side.
4. Position the mark [5] to make the up/down plate
to be horizontal with 2 adjusting screws [4] at
the front and rear side.
[5]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[5]
8050fs1069
1-184
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
9.25 LCT sheet feed pressure

adjustment
Perform the LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment
when a no feed jam or a double feed jam occurs at
the paper feed.
The sheet feed pressure is affected by the paper
type and the operating environment (the no feed
jam is likely in the low temperature environment and
the double feed is likely in the high temperature
environment).
A. Procedure
1. Remove LCT from the main body.
2. Check the adjusting spring mechanism [2] from
the top left side of the LCT (paper exit side) [1].
3. Change the spring hook position [2] depending
on the symptom.
The load of the spring changes approximately
10% for a change in its position.
Note:
Excess adjustment may reverse the symptom.
For example, a no feed jam becomes a double
feed jam.
[2]
Weak: Double feed jam is corrected.
[1]
Strong: No feed jam is corrected.
8050fs1070
1-185
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.26 LCT paper feed height

(upper limit) adjustment
Perform the LCT paper feed height (upper limit)
adjustment when the no feed jam occurs, the edge
of the fed paper is folded, or you want to feed curled
paper. The adjustment is performed by changing
the vertical position of the upper limit sensor
(PS109).
A. Procedure
[6]
3. Measure the height of the entrance guide upper

surface [3] and up/down plate upper surface [4]
with a scale to check whether it is within the
standard value.
[5]
[3]
Standard value: 2 to 5 mm
[1]
[4]
Perform the following adjustment if it is not within

the standard value or the edge of the fed paper is
folded even if it is within the standard value.
Note:
[2]
This adjustment affects the pick-up release

amount.
When the adjustment is complete, perform
"9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjustment".
4. Remove the sprint [6] from the paper feed unit
[5].
5. Remove 4 screws [7].
6. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover /B [8]
toward right.
[8]
[7]
8050fs1071
1-186
8. Move the sensor mounting bracket [2] vertically
[1]
[2]
I ADJUSTMENT
7. Loosen a screw [1].
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
to make the height of the entrance guide upper

surface and the up/down plate upper surface to
be within the standard value.
If it is not within the standard value and the
height of the up/down plate has to be raised:
When paper with a convex curl is fed:
Lower the position of the sensor mounting
bracket
If it is not within the standard value and the
height of the up/down plate has to be lowered:
When the edge of the fed paper is folded:
8050fs1072
When paper with a concave curl is fed:

Raise the position of the sensor mounting
bracket
9. When the adjustment is complete, tighten a
screw [1].
1-187
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.27 LCT pick-up release amount

adjustment
Perform the LCT pick-up release amount adjustment when a no feed jam occurs frequently. The
adjustment is performed by changing the horizontal
position of the paper feed solenoid (SD100).
A. Procedure
[4]
3. Remove the sprint [4] from the paper feed unit

[3].
[3]
4. Remove 4 screws [5].

5. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover /B [6]
toward right.
[1]
[2]
[6]
[5]
8050fs1073
1-188
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
solenoid) [1] and measure the distance between

the paper feed roller [2] and the upper surface of
[2]
[1]
the up/down plate [3] to check whether it is

Standard value: 0.5 to 2.5 mm
Perform the following adjustment if it is not
7. Loosen a screw [4].
[3]
[4]
Note:
Before starting the operation, note the original position of the solenoid.
8. Move the paper feed solenoid (SD100) [1] horizontally to make the distance between the
paper feed roller and the upper surface of the
up/down plate to be within the standard value.
9. Tighten the screw [4] for the paper feed solenoid.
8050fs1074
1-189
I ADJUSTMENT
6. Pull the moving section of SD100 (paper feed
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Blank page
1-190
II
SERVICE TOOL
Description of the ISW
1.1
1.1.1
Setup
Board used for the ISW
1. Description of the ISW

ISWTrns supports the following boards for rewriting
ISW (In-system Writer) is an operation to rewrite the
control program stored in the flash ROM on a vari-
Printer controller board (PRCB)
ety of control boards in the digital copier without
Operation board/1 (OB1)
removing the boards from the main body of the
copier. ISW allows you to update the version of the
control program without replacing the board or to
See IP Service Manual for the printer controller.
install the latest program when replacing the board.
ROM replacement is needed for boards other than
[ISWTrns (PC software)] is provided to execute
the above.
ISW, which rewrite the program by connecting a PC

to the digital copier. The software rewrites the con-
1.1.2
Data flow
trol program stored in the flash ROM in the copier

The following shows the ISW data flow.
main body directly.

This chapter only describes the set up procedure on
PC
OACB
the main body for executing ISW. See the "ISW (In-
OB1
PRCB
System Writer) Service Manual" for information on
DFCB
FNSCB
operating the ISWTrns.

Note:
Note:
When rewrite control program for new type,
The control program on other boards cannot
be sure to use the ISWTrns Ver. 3.51 or the
be written until that for the overall control
above.
board (OACB) is written.
When upgrading ISWTrns, be sure to uninstall

the current ISWTrns before installing the new
1.1.3
ISW transfer type
version. Installing it by overwriting may result

in the installation of the USB driver unavail-
The copier supports three ISW transfer modes as
able.
follows.
It is required to install the USB driver for

ISWTrns to perform ISW via USB on this
A. Power ON mode
machine. See the installation procedure for
The power ON mode is used if no program is
the "2. USB ISW".
installed on the overall control board (OACB) or it is
Before performing ISW via USB, be sure to
faulty.
turn on the USB radio button in [Setting (S)] -
If no program is installed on OACB, the OACB pro-
[Set Communication (C)] in ISWTrns and
gram becomes possible to be written at power ON.
press the OK button.
No display appears on the operation panel and the
From "machine" list box of ISWTrns, be sure
timer LED flashes even if the operation board con-
to select "8050" for old type and "bizhub
trol program is installed because the OACB controls
C500" for new type.
the power for the operation board.
2-1
II SERVICE TOOL
the control program in 8050.
B. HELP + CHECK mode

The HELP + CHECK mode is started when the sub
power switch (SW2) is pressed while pressing
"HELP" and "CHECK button." This mode is
designed specifically for ISW to be started when the
overall control program is installed but the operation
board control program is not installed because the
25 mode cannot be started in such case.
II SERVICE TOOL
C. 25 mode
The 25 mode is available only if both the overall
control program and the operation board control
program are installed.
2-2

1.1.4
Instances of ISW transfer
A. When writing a new program (because

replacing a board or failed to rewrite the
program)
Condition
Overall control
board
Flashing timer LED

No display on the
operation panel
Power ON mode
Overall control program is not installed

or faulty
Operation board /1
Error code display
HELP + CHECK
mode
The overall control program is installed

but the operation board program is not
installed or faulty
Others
Error code display
25 mode
Both the overall control program and

the operation board program is
installed
B. When updating the version of the program

Normal startup display ISW transfer method
Overall control
board
Normal
25 mode
Operation board /1
Normal
25 mode
Others
Normal
25 mode
2-3
Condition
All program has been installed
II SERVICE TOOL
Normal startup display ISW transfer method

1.1.5
Setup procedure
Note:
Before performing ISW via USB, be sure to
A. Connecting a PC
turn on the USB radio button in [Setting (S)] -
a.
[Set Communication (C)] in ISWTrns and
Procedure
press the OK button.
1. Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side

cover/2 [2].
B. Power on mode
a.
[1]
Procedure
II SERVICE TOOL
1. Turn ON the sub power switch (SW2).

2. Check the timer LED is flushing.
The control program becomes possible to be
written in this state.
3. Execute the operation according to the procedures specified in the "ISW (In-System Writer)
Service Manual."
Note:
Do not turn OFF the copier while writing the
ISW data is being rewritten.
4. The operation screen appears if it is completed
[2]
[1]
successfully.
8050fs2012
If it is terminated abnormally, see "E. The relationship between ISW resulting operation and
2. Connect either of IEEE1284 port [1] or USB
the operational LEDs."
(Type B) port [2] to the PC via a cable.
C. HELP + CHECK mode

a.
Procedure
1. Turn ON the copie while pressing "HELP" and

"CHECK button."
2. "ISW write mode select menu screen"
Press 1 (PC) with the numeric keys.
ISW WRITE MODE SELECT MENU
1.PC
[1]
[2]
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
8050fs2040
2-4
9.EXIT

3. "ISW device select menu screen"
6. "ISW executing screen"
Select 3 (OPERATION CONTROL) with the
Execute the operation according to the proce-
numeric keys.
dures specified in the "ISW (In-System Writer)
Press 9 (EXIT) to exit from the menu or press 0
Service Manual."
(PREVIOUS) to return to the previous screen.
"Result screen" appears once ISW is com-
ISW DEVICE SELECT MENU
plete.
[MODE:PC]
GRAPHIC CONTROL
PRINTER CONTROL
OPERATION CONTROL
ADF
VIF
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
EXECUTING
0. PREVIOUS
II SERVICE TOOL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
9. EXIT
Note:
Rewrite programs other than 3 (OPERATION
CONTROL) in the 25 mode because this
7. "Result screen"
mode does not support them.
The operation is completed successfully

"NORMAL END" appears.
4. "Operation control - item select menu screen"

Select an item from 1 - 5 to rewrite it individually or select 6 (ALL) to rewrite all items at a
*** NORMAL END ***
time.
Press 9 (EXIT) to exit from the menu or press 0
(PREVIOUS) to return to the previous screen.
OPERATION CONTROL - ITEM SELECT MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
[MODE:PC]
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
01
02
03
04
05
0. CONTINUE
9. EXIT
The operation is terminated abnormally

"ABNORMAL END" appears.
Check the error code on the screen if the
6. ALL
rewriting is terminated abnormally.
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
0. PREVIOUS
9. EXIT
*** ABNORMAL END ***

INPUT DEVICE ERROR
(ERROR CODE : XX)
5. "ISW start screen"

Select 1 (YES) to start ISW.
Select 2 (NO) to cancel.
OPERATION CONTROL - 01
[MODE:PC]
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
ISW START OK?
0. CONTINUE
9. EXIT
8. Select 0 (CONTINUE) to continue ISW or

select 9 (EXIT) to exit.
"PLEASE TURN OFF A POWER SUPPLY"
appears when pressing 9, then turn OFF the
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
1. YES
2. NO
2-5

b.
Error code
Error code
Causes
No. of resulting
operation
01
Error in the instruction against the ISW processing unit
(1)
1F
Program error
(1)
41
Input data format error (at ISW for the operation board program)
(2)
42
Model name error in input data (at ISW for the operation board program)
(2)
43
Board name error in input data (at ISW for the operation board program)
(2)
Input device error such as the input time out (at ISW for the operation
(3)
81
II SERVICE TOOL
board program)
C1
Flash ROM erasing failure (at ISW for the overall control program)
(5)
C2
Flash ROM writing failure (at ISW for the overall control program)
(5)
C3
ROM check sum error (at ISW for the overall control program)
(8)
C4
Output device error such as the input time out
(6)
E1
Erase error
(9)
E2
Write error
(9)
E3
Communication error
(4)
E9
I/F communication parameter error between the overall control board
(4)
and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
EA
I/F command sequence error between the overall control board and the
(4)
operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)

EB
I/F communication timeout error between the overall control board and
(4)
the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
F0
Flash ROM error (at ISW for the operation board program)
(7)
F1
Flash ROM verify error (at ISW for the operation board program)
(7)
F2
Flash ROM write error (at ISW for the operation board program)
(7)
F3
Flash ROM erase error (at ISW for the operation board program)
(7)
F8
I/F receive checksum error between the overall control board and the
(7)

F9
I/F receive header code error between the overall control board and the
(7)

FA
I/F receive parity error between the overall control board and the opera-
(7)
tion board (at ISW for the operation board program)

FB
I/F receive framing error between the overall control board and the oper-
(7)
ation board (at ISW for the operation board program)

FC
I/F receive overflow error between the overall control board and the
(4)
Resulting operations
(1) The program is not operating normally. Turn
OFF and ON the sub power switch (SW2) and
(4) Check I/F between the overall control board

and the operation board.
(5) The flash ROM on the overall control board is faulty.
then start ISW again.

(2) Check the ISW transfer data file.
Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs, the
(3) Check the connection of the communication
flash ROM on the overall control board may be faulty

or it may have reached its life. Replace the overall
cable from the input device (PC).
control board.
2-6

(6) An error is detected from the board on which
D. 25 mode
you want to rewrite the program. Check the

a.
board on which you want to execute ISW.

(7) The flash ROM on the operation board/1 is
faulty.
Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs,
the flash ROM on the operation board/1 may be
Procedure

Press the [11 ISW] key.
faulty or it may have reached its life. Replace

(8) The checksum calculated after the program is
written does not become equal to the ROM
checksum data. Execute ISW again. If the
same error occurs, the ISW transfer data file
Select a program for which ISW is executed.

4. Pressing the [Start] key, cause the machine to
be data waiting condition.
Note:
may not be downloaded properly.

(9) It cannot write/erase data to/from area on which
See "C. HELP + CHECK mode" since select-
ISW is executed.
ing "Operation panel" switches to the HELP
The flash ROM may be faulty or have reached
+ CHECK mode.
its life. Replace the object board.

The checksum calculated after the program is
written does not become equal to the ROM
checksum data. Execute ISW again. If the
same error occurs, the ISW transfer data file
may not be downloaded properly.
5. Execute the operation according to the procedures specified in the "ISW (In-System Writer)
Service Manual."
Note:
Do not turn OFF the copier while rewriting
the ISW data is being written.
Note:
If an error occurs during rewriting the program on the overall control board, the operation panel cannot be displayed even if the sub
power switch is ON because the program controlling the whole components has been lost.
Execute ISW in the power ON mode if such is
the case.
If an error occurs during rewriting the program on the operation board/1, it cannot be
started in the 25 mode because the error code
is displayed. Execute ISW in the HELP +
CHECK mode if such is the case.
2-7
II SERVICE TOOL
3. "ISW mode menu screen"
the operation board/1.
E. The relationship between ISW operation and

the operational LEDs
The following shows the display of the operation
panel in the power ON mode with ISW executed.
II SERVICE TOOL
No.
Operation
Timer LED
Power save LED
CPU initialization
OFF
OFF
During memory check
OFF
OFF
Memory check error (waiting data from PC)
Blink
OFF
ISW processing (receiving data)
OFF
Blink
ISW processing (writing to flash ROM)
OFF
Blink
Transfer data error
Blink
Blink
Flash ROM write error
Blink
Steady lit
Memory check successful and reboot
OFF
OFF
2-8
USB ISW
2. USB ISW
2.1
What is the USB ISW?
The ISW RNs tool for transfer can be installed in the PC by using the setup disk. However, the USB driver
(KCAUSB.SYS) is required to be installed by the plug-and-play of the Windows after connecting the PC and
the copier with the USB cable.
The installation of the USB driver is required only when the PC is connected to the copier for the first time.
A. USB driver installation procedure (Windows 2000/XP)

When the PC and the copier are connected with the USB cable, the USB driver is automatically installed by
the plug-and-play.
However, this may cause the USB driver (USBPRINT.SYS) of the Windows to be installed. Accordingly, the
USB driver should be set by following the procedure given below:
1. Select "Install from a list or specific location [Advanced]" in the display shown below, and then click
[Next].
2. Select "Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that I can choose a specific driver" in the
"Install Hardware Device Drivers" screen, and then click [Next].
2-9
II SERVICE TOOL
(No installation is required on and after the second connection.)
USB ISW
3. Select the USB driver in the driver selection screen, and then click [Next] for installation.
II SERVICE TOOL
USB driver: Konica Minolta 8050 USB Driver (ISW)
4. When the "Completing the Upgrade Device Driver Wizard" screen is displayed, click [Finish] to finish the
installation.
5. In the "Device Manager" screen, check to see if the installation of the USB driver is carried out correctly.
USB driver: Konica Minolta 8050 USB Driver (ISW)
2-10
INTERNET ISW
3. INTERNET ISW
3.1
What is the Internet ISW?
The Internet ISW is the system to perform ISW, by indicating ISW using the Internet mail (E-mail) or
browser to let copier automatically acquire the subject program from program server and rewrite its own
program.
With this Internet ISW, you can update copier's programs just by transmitting E-mail with simple keyword
site, without carrying the actual programs with you.
3.2
Operating environment
To use the Internet ISW function, the following conditions must be satisfied.
A. The copier is connected to a built in network where programs can be downloaded from the
Internet using ftp or http protocol. *1
B. The Internet ISW does not function in copier under the following conditions.
(1) The main power switch (SW1) is OFF.
(2) The sub power switch (SW2) is OFF.
(3) The copier is shut OFF by the auto shut off function.
*1
Programs can be downloaded using Firewall.

Note:
The Internet ISW does not function even if the copier receives the Internet ISW designating mail,
as long as it is in any of the above conditions. The Internet ISW starts when the above conditions are released.
However, the mails are able to have period of validity.
The Internet ISW continues to function in the condition of a paper jam or SC occurs, or in the
low power mode.
3.3
Main features
With the Internet ISW, the following functions are available.

A. Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system *2
By sending simple keywords to a copier by E-Mail, the programs in the copier are rewritten automatically.
The boards of which programs can be rewritten with the Internet ISW are as follows. *3
(1) Overall control board (I)
(2) Printer control board (C)
(3) Operation board /1 (O)
(4) RADF control board (F)
(5) FNS control board (N)
*2
To use the function, the E-Mail remote notification system must be setup separately.
*3
The available boards are different depending on the copier models.

B. Internet ISW using Web utility
By accessing copier main body's homepage via PC web browser, programs in the copier are rewritten
automatically. To use the function, a Web terminal that is networked to the copier is necessary. *4
*4
In case it is connected to a LAN, it can only be used within the LAN.

2-11
II SERVICE TOOL
described, without visiting customer's office. With the Web function, you can perform the ISW on customer
INTERNET ISW
3.4
Initial setting
To use the Internet ISW, the related settings such as network parameter, program server address, firewall
address must be performed in the copier main body beforehand.
Also, to use the [3.5 Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system], the related settings such as
account registration must be set on the mail server separately.
For the details, please refer to "4. Mail remote notification system".
II SERVICE TOOL
3.4.1
Setting on Control panel
First, set the copier's IP address on the control panel, to network the copier. If it has already been set, go
to "3.4.2 Setting on Web browser".
a.
Procedure
1. Select "Key operator mode" on the control panel.
2. Select "[1] System initial setting".
3. Select "[3] IP address setting".
4. Enter [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address]. *5
5. Reboot the copier.
*5
Copier's IP address, etc. are usually assigned by the system administrator.

For the details, please contact the customer's system administrator.
3.4.2
Setting on Web browser
Next, set the program server, etc. from the Web browser. To use the Web browser, prepare a networked
PC *6.
*6
Prepare a PC by borrowing customer's PC or carrying laptop PC, for example.

(Considerations)
In any setting item, space cannot be set.
If there is a mistake in input process on the Web browser, be sure to correct it according to error message displayed. If the mistake is left without correction, program download error may occur.
Web's layout may change without prior notice.
2-12

a.
INTERNET ISW
Procedure
1. Start the Web browser. *7
2. Specify the copier's IP address that you have entered at "3.4.1 Setting on Control panel".
If you access the copier's http address, the [Main page] as the top figure on next page appears.
If proxy is set on the web browser, it may not be able to access the copier's http address (web page).
For the details, please contact the customer's system administrator. As Web browser, Internet
Explorer or Netscape is recommended.
Do not perform setting from two or more browsers concurrently.
II SERVICE TOOL
*7
Copyright 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Copier Web Utility Main Page

3. On the [Main page], click the [Environment setup], to display [Login to Environment setup] page.
Login window to Environment setting
2-13
INTERNET ISW
4. On [Login to Environment setup] page, enter the key operator password (the same password as key
operator mode password) and click Apply. The environment setup list appears. Then click [Extension
II SERVICE TOOL
for maintenance].
Environment setup screen

5. On [Login to Extension for maintenance] page, enter the password (the same password as mode
change menu password) and click Apply. The environment setting list appears. Then click [Internet
ISW].
Login window to Extension for maintenance
Extension for maintenance screen
2-14
INTERNET ISW
II SERVICE TOOL
6. Click [Initial Setting].
Internet ISW main screen

7. Set proxy server.
When you don't use proxy server (firewall), go to Step 9.
2-15
INTERNET ISW
Enableproxy
Select [no] if you do not use proxy

Select [Use ftp proxy] if you use ftp proxy
Select [Use http proxy] if you use http proxy
Proxy server Type *8
If you selected [Use ftp proxy] for [Use of proxy], select the type of proxy
from the following.
Type1 [USER USER@HOST]
Type2 [OPEN HOSTNAME]
II SERVICE TOOL
Type3 [FW USERNAMEFW PASSWORDSITE HOSTNAME]

Type4 [FW USERNAMEFW PASSWORDUSER USER@HOST]
Proxy server IP Address
If you use proxy server, enter the IP address of the proxy server.
Port Number
If you use proxy server, set the port No. that is used by the proxy server.
User name on the proxy
If you selected Type1 or Type2 for [Type of proxy server], set an
server
Password for the proxy
server
*8
account name for the proxy server.

If you selected Type1 or Type2 for [Type of proxy server], set a password for the proxy server.
Types 2, 3 and 4 are not guaranteed.

When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen.
If all are fine, click [Next]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message in red.
8. Set the program server. (Proxy server is used)
2-16
Program server address
INTERNET ISW
Enter the address of the server where programs to download are

stored. Select the protocol you use from the drop down list at the left
and enter the following address in the test box at the right.
In case of ftp, it is the relative path from the home directory.
Example: ftp://210.226.5.5/EUR/8050/
User name on the program
Enter the account name of the program server.
server
Enter the program server password.
server
Receiving time out
Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes)

If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated. Without performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.
If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message in red.
9. Set the program server. (Proxy is not used.)
Protocol
Select a protocol to receive programs.
Program server IP Address
Enter the IP address of the server where programs to download are
Target directory
For http, enter path that follows the host domain. For ftp, enter the rela-
stored.
tive path from the home directory.
Example: EUR/8050/
User name on the program
Enter the account name of the program server.
server
Password for the Program
Enter the program server password.
server
Receiving time out
Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes)

If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated. Without performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.
2-17
II SERVICE TOOL
Password for the program
INTERNET ISW
If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message in red.
10. Perform the download test.
This test downloads "test.dat" from the program server set in the initial setting, to ensure all items
have been set appropriately. If the download test fails, check the setting items again according to the
II SERVICE TOOL
error message.
When the test finished successfully, the communication speed and estimated download time are displayed
as shown below. Draw upon the data to decide [Reception timeout].
2-18
INTERNET ISW
If the download test fails, response error code sent from the server is displayed as follows. There may be
II SERVICE TOOL
input errors. Check the initial setting again.
2-19
INTERNET ISW
3.5
3.5.1
Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system

Function
Customer engineer sends an E-mail with simple keyword description. Then, the copier that received the
mail downloads specified program from the program server and rewrites its program.
This function is executed by a different command (keyword) from the list print acquisition function of the [EMail remote notification system].
II SERVICE TOOL
A. The boards of which programs can be rewritten with the Internet ISW are as follows.
(1) Overall control board: I0
(2) Printer control board: C0
(3) Operation board /1: O0, O1, O2, O3, O4, O5
(4) RADF control board: F0
(5) FNS control board: N0
B. You can acquire version information of programs to be rewritten.
C. You can find out how to use [Internet ISW] by mail.
To use the above functions, it is necessary to send the copier E-mail with the specified simple keyword
(command) description. The following are the commands and the options.
Command
Option
Description
ISW
Subject board name
Specifies name of a board to ISW. (must be entered)

The specifiable boards are as follows.
[I0, C0, O0, O1, O2, O3, O4, O5, F0, N0]
The available boards are different depending on models. File name can be specified with "=" as [Subject
board name=File name].
Timeout
Specifies period of validity of mail.

(From 5 to 1,440 minutes. Unit is minute. If none is
specified, timeout takes place at 90 minutes.)
When the time from mail transmission by CE to mail
reception at copier exceeds the specified period, ISW is
not performed due to expiration.
ISWHELP
Returns a help mail with the above command use

descriptions.
When no file name is specified, the following files are acquired from the program server address set
beforehand.
I0
bootI1.bin
C0
bootC1.bin
O0
bootO0.bin
O1
bootO1.bin
O2
bootO2.bin
O3
bootO3.bin
O4
bootO4.bin
O5
bootO5.bin
2-20
F0
bootF1.bin
N0
bootN1.bin

3.5.2
INTERNET ISW
Transmitting E-Mail
The following is an example of transmitting an E-mail with the aforementioned command to a copier.
You can use either upper and lower case characters when typing a command (option) in E-mail. *9
When transmitting an E-mail to a copier, take care of the following.
The ISW-designated mail has the period of validity. Therefore, set the date of mailer and time zone of
the copier *10 accurately.
One mail can be described with only one ISW command. If two or more commands are described, the
Any mail software can be used. For example, mobile device mail, browser mail and so on.
With the mail software in use, transmit mails in text mode.
Place at least one space or TAB *11 between command and option, and option and option described
(Commands in mails in HTML mode cannot be handled correctly.)

in mails.
Type every command in mails only with alphanumeric one-byte characters (ASCII characters). If other
characters *12 are typed, an error mail with [Command not found] is returned.
Type every command in mails from the line head. Line head starting with a space or TAB is ignored.
Do not attach files or others to the mails transmitted to copiers.

Depending on the size of files, such mails may be handled as illegal mails and copier may refuse to
receive.
Do not type signatures in the mails transmitted to copiers. If auto signature addition is set on the mail
software, turn off the setting. Signatures may be handled as commands and error mails may be
returned from the copier.
*9
Case sensitivity is on for the file name. Take care when typing.
*10
Set in the E-mail transmission setting for [E-mail transmission setting].
*11
Linefeed is not available.
*12
Two-byte characters also cause errors. Take care not to use them.
(1) Transmitting ISW command

The transmission mail must have the following descriptions.
In Subject, type a CE password that has been entered in the mail reception setting.
For the details, please refer to the "4. E-Mail remote notification system".
In To, type mail address of a copier.
In Body, type a command.
2-21
II SERVICE TOOL
second and later ones are ignored.
INTERNET ISW
An example of I0 ISW:
Copier's mail address
II SERVICE TOOL
Password for authentication
Command
An example of return mail (ISW start) *13

When the copier allows the ISW, it moves into the ISW mode, displaying [Remote ISW executing] on the
operation panel. The copier cannot be used while it is in the ISW mode. *14 Then, a mail like the following
is returned from the copier.
*13
The return mail is in English regardless of the language selected for the copier's main body operation
panel display.
*14
During the ISW, sub power switch (SW2) of the copier does not function. The copier cannot be shutdown.
2-22
INTERNET ISW
An example of return mail (ISW complete)

When ISW completes and copier reboots automatically, a mail like the following is returned from the
II SERVICE TOOL
copier. You can confirm that the ROM version is upgraded.
However, if transmission of the above two kinds of return mails fails, the mails are not retransmitted.
When specifying a file name
When specifying a file name for ISW command, type the name with "=" following the subject board name.
In this case, "65FAI012UGH0.bin" must exist in the program server address that has been set in the Internet ISW setting.
Transmission mail
ISW I0 = 65FAI012UGH0.bin 30
When transmission mail exceeds the period of validity
On ISW command, period of validity (timeout) can be changed set for every mail. (Default: 90 minutes) If
period from the mail transmission to mail reception at copier (duration) is longer than the timeout period,
ISW is not performed by that mail.
2-23
INTERNET ISW
II SERVICE TOOL
Transmission mail
5 minutes is set for timeout
Return mail
Timeout took place as 6 minutes had passed.
2-24
INTERNET ISW
(2) Transmitting ISWHELP command

Manual that shows how to use command is returned by mail.
It is useful if you forget how to use command and options.
Transmission mail
ISWHelp
II SERVICE TOOL
Return mail
2-25
INTERNET ISW
3.6
3.6.1
Internet ISW using Web utility

Function
Using the copier's web utility, just by clicking on the browser *15, customer engineer can let the copier
automatically download programs from the program server and rewrite its own programs.
The boards of which programs can be rewritten are the same as those of [Internet ISW using E-mail
remote notification system].
II SERVICE TOOL
*15
3.6.2
Usually, it is not possible to access company-inside copier from outside exceeding firewall.
How to use
A. Going to Internet ISW page

The same as instructed in "3.4 Initial Setting", go to the [Internet ISW] page on the Web browser.
Internet ISW main screen

Next to each board name, the program version is displayed.
2-26
INTERNET ISW
B. Performing ISW
From the [ISW] items, select a board to ISW and check the box. When specifying a name of file to download, type the name in the text box of [File name]. When no file name is specified, the following files are
acquired from the program server address set beforehand.
bootI1.bin
C0
bootC1.bin
O0
bootO0.bin
O1
bootO1.bin
O2
bootO2.bin
O3
bootO3.bin
O4
bootO4.bin
O5
bootO5.bin
F0
bootF1.bin
N0
bootN1.bin
When the above input completes, click [ISW].

C. Starting ISW
When ISW starts, the following screen appears. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item
according to the message in red.
ISW execution screen

When ISW completes successfully, the copier automatically reboots.
If you click [Check status], you can check the current ISW status.
If you click [Cancel], you can stop the ISW only while program is being downloaded
2-27
II SERVICE TOOL
I0
INTERNET ISW
II SERVICE TOOL
D. Checking ISW status
ISW status check screen

This screen shows the current performance or error. The display items are as follows.
ISW is downloading
ISW is writing
Finished *16
ISW was cancelled due to transferring problem
ISW was cancelled due to transferring overtime
ISW was cancelled due to writing problem to flash memory
*16
Copier reboots after ISW completes normally. Do not click [Refresh] on the browser.
E. Ending ISW
When ISW completes and copier reboots, ensure that the program version is upgraded on the [Internet
ISW main screen].
2-28
3.7
3.7.1
INTERNET ISW
Precautions for use

Prior announcement to administrator
When performing the Internet ISW, be sure to contact the copier's administrator or the like and get his/her
agreement beforehand.
Perform ISW in condition that the copier is not being used.
3.7.2
If power failure occurs during data rewriting
While ISW rewriting is in progress *17, the operation panel and sub power switch (SW2) are locked. However, if the main power goes down due to power failure or other, the copier becomes unable to start up. *18
This is only the problem on rewriting the overall control board and the operation board /1. Even if errors
occur on rewriting other boards, the boards can be overwritten again with the Internet ISW.
If the copier becomes unable to start for the above reason, go to the copier's site and rewrite the program
using the ISWTrns.
<How to recover> Overall control board: Turn ON the sub power switch (SW2) and then perform ISW.
Operation board /1: Turn ON the sub power switch (SW2) while pressing HELP and
CHECK button and then perform ISW.
For the details, please refer to "1. ISW"
*17
Rewriting takes maximum 10 minute.
*18
No problem is cased by power failure during program downloading process.
3.7.3
ISW of multiple programs
It is not possible with the Internet ISW to ISW several programs concurrently. Always perform ISW one by
one. If several programs must be rewritten at the same time, perform ISW from board of higher priority. *19
Priority 1
RADF control board (F), FNS control board (N)
Priority 2
Printer control board (C), Operation board /1 (O)
Priority 3
Overall control board (I)
When rewriting several programs, SC may occur during rewriting intervals between programs.
However, such SC will clear when all the subject programs are rewritten.
*19
In case of the Internet ISW using the E-mail remote notification system, the sequence of transmitted
ISW designating mails and mails received by copier may change. Transmit multiple mails while
ensuring reception of completion mail or putting enough intervals.
3.7.4
If ISW fails in low power mode
If ISW fails due to errors in program download, data check, and so on, the copier recovers into normal
mode. Only in low power mode, the copier reboots when ISW fails.
2-29
II SERVICE TOOL
If the copier is being used (a job is being processed), the Internet ISW is not performed.
INTERNET ISW
3.8
3.8.1
Proxy server authentication in Internet ISW

What is a proxy server?
It is a server that receives request (HTTP or FTP etc.) from a client inside the firewall, and represents the
client. With this server, access to outside the firewall is enabled.
II SERVICE TOOL
3.8.2
Authentication of proxy server
Following are the lists of commands of each authentication type:

All the 4 types below are supported in the Internet ISW.
3.8.3
Type and command list for authentication on proxy server
The following shows the brief description of each authentication type and the list of commands being used.
A. Type 1: USER user@host
This type does not require an authentication to the proxy sever when accessing outside via proxy.
In case it is possible to access outside via proxy server without entering user name and password of the
proxy server, this type may be used.
Command
Command
Parameter
Reply Code
USER
user@host
331
Description
Sends user name of the program server and program
server's address
PASS
password
230
Sends password for the above user name
B. Type 2: OPEN host

It is almost the same as Type 1. The only difference is a command at the authentication.
Apply this type when all the settings are set properly but communication fails with Type 1.
Command
Command
Parameter
Reply Code
Description
OPEN
host
ftp expanded
Sends program server's address
function:
Defined by
each server
USER
user
331
Sends user name of the program sever
PASS
password
230
2-30
INTERNET ISW
C. Type 3: FW user FW password SITE host

This type requires an authentication to the proxy server itself when accessing outside.
It is necessary to enter information of the server that you wish to access, user name and password of the
proxy sever (firmware).
In case the user name and password of the proxy server are required when accessing outside via proxy
sever, this type may be used.
Command
Parameter
Reply Code
Description
USER
FW user
331
Sends user name of the proxy server
PASS
FW password
230
SITE
host
ftp expanded
Sends program server's address
function:
Defined by
each server
USER
user
331
Sends user name of the program sever
PASS
password
230
D. FW user name FW password USER user@host

It is almost the same as Type 3. The only difference is a command at the authentication.
Apply this type when all the settings are set properly but communication fails with Type 3.
Command
Command
Parameter
Reply Code
Description
USER
FW user
331
Sends user name of the proxy server
PASS
FW password
230
USER
user@host
331
Sends user name of the program server and program

server's address
PASS
3.8.4
password
230
Remarks
For fwtk2.1 (for unix) and Black Jumbo Dog (for Windows), authentication Type 1 is used.
Type 1 is used in many proxy servers.

If you are not sure about the authentication type of the proxy server, KC recommends that you use
Type 1 in the meantime.
2-31
II SERVICE TOOL
Command
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
4. MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM

4.1
What is the Mail remote notification system?
Mail remote notification system allows to acquire machine data, that have been available as "List Output
Mode" in 36 mode from copier, through internet mail (E-mail). This function is achieved without visiting
customer site and printing on paper if the simple keyword is e-mailed.
II SERVICE TOOL
4.2
Operation environment
Following conditions should be satisfied in order to use mail remote notification system. The function
works during JAM, SC or Low power mode, but does not work during shut-off. However, the sent mail does
not disappear and the copier process the mail after next starting up. During low power mode, the machine
operation is as usual.
A. The mail server *1 that allows copier to receive mail in POP3 or IMAP protocol.
(It is preferred that mail server can receive external mail and service constantly.)
B. The mail server *2 that allows copier to transmit mail in SMTP protocol.
(It is preferred that mail server can send external mail and service constantly.).
C. Mail remote notification system disabling conditions on copier are as follows.
(1) Main power switch is OFF.
(2) Sub power switch is OFF.
*1
qpopper, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. Assign one account per one copier. It can be the same
machine to the SMTP server. "Mail remote notification system" corresponds to "POP before SMTP".
*2
Sendmail 8.9, qmail, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. It can be the same machine to the receiving
server.
4.3
Initial setting
In order to use Mail remote notification system, settings such as network parameter on copier and account
registration on mail server are necessary.
A. Setting on operation panel
In order to connect the copier main body to network, IP address of the copier should be set on operation panel. If it is already set, please go to "B. Setting on Web.
a.
Procedure
1. Select [Key operator mode] on operation panel.
2. Select [1. System initial setting].
3. Select [3. IP address setting].
4. Input [IP address], [Subnetmask] and [Gateway address]*1.
5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier.
*1
System administrator usually assigns IP address and network related setting to copier. Please ask
system administrator for details.
2-32
B. Setting on Web
Next, input setting for mail server from Web browser. Please use PC*2 connected to the network in
order to use Web browser.
*2
Prepare PC; borrow the customer's one or bring notebook computer.

Note:
No blank space should be entered for any column. Following characters cannot be used for the
()<> ;:"[]
When the error message is displayed on the web browser, correct the input error following to
the message. If the error is not corrected, mail sending or receiving may fail.
Web design is subject to change without notice.
(1) How to set
a.
Procedure
1. Start up Web browser *1.
2. Type IP address of the copier you input to the [A. Setting on operation panel].
When accessing Web, the [main page] (see upper figure in next page) is displayed.
*1
If proxy is set on Web browser, it may not possible to access web utilities of copier. Please ask system administrator for details. KC recommends to use Internet explorer or Netscape as the Web
browser. Do not perform setting from the two or more browsers concurrently.
Copyright 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Copier Web utilities main page

3. In [Main] page, click [Environment Setup] button and display [Environment setup log in] page.
2-33
II SERVICE TOOL
E-mail address.
II SERVICE TOOL
Environment setup log in page

4. Input key operator password in [Environment setup log in] page, then click [Apply].
[Environment set up] page is displayed. Then click [E-Mail transmission setting].
Even key operator password set "0000" in 25-mode setting, input "0000".
Environment setup page

5. Set the transmission setting.
In order to use Mail remote notification system, registration of E-mail address of manager (machine
administrator), and sending (SMTP) server input is mandatory.
Manager Address *1
To specify E-mail address of machine manager.

The e-mail address to notify error from SMTP.
DNS Server IP Address

Time difference *1
Input as needed. If not needed, leave it blank.

The send time of mail is calculated referring this value.
Input the time difference from UTC within the range -1200 (12h00min) to +1200 (+12h00min).
If setting is not made, it is +0000 (the same as UTC).
For example, the time difference in New York is -5 hours, - 500 is
input.
2-34
Sending mail (SMTP) sever *1
The IP address of SMTP sever.
Condition Informing Address *1
It is for mail transmission system. *2

You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used.
E-Mail Transmission *1
It is for mail transmission system. *2

You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used.
*1
The same setting can be set on LCD of the copier. But do not set concurrently from web browser and
*2
Please see the "INSTRUCTION MANUAL" of copier if use the mail transmission system.
II SERVICE TOOL
Web.
E-Mail transmission setting page

6. Click [Apply] button to finish input.
2-35
(2) Test mail sending

Click [Sending test] button and then a test mail is sent to SMTP server. Test mail is sent to [Manager
address] set on Step5. Click [Sending test] to display result of the test mail. If it is failed, please re-confirm the setting following to error message.
a.
Procedure
1. Set the reception setting.
In the [Extension for maintenance] column at the bottom of the page, input the password to change
II SERVICE TOOL
the mode then click the initial setting.

Use the password for changing modes.
Extension for maintenance page (for customer engineer)

The records of sent and received mails listed on mail log on the [Extension for maintenance] page are the
latest 10 mails. Even the main power switch is turned OFF, the communication is logged and kept though
there are some restrictions.
2-36
II SERVICE TOOL
E-Mail reception setting page

2. Set the e-mail reception screen based on the following.
Enable E-mail notification
Select [Yes] to use Mail remote notification system.

Default is [No].
Interval between fetching mails
Interval between checking mail on receiving mail server from

copier. The interval can be set within the range from 1 min. to 60
min.
Usually, set around 10 min. considering load for network.
Receiving mail server
The IP address of receiving mail server.
Kind of mail spool
Select [POP3] or [IMAP]. Default is [POP3].
User name on the server *1
The account name for copier assigned on receiving mail server.
Password *2
The password for the above user name.
E-Mail Address of this copy
E-mail address of the copier.
machine
Usually, the name is [User name@receiving mail server name].
Nickname *3
The name added to the mail subject sent from the copier.
It can be blank.
CE Password *2
Input password used for the "Subject" of the mail sent to the copier.
The copier uses this password for security check.
Also Notice to the administrator (CC mail)

- No
Default (Do not send the e-mail to the administrator)
- Only illegal mails
Specify whether to transfer mail in following conditions; When the
- All mails
mail received by copier does not match to the registered password

or the mail size is 10 k-byte or larger.
Transfer all sending mails from Mail remote notification system.
2-37

Administrator E-Mail address
Input address for the transfer if above [Only illegal mail] or [all
mails] is selected.
Announce delay time in reply mail *4 Select whether to contain the time difference from CE`s transmission and copier reception on the mail.
Default is [No].
Enable POP (IMAP) before SMTP
Select whether SMTP server transmits the mail after POP (IMAP)
server attests.
II SERVICE TOOL
Default is [Yes].
*1
Consult system administrator and create mail account for copier on receiving mail server.
*2
No echo back from the password.
*3
Use it as identifier, when managing multiple copiers.
*4
Use it to check the copier. is turned ON or not. If the time of the copier or the mail application software
is not set correctly (including time difference), wrong time is described. In that case, select [No].
3. Click "Apply" to finish input.
4. Test mail sending and receiving.
Click [Sending and receiving test] button and then sending and receiving tests are performed by one
transaction. It checks whether the sent mail is correctly received. Click [Sending and receiving test]
to display result of the test. If it is failed, please re-confirm the setting following to error message.
Sending mail test
Mail sending test is performed to SMTP server.

Test mail is sent to [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set on
Step2.
Receiving mail test
Receiving test from receiving mail server is performed.

Test mail is received by [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set
on Step2.
5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier.
2-38
4.4
How to use the Mail remote notification system
A. Function
CE can use following functions of Mail remote notification system by e-mailing simple keyword to copier.
CE can receive the data of the desired copier data list by the e-mail.
JOB memory list
User management list
Font pattern list
II SERVICE TOOL
Machine management list 1

Adjustment data list
Parameter list
E.K.C. management list
Machine management list 2
Counter list
Pixel ratio data list
In order to use above function, the simple keyword (command) must be sent by e-mail.
The following table shows the command and options.
Command
Options
Explanation
Minimum
GETLOG
[List output]
The [List output] specified by the following is returned by
mail.
CHPASS
JOB
[JOB memory list]
USER
[User management list]
FONT
[Font pattern list]
MANAGEMENT
[Machine management list 1]
ADJUSTMENT
[Adjustment data list]
PARAMETER
[Parameter list]
EKC
[EKC management list]
2MANAGEMENT
[Machine management list 2]
COUNTER
[Counter list]
PIXEL
[Pixel ratio data list]
PI
ALL
All of above list data.
AL
Not specified
Edited [Counter list] for the cellular phone display.
[OldPasswd] [New-
To change the password used to certify mail.
Passwd]
HELP
[OldPasswd]
Specify current password
[NewPasswd]
Specify new password
Not specified
Help mail explaining usage of the above commands is

sent.
2-39
B. Send mails
The example of the mail containing the command to the copier is shown. The command and option on
the mail are recognized by the top letters without distinction between capital and small letters. Accordingly, not all letters of the command must be typed. It is recognized by the minimum letters in the above
table *1. When sending mail to the copier, please note followings.
Note:
Mail software on any OS, handy terminal, free-mail using browser can be used without any differ-
II SERVICE TOOL
ence.
When sending mail on mail software, be sure to use text mode.
(Mail in HTML mode cannot be handle properly.)
As for the reception on mail software, the desirable maximum displayable letters per one line is
128 and over (single-byte).
(The length of the one line reaches to 128 letters in the part of the data list mail. Accordingly, mail
may not be easily seen on the cellular phone or other mobile devices.)
Put minimum one space or TAB*2 between the command and option on the mail.
Use only single-byte alphanumeric character (ASCII character) for the command on mail. Otherwise, an error mail, [Command Not Found], is returned.
Type command from the beginning of the line. If the line starts with blank or TAB, the line is
ignored.
Maximum number of commands that can be contained in one mail is 10. The eleventh and onwards
commands are ignored.
Do not attach file to the mail sent to the copier. Depending on file size, it is handled as illegal mail.
Do not attach signature to the mail sent to the copier. If automatic attachment of the signature is
already set to the mail software, change the setting not to attach the signature. The signature is
regarded as command and error mail may be returned.
While copier is sending or receiving the mail, if the power switch of the copier is turned OFF or list
output is performed on the copier, two mails may be returned.
The maximum number of the mails that copier receives from the mail server is 5 per one time. If the
mail server has more received mails at a time, remaining mails are processed after the [interval
between fetching mails].
*1
Example: All of G, GE, GET, GETL, GETLO, GETLOG equal to specify GETLOG.
*2
Return cannot be used.
2-40
(1) Send GETLOG command

Following should be described in the sending mail.
Subject: Input "CE password" set in reception setting.
To: Input E-mail address of the copier.
Body: Input command.
a.
Example of mail requesting counter list
Mail address
of the copier
CE Password
Command
2-41
II SERVICE TOOL

b.
Example of mail requesting counter list*1
II SERVICE TOOL
Serial number
of copier
Mail address
of the sender
Nickname
of the copier
Requested
counter
list
*1
Language of the returned mail is English only.
2-42

When option is not specified
GETLOG command without option is specified, Counter list for the cellular phone display is returned.
Sending mail [GetLog]
Example of returned mail
II SERVICE TOOL
c.
2-43

d.
To receive multiple data list

Data lists in reply to GETLOG command are separately returned by mails; one list per mail. If the
same list is requested twice or more in a mail, the list is returned only once.
When followings are described in a mail, both counter list mail and machine management list 1 mail
are returned.
[GetLog Counter]
[GetLog Management]
II SERVICE TOOL
When the commands are written in one line continuously, Management (the later command) is
ignored and only counter list (the first command) is returned.
[GetLog Counter Management]
e.
When unrecognizable option is specified.

Sending mail
[GetLog Log]
Returned mail
[Option Not Found GetLog Log]
(2) Send CHPASS command

The sending mail password described on the subject can be changed remotely. Specify 20 or less letters to [OldPasswd] and [NewPasswd]. Use ASCII characters except space.
Password cannot be changed by mail if you don't remember the old password. Change the [CE password] from the browser, explained in Chapter 2.
a.
Example of correct password change

In this case, old password [U-BIX] is changed to new password [Sitios].
Sending mail
[ChPass U-BIX Sitios]
Returned mail
[SE's Password was changed successfully. New Password [Sitios]]
When the password is changed, use [NewPasswd] from the next mail. When the mail is sent with
[OldPasswd], it is treated as illegal mail.
2-44

Example of invalid password change
Old password [U-BIX] is changed to new password [Sitios].
Sending mail
[ChPass Sitios U-BIX]
Returned mail
[Old Password is Invalid. ChPass Sitios U-BIX]
Then, password was not changed. Accordingly, the password is unchanged and [U-BIX].
Sending mail
[ChPass Sitios]
Returned mail
[Violation on format by new password. ChPass Sitios]
When the new password is blank, password is not changed.
2-45
II SERVICE TOOL
b.
(3) Send HELP command

The manual describing above usage of the commands is returned by mail. Use this function when you
forget how to use command and option.
Sending mail [Help]
II SERVICE TOOL
Returned mail
2-46
Disabling system
In order to disable Mail remote notification system, in Mail reception setting, select [No] for the "Enable
E-Mail notification" and then click [Apply] button.
II SERVICE TOOL
4.5
2-47
II SERVICE TOOL
Blank page
2-48
SERVICE SCHEDULE
III SERVICE
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.1
Service schedule
Guarantee period (5 years or 5,000,000 copies)

x 10,000 copies
0
Main
body
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
Periodic check (1)
Every 200,000
copies
Periodic check (2)
Every 400,000
copies
Periodic check (3)
Every 600,000
copies
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Service
90 100 150 180 200 250 300 350 360 400 450 500 count
z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
z
Periodic check (4)

Every 1,000,000
copies
Periodic check (5)

Every 1,500,000
copies
z
z
z
z
4
times
z
z
z
z
z
Periodic check (1) *1

Every 1,800,000
copies
3
times
2
times
1
time
Periodic check (8)

Every 4,000,000
copies
*1
12
times
8
times
Periodic check (7)

Every 2,500,000
copies
DF-319/ Maintenance
AFR-20 *1 Every 100,000
copies
24
times
Periodic check (6)

Every 2,000,000
copies
49
times
1
time
49
times
2
times
Perform the periodic check (1) for the DF-319/AFR-20 at 2 times (18,000,000 copies and 36,000,000
copies).
3-1
III SERVICE
Service item
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Service item
0
LT-211/ Maintenance
C-208 Every 100,000
copies
Service
x 10,000 copies
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 150 180 200 250 300 350 360 400 450 500 count
Periodic check (1)

Every 600,000
copies
FS
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
Periodic check (1)
Every 200,000
copies
Periodic check (2)
Every 400,000
copies
z
III SERVICE
24
times
12
times
4
times
1
time
z
Periodic check (3)

Every 3,000,000
copies
49
times
Periodic check (2)

Every 1,000,000
copies
49
times
9
times
4
times
1
time
PK-120/ Maintenance
5/507 Every 100,000
copies
49
times
TU-109/ Maintenance
TMG-3 Every 100,000
copies
49
times
Periodic check (1)

Every 4,000,000
copies
Periodic check (4)

Every 2,500,000
copies
Periodic check (1)

Every 500,000
copies
1
time
Periodic check (3)

Every 1,000,000
copies
PI-110 Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
8
times
Periodic check (2)

Every 2,500,000
copies
49
times
3-2
1
time
1.2
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Maintenance items
A. Main body (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Materials
Tools used
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement

1
Preparations (1) Image check
Drum
(1) Drum cartridge
z
z
(2) Drum unit cleaning
Hydro wipe
(cleaning pad is
not available)
z
3
Charging
corona
(1) Charging wire assy /Y,

/M, /C, /K
(2) Changing grid plate /

Y, /M, /C, /K
Developer
(1) Developer (Y, M, C, K)
(z)
Transfer
belt
(1) Belt cleaning blade
ADU
(1) Separation corona unit
(3) Feed roller /BP
z
z
(4) Double feed

prevention roller /BP
(5) Registration roller

cleaning
(6) Conveyance roller

section cleaning
(7) ADU paper through

sensor cleaning
Exterior
Fixing
*1
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
Blower brush
(2) Dust proof filter /1
(3) Dust proof filter /2
z
z
z
Multemp FF-RM
(or Solvest 240)*3
Multemp FF-RM
(or Solvest 240)*3
(1) Fixing roller /U *2
(3) Cleaning roller

Reverse/
exit
*3
(1) Ozone filter /1
(2) Fixing roller /L *2
*3
Hydro wipe (cleaning
pad is not available)
(2) Paper feed roller /BP
z
z
(2) Developer unit cleaning

5
Blower brush
(3) Charging corona dustproof filter
*3
III SERVICE
No. Classification
(1) Decurler roller

25 mode count reset
Roller cleaner
*1
Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mode to prevent the fixing jam when
replacing the decurler roller.
*2
When replacing the fixing roller /U or /L, be sure to apply Multemp FF-RM on the heat insulating sleeve
*3
Be sure to conduct the adjustment properly according to the adjustment items given in "LIST OF
/U or /L, respectively.
ADJUSTMENT ITEMS FOR 8050."
3-3
SERVICE SCHEDULE
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
(2) Feed roller /1, /2, /3
z
z
(3) Double feed prevention

roller /1, /2, /3
(1) Conveyance roller,

sensor
Cleaning pad/drum
cleaner/blower brush
12 Scanner
(1) Original glass, exposure lamp,

reflector, lens, mirror, sensor
Hydro wipe/drum
cleaner/blower brush
13 Write unit
(1) Dust-proof glass (Y, M, C, K)
Hydro wipe
14 Toner
supply
(1) Toner supply unit

cleaning
Hydro wipe
15 Toner
collection
(1) Toner collection box

replacing/cleaning
10 Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller /1, /2, /3
11 Vertical
conveyance
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(z)
Cleaning pad
16 Final check (1) W.U.T. check

(2) Exterior cleaning
III SERVICE
Materials
Tools used
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(3) Image and paper

through check
(4) PM counter resetting (25 mode)
B. DF-319/AFR-20 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Preparations (1) Paper through check

1
Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(2) Feed roller
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(3) Double feed

prevention roller
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(4) Pre-separation rubber
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(5) Rubber roller
z
z
Blower brush
(7) Conveyance belt
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(6) Reflective sensor
Materials
Tools used
Exterior
Final check (1) Paper through check
Blower brush
3-4
SERVICE SCHEDULE
C. LT-211/C-208 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Paper feed (1)Paper feed roller
Materials
Tools used
z
z
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(2) Feed roller
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(3) Double feed

prevention roller
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(4) Paper dust removing
z
z
Blower brush
(5) Sensor
(6) Gear
3
Exterior
(z)
Plus guard No.2 *1

Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
z
z
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Conveyance (1) Conveyance roller
Drive
Materials
Tools used
z
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(1) Main drive unit
(z)
Plus guard No.2 *1
(2) Tray up/down drive

unit
(z)
Plus guard No.2 *1
(3) Shift drive unit
z
z
z
(z)
Plus guard No.2 *1
(z)
Plus guard No.2 *1
(z)
Plus guard No.2 *1
(4) Paper exit drive section

(5) Staple unit
4
Stapler
(1) Staple check
Exterior
*1
III SERVICE
D. FS-115/FN-120/FS-513 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
Actual durable
count: 5,000
z
z
If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it.
3-5
SERVICE SCHEDULE
E. FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Drive
(1) Main drive unit
(z)
Plus guard No.2 *1
(2) Tray up/down drive

unit
(z)
Plus guard No.2 *1
(3) Shift drive unit
z
z
z
z
(z)
Plus guard No.2 *1
(z)
Plus guard No.2 *1
(z)
Plus guard No.2 *1
(5) Staple unit
III SERVICE
(6) Folding unit

4
Folding
(1) Folding roller
Stapler
(1) Staple check
Exterior
F.
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(4) Paper exit drive section
*1
(z)
z
z
Actual durable
count: 5,000
z
z
Stapler
positioning jig
PI-110 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Materials
Tools used
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
Paper feed (1) Feed roller
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(2) Paper feed

conveyance roller
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(3) Double feed

prevention roller
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner

Materials
Tools used
3-6
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
SERVICE SCHEDULE
G. PK-120/5/507 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Punch unit (1) Punch die
Punch scraps
section
z
z
z
(1) Punch scraps dump

(2) Punch scraps full sensor
Materials
Tools used
Blower brush
Blower brush

(2) Interior cleaning
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
H. TU-109/TMG-3 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

Service item
Quantity
Trimmer
Stacker
(1) Trimmer blade /U
(2) Trimmer blade /L
(3) Trimming box and its

periphery
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(2) Stacker section
z
z
(1) Conveyance drive

section
(1) Pusher section
Drive
(z)
Plus guard No.2 *1
(z)
Plus guard No.2 *1

*1
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
(2) Conveyance belt
Materials
Tools used
Cleaning pad/
drum cleaner
3-7
III SERVICE
No. Classification
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.3
Periodic check items (main body)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 200,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Materials
Tools used

1
Charging
corona
Transfer
belt
(1) Changing grid plate

65AA2507*
(2) Changing grid spring

65AA2509*
(1) 1st transfer roller /K

65AA2604*
25 mode count reset
(2) 1st transfer roller /C

65AA2612*
25 mode count reset
(3) 2nd transfer roller /U

65AA2611*
*1
III SERVICE
(4) Belt drive roller cleaning

(5) Transfer belt
65AA2642*
(6) Toner collection sheet /1

65AA-293*
(1) Fixing cleaning unit

65AA-573*
25 mode count reset
(2) Paper exit roller /Up

(New type only)
65LA5343*
(1) Paper exit roller

(New type only)
65LA4808*
(2) Paper exit guide roller /2

65AA4818*
*3
(3) Paper presser roller

65AA4849*
*4
2nd transfer (1) 2nd transfer roller /L

65AA4501*
Fixing
*1
Paper exit
Hydro wipe/
drum cleaner
*2
Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" to prevent a image disturbances in the 25 mode
when replacing the 1st transfer roller /Y/M/C/K.
*2
Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mod when replacing the fixing cleaning unit. Otherwise, the message "You need to replace the fixing cleaning unit. Please call the service."
appears and the copy/print prohibition state is started.
3-8

3
SERVICE SCHEDULE
For the old types, the paper exit guide roller /2 is replaced only for machines provided with a kit against
uneven wax. For identification of a measure against uneven wax, see the table below.
Identification method
Details
Identification by
Those on and after the following S/N are machines
means of the S/N
provided with a measure against uneven wax.

Main body:
65AE01429
65AF00476
65AN00169
65AP00005
65AK00016
65BE01391
65BF01416
FS-115:
20AK01550
20BK00236
FS-215:
20AL01551
20BL00320
Proposed kit
Machines provided with the following proposed kits

Main body:
SE95-4280
FS-115/215: SE95-4290
*4
Since machines connected to the finisher are not provided with the paper presser roller, this is
excluded from the periodically replaced parts.
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 400,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Materials
Tools used
Paper feed (1) Feed rubber (tray/1, /2, /3)

25SA4096*
Actual durable
count: 125,000

rubber (tray/1, /2, /3)
25SA4096*
Actual durable
count: 125,000
3-9
III SERVICE
against uneven wax in the field.
SERVICE SCHEDULE
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 600,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Materials
Tools used

1
(1) Charging corona dustproof filter

65AA-387*
Developer
(1) Developing unit /Y, /M,

/C, /K
65AA-972*
(1) Transfer belt

separation claw
65AA-287*
(2) Belt cleaning roller unit

65LA-288*
Registration (1) Registration cleaning

sheet
65AA-462*
(1) Ball bearing /U

45407504*
(2) Ball bearing /L

26NA5371*
(3) Heat insulating sleeve /U

45405339*
Multemp FF-RM
(or Solvest 240)
(4) Heat insulating sleeve /L

65AA5341*
Multemp FF-RM
(or Solvest 240)
(5) Fixing torque limiter

65AA5365*
Transfer
belt
Fixing
III SERVICE
Charging
corona
D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Materials
Tools used

1
Fixing
2nd transfer (1) Transfer ground plate unit

65AA-456*
Paper exit
*1
(1) Fixing drive gear

65AA7727*
(1) Paper exit roller

(Old type only)
65AA4808*
Multemp FF-RM
(or Solvest 240)
*1
For the old type, the paper exit roller is replaced only when the proposed kit against uneven wax is
installed.
3-10
SERVICE SCHEDULE
E. Periodic check (V) (Every 1,500,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Registration (1) Registration roller

65AA4601*
Transfer
belt
ADU
(1) Separation claw solenoid

26NA8251*
(1) Feed rubber /BP

25SA4096*
Actual durable
count: 125,000
(2) Double feed

prevention rubber /BP
25SA4096*
Actual durable
count: 125,000
Periodic check (VI) (Every 2,000,000 copies/prints)
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Vertical
(1) Intermediate
conveyance
conveyance clutch /1
56AA8201*
ADU
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count: 2,000,000
(1) Intermediate
56AA8201*
Actual durable
count: 2,000,000
(2) Intermediate
56AA8201*
Actual durable
count: 2,000,000
G. Periodic check (VII) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Fixing
(1) Fixing upper lamp /1

65AF8303*
(2) Fixing upper lamp /2

65AF8304*
(3) Fixing lower lamp

65AF8305*
(4) Fixing temperature

sensor /3
65AA-553*
(5) Fixing temperature

sensor /4
65AA-554*

(tray/1, /2, /3)
56AA-458*
3-11
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count: 800,000
III SERVICE
F.
Materials
Tools used
SERVICE SCHEDULE
H. Periodic check (VIII) (Every 4,000,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
III SERVICE
1.4
Actual durable
count: 2,000,000
(2) Pre-registration clutch

(tray/1, /2, /3)
56AA8201*
Actual durable
count: 2,000,000
(1) ADU conveyance

clutch /1
56AA8201*
Actual durable
count: 2,000,000
(2) ADU conveyance

clutch /2
56AA8201*
Actual durable
count: 2,000,000
(3) ADU pre-registration clutch

56AA8201*
Actual durable
count: 2,000,000
(4) Paper feed roller /BP

65AA-520*
Actual durable
count: 800,000
(5) Paper feed clutch /BP

56AA8201*
Actual durable
count: 2,000,000
Paper feed (1) Paper feed clutch

(tray/1, /2, /3)
56AA8201*
ADU
Materials
Tools used
Periodic check items (DF-319/AFR-20)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 1,800,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
1.5

13YH4064*
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count: 625,000
(2) Feed roller

13YH4039*
Actual durable
count: 625,000
(3) Double feed

prevention roller
20AJ4015*
Actual durable
count: 625,000
Periodic check items (LT-211/C-208)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity

55VA-484*
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count: 500,000
(2) Feed roller

55VA-483*
Actual durable
count: 500,000
(3) Double feed

prevention roller
55VA-483*
Actual durable
count: 500,000
3-12
SERVICE SCHEDULE
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Paper feed (1) Paper feed clutch

56AA8201*
(2) Pre-registration clutch
56AA8201*
1.6
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count: 2,000,000
Actual durable
count: 2,000,000
Periodic check items (FS-115/215/FN-120/9/FS-513/606)

Service item
Quantity
Conveyance (1) Paper exit roller /A

(sponge roller)
122H4825*
(2) Intermediate conveyance
roller /4 (sponge roller)
13QE4531*
Materials
Tools used
10
Actual durable
count: 200,000
Actual durable
count: 200,000
III SERVICE
No. Classification
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 400,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Conveyance (1) Stack assist roller

(sponge roller)
20AK4210*
Materials
Tools used
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Stapler
(1) Stapler unit

20AK4241*
Materials
Tools used
Stapler
positioning jig
Actual durable
count: 200,000
D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Drive
(1) FNS up/down motor

13QE-115*
3-13
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count: 2,500,000
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.7
Periodic check items (PI-110)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Materials
Tools used
Paper feed (1) Feed roller assembly /B

50BA-575*
Actual durable
count: 100,000

roller assembly
13QN-443*
Actual durable
count: 100,000
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Paper feed (1) Feed roller assembly /A

50BA-574*
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count: 200,000
III SERVICE
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 3,000,000 copies/prints)0

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
1.8
Paper feed (1) Torque limiter

13QN4073*
Materials
Tools used
Actual durable
count: 600,000
Periodic check items (TU-109/TMG-3)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 4,000,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Trimmer
Materials
Tools used
(1) Trimmer blade /U

13LHK001*
Actual durable
count: 500,000
(2) Trimmer blade /L

13LHK002*
Actual durable
count: 500,000
3-14
1.9
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Replacement parts list
Note:
No. in this list is identical with No. in "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25
mode.
No.
Unit
Parts name
Parts No.
Quantity Actual durable

count
65AA-245*
50,000
002 Main body
Ozone filter /1
65AA1043*
100,000
004
Dust proof filter /1
65AA1044*
100,000
005
65AA-142*
100,000
006 Charging corona
Charging corona dust-proof filter
65AA-387*
600,000
007 Drum
Drum cartridge /Y
65AA-200*
100,000
012
Drum cartridge /M
65AA-200*
100,000
017
Drum cartridge /C
65AA-200*
100,000
022
Drum cartridge /K
65AA-200*
100,000
028 Charging corona
Charging wire assy /Y
65AA-252*
100,000
029
Charging grid plate /Y
65AA2507*
200,000
031
Charging wire assy /M
65AA-252*
100,000
032
Charging grid plate /M
65AA2507*
200,000
034
Charging wire assy /C
65AA-252*
100,000
034
Charging grid plate /C
65AA2507*
200,000
037
Charging wire assy /K
65AA-252*
100,000
038
Charging grid plate /K
65AA2507*
200,000
Charging grid spring
65AA2509*
200,000
040 Transfer belt
Transfer belt
65AA2642*
200,000
041
1st transfer roller /Y
65AA2612*
200,000
042
1st transfer roller /M
65AA2612*
200,000
043
1st transfer roller /C
65AA2612*
200,000
044
65AA2604*
200,000
045
65AA2611*
200,000
046
Transfer belt separation claw
65AA-287*
600,000
048
Belt cleaning roller unit
65LA-288*
600,000
049
65AA-293*
200,000
050
Belt cleaning blade
65AA2630*
100,000
051 2nd transfer
65AA4501*
200,000
052 ADU
Separation Discharging board unit
65AA-452*
100,000
053 Fixing
65AA-573*
200,000
054
Fixing roller /U
65AA5301*
100,000
055
Fixing roller /L
65AA5302*
100,000
3-15
III SERVICE
001 Toner collection
SERVICE SCHEDULE
No.
Unit
Parts name
Parts No.

count
056 Developing
Developer /Y
New type:
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
65LA (/LK/LQ) 3079*

Old type:
65AA3079*
057
Developer /M
New type:
65LA (/LK/LQ) 3080*
Old type:
65AA3080*
058
Developer /C
New type:
65LA (/LK/LQ) 3081*
Old type:
65AA3081*
059
Developer /K
New type:
65LA (/LK/LQ) 3082*
Old type:
III SERVICE
65AA3082*
060
Developing unit /Y (color label included)
65AA-972*
600,000
061
Developing unit /M (color label included)
65AA-972*
600,000
062
Developing unit /C (color label included)
65AA-972*
600,000
063
Developing unit /K (color label included)
65AA-972*
600,000
069 FS
FNS up/down motor
13QE-115*
2,500,000
070
Stapler unit
20AK4241*
200,000
071
Stapler unit
20AK4241*
200,000
Staple
12QRK001*
5000
108
Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller)
122H4825*
10
200,000
109
Intermediate conveyance roller
13QE4531*
200,000
(sponge roller)
110
Stacking assist roller (sponge roller)
20AK4210*
400,000
078 PI-110
Feed roller assembly /A
50BA-574*
200,000
079
Feed roller assembly /B
50BA-575*
100,000
080
Double feed prevention roller
13QN-443*
100,000
081
Torque limiter
13QN4073*
600,000
083
Feed roller assembly /A
50BA-574*
200,000
084
Feed roller assembly /B
50BA-575*
100,000
085
13QN-443*
100,000
assembly
assembly
086
Torque limiter
13QN4073*
600,000
087 TU-109/TMG-3
Trimmer blade /U
13LHK001*
500,000
087
Trimmer blade /L
13LHK002*
500,000
092 DF-319/AFR-20
Paper feed roller
13YH4064*
625,000
093
Feed roller
13YH4039*
625,000
095
20AJ4015*
625,000
113 Registration
Registration cleaning sheet
65AA-462*
600,000
3-16

No.
Unit
Parts name
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Parts No.

count
112 Fixing unit
Fixing torque limiter
65AA5365*
600,000
114
Ball bearing /U (for upper roller)
45407504*
600,000
115
Heat insulating sleeve /U
45405339*
600,000
116 Vertical conveyance
56AA8201*
2,000,000
117 ADU
56AA8201*
2,000,000
118
56AA8201*
2,000,000
119 Main body paper feed
Paper feed rubber /1
25SA4096*
125,000
119
Double feed prevention rubber /1
25SA4096*
125,000
120
25SA4096*
125,000
120
25SA4096*
125,000
121
25SA4096*
125,000
121
25SA4096*
125,000
122
Paper feed rubber /BP
25SA4096*
125,000
122
Double feed prevention rubber /BP
25SA4096*
125,000
130
Paper feed roller /1
56AA-458*
800,000
131
56AA-458*
800,000
132
56AA-458*
800,000
133
Paper feed roller (Bypass)
65AA-520*
800,000
123 Registration
Registration roller
65AA4601*
1,500,000
124 Transfer belt
Separation claw solenoid
26NA8251*
1,500,000
125 Fixing
65AF8303*
2,500,000
126
65AF8304*
2,500,000
127
Fixing lower lamp
65AF8305*
2,500,000
128
65AA-553*
2,500,000
129
65AA-554*
2,500,000
134 ADU
56AA8201*
2,000,000
135
56AA8201*
2,000,000
136
56AA8201*
2,000,000
137 Fixing
Ball bearing /L (for lower roller)
26NA5371*
600,000
138
Heat insulating sleeve/L
65AA5341*
600,000
139
Fixing drive gear
65AA7727*
1,000,000
140 Reverse/exit unit
Decurler roller
65AA4905*
100,000
141 LT-211/C-208
Paper feed roller
55VA-484*
500,000
142
Feed roller
55VA-483*
500,000
55VA-483*
500,000
143
Paper feed clutch
56AA8201*
2,000,000
144
Pre-registration clutch
56AA8201*
2,000,000
III SERVICE
(for upper roller)
(for lower roller)
3-17
SERVICE SCHEDULE
No.
Unit

Parts name
Parts No.

count
145 Main body paper feed
56AA8201*
2,000,000
146
56AA8201*
2,000,000
147
56AA8201*
2,000,000
148
56AA8201*
2,000,000
149
56AA8201*
2,000,000
150
56AA8201*
2,000,000
151
56AA8201*
2,000,000
152 2nd transfer
Transfer ground plate unit
65AA-456*
1,000,000
153 Paper exit
65AA4818*
200,000
154 (New type only)
Paper exit roller
65LA4808*
200,000
155
Paper exit roller /Up
65LA5343*
200,000
Note:
For the old type, the parts listed below are not registered in [1. Count of special parts] of the 25
mode [5. Parts counter.] Therefore, be sure to register these parts in [2. Count of each parts] (See
III SERVICE
"6.7.2 Count of each parts") for proper management.
No.
Unit
Parts name
Parts No.

count
Paper exit
Paper exit guide roller/2
65AA4818*
200,000
Paper exit roller
65AA4808*
1,000,000
Note:
When installed with no finisher, the parts listed below are not registered in [1. Count of special
parts] of the 25 mode [5. Parts counter.] Therefore, be sure to register these parts in [2. Count of
each parts] (See "6.7.2 Count of each parts") for proper management.
No.
Unit
Parts name
Parts No.

count
Paper exit
Paper presser roller
3-18
65AA4849*
200,000
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.10 Important maintenance parts

The important parts specified by Konica Minolta
in order to maintain safety of the products are
referred to as "important maintenance parts".
The important maintenance parts for this
machine are as described below:
No.
Unit
Parts name
Parts No. Quantity
Fixing unit
Thermostat /1 SP00-0030
Fixing unit
Thermostat /L SP00-0180
Note:
"SP" is indicated in front of the parts number
of the important maintenance part. Exercise
care when installing the parts according to
"III. Directions for disassembly and assembly"
III SERVICE
in this manual.
3-19
COPY MATERIAL
2. COPY MATERIAL
2.1
Product
A. Drum cartridge
2.2
Materials
A. Single unit supply

Drum
DR501 (New type/Old type)
Toner black
TN510K (New type) /TN501K (Old type)
Toner yellow
TN510Y (New type) /TN501Y (Old type)
Toner magenta
TN510M (New type) /TN501M (Old type)
Toner cyan
TN510C (New type) /TN501C (Old type)
B. Kit
a
Developer black set
III SERVICE
Developer black
Developer collection sheet (rubber band)
Developer yellow set
Developer yellow
DV510Y (New type) /DV501Y (Old type)
Developer charging funnel/U
Developer magenta set
Developer magenta
DV510M (New type) /DV501M (Old type)
Developer cyan set
Developer cyan
DV510K (New type) /DV501K (Old type)
DV510C (New type) /DV501C (Old type)
3-20
2.3
COPY MATERIAL
PM parts kit
A. 100,000 copies/1 set

<For old type>
Part No.
Quantity
USA
Europe/Other
Ozone filter /1
65AA1043*
65AA1044*
65AA-142*
Belt cleaning blade
65AA2630*
Separation corona unit
65AA-452*
Fixing roller /U
65AA5301*
Fixing roller /L
65AA5302*
Decurler roller
65AA4905*
Charging wire assy
65AA-252*
Paper for fixing speed adjustment

(16 sheets/A3)
65AA-991*
Dust bag (rubber band)
000V-3070*
Hand case for collection
000V-3080*
Cotton swab (x4)
000V-3090*
Hydro wipe (x10)
65AA-992*
III SERVICE
Name
<For new type>

Name
Part No.
Quantity
USA
Europe/Other
65AA-245*
Ozone filter /1
65AA1043*
65AA1044*
65AA-142*
Belt cleaning blade
65AA2630*
Separation corona unit
65AA-452*
Fixing roller /U
65AA5301*
Fixing roller /L
65AA5302*
Decurler roller
65AA4905*
Charging wire assy
65AA-252*
Paper for fixing speed adjustment

(16 sheets/A3)
65AA-991*
Dust bag (rubber band)
000V-3070*
Hand case for collection
000V-3080*
Cotton swab (x4)
000V-3090*
Hydro wipe (x10)
65AA-992*
3-21
COPY MATERIAL
B. 200,000 copies/1set (total)
<For old type>
Name
Part No.
Quantity
USA
Europe/Other
Transfer belt
65AA2642*
65AA2604*
1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C
65AA2612*
65AA-293*
65AA2611*
65AA4501*
65AA-573*
Changing grid plate
65AA2507*
Changing grid spring
65AA2509*
<For new type>
III SERVICE
Name
Part No.
Quantity
USA
Europe/Other
Transfer belt
65AA2642*
65AA2604*
1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C
65AA2612*
65AA-293*
65AA2611*
65AA4501*
65AA-573*
Changing grid plate
65AA2507*
Changing grid spring
65AA2509*
65AA4818*
Paper exit roller
65LA4808*
Paper exit roller /U
65LA5343*
3-22
SERVICE MATERIAL LIST
3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST

Name
Shape
Remark
000V-16-0
Drum cleaner
200ml
000V-17-0
Roller cleaner
200ml
000V-19-0
Setting powder
25g
000V-18-1
Cleaning pad
10pcs/1pack
65AA-9920
Hydro wipe
10pcs/1pack
00GR00260
Multemp grease
25g
FF-RM
00GR00210
Solvest 240
Multemp FF-RM is
recommended
00GR00020
Plasguard No.2
3-23
III SERVICE
Material No.
CE TOOLS LIST
4. CE TOOLS LIST
Tool No.
65AAJG021
Name
Shape
Fixing thermostat
Quantity
Remark
positioning jig
(for upper roller)
65AAJG031
Fixing thermostat
positioning jig
III SERVICE
(for lower roller)
7050K0020
Mirror positioning jig
00M6-2-00
Door switch jig
25TU00480
Color chart (metric)
111T96110
Color chart (inch)
00VD-5000
New Pyramid chart
120A9711*
Adjustment chart
00VC-2-00
Drum cover
00VD-1000
Blower brush
00VE-1004
Tester
129XJG011
Stapler positioning jig
For old type cartridge
13QEJG010
Stapler positioning jig
For new type cartridge
3-24
JAM CODE LIST
IV JAM CODE LIST

1. JAM CODE LIST
Jam
code
Bypass
feed
J10-01
J10-02
Causes
During operation
Classification
J10-03
Resulting
operation
Correction
After the pickup solenoid /BP (SD5) is
If copy is pro-
Remove the paper
turned ON, bypass feed feeder sensor
gressing when
from the bypass feed
(PS26) is not turned ON within the
jam arises, main
tray once and remove
specified time.
body stops after
jammed paper, if any.
After no paper sensor /BP (PS47) is
completion of
Remove paper from
turned ON, tray up drive motor /BP
paper exit.
the bypass feed tray
(M35) is not turned ON within specified
once, decrease the
time.
stacked sheets and set
After the tray up drive motor /BP (M35)
again.
is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /

BP (PS25) is not turned ON within
Paper
feed
tray /1
J11-01
Bypass feed conveyance sensor
Remove the paper
(PS26) was turned ON in the idling con-
from the bypass feed
dition.
tray once and remove

After the pick-up solenoid /1 (SD7) is
If copy is pro-
Pull out the paper feed
turned ON, pre-registration sensor /1
gressing when
tray /1 and remove
jam arises, main
specified time.
body stops after

completion of
Paper
feed
tray /2
J12-01
J12-11
During operation When idling
J11-11
Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) was
When idling
paper exit.
turned ON in the idling condition.
After pick-up solenoid /2 (SD8) is
If copy is pro-
gressing when
tray /2 and remove
(PS35) is not turned ON within speci-
jam arises, main
fied time.
body stops after

completion of
paper exit.
4-1
IV JAM CODE LIST
J10-11
specified time.
JAM CODE LIST
LT-211
C-208
If copy is pro-
gressing when
tray /3 and remove
(PS41) is not turned ON.
jam arises, main
J14-01
J14-11
IV JAM CODE LIST
Paper
feed
J17-01
J17-02
Correction
During operation
J13-01
J13-11
Resulting
operation
After the pick-up solenoid /3 (SD9) is
Causes
When idling
Paper
feed
tray /3
Jam
code
Feed sensor (PS106) was turned ON in
During operation
Classification
After the loop roller motor (M31) is
If copy is pro-
Pull out ADU and
turned ON, registration sensor (PS22)
gressing when
remove jammed paper,
is not turned ON within specified time.
jam arises, main
if any.
body stops after

completion of
paper exit.
After the paper feed solenoid (SD100)
If copy is pro-
Open the LCT top
is turned ON, paper feed sensor
gressing when
cover and remove
jam arises, main
fied time.
body stops after

completion of
paper exit.
the idling condition.
body stops after

completion of
paper exit.
After the ADU pre-registration clutch
Printer section
(MC3) is turned ON, registration sensor
stops immedi-
ately.
specified time.
J17-03
J17-04
After the pre-registration clutch /3
If copy is pro-
Open the vertical con-
(MC12) is turned ON, vertical convey-
gressing when
veyance door and
ance sensor (PS50) is not turned ON
jam arises, main
within specified time.
body stops after
if any.
completion of
(MC10) is turned ON, vertical convey-
paper exit.
tray /2 and remove
ance sensor (PS50) is not turned ON

within specified time.
4-2
Paper
feed
Jam
code
J17-05
J17-06
Causes
During operation
Classification
JAM CODE LIST

Resulting
operation
Correction
After the intermediate conveyance
If copy is pro-
Open the vertical con-
clutch /1 (MC13) is turned ON, interme-
gressing when
veyance door and
diate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is
jam arises, main
not turned ON within the specified time. body stops after

completion of
(MC7) is turned ON, intermediate con-
paper exit.
if any.
veyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not turned

ON within the specified time.
J17-07
After the pre-registration clutch
Open the LCT front
(MC102) is turned ON, intermediate
door and remove
conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not
turned ON within the specified time.

J17-08
After the intermediate conveyance sen-
Pull out ADU and
sor /1 (PS27) is turned ON, intermedi-
ate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) is not
if any.
turned ON within specified time.

J17-09
LT-211
C-208
J17-10
After the bypass feed conveyance sen-
Remove paper from
sor (PS26) is turned ON, the intermedi-
the bypass feed tray
ate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) is not
and remove jammed
paper, if any.
After the pre-registration clutch
Open the LCT top
(MC102) is turned ON, paper feed sen-
cover and remove
sor (PS107) is not turned ON within the
J17-11
J17-12
J17-13
Vertical conveyance sensor (PS50)

was turned ON in the idling condition.
Open the vertical conveyance door and

if any.
Pull out ADU and
(PS27) was turned ON in the idling con-
dition.
if any.

(PS28) was turned ON in the idling condition.
J17-14
Registration sensor (OS22) was turned

in the idling condition.
LT-211
C-208
J17-15
Paper feed sensor (PS107) was turned
Open the LCT front
ON in the idling condition.
door and remove

4-3
IV JAM CODE LIST
Paper
feed
When idling
specified time.
JAM CODE LIST

Jam
code
Causes
Others
J19-01
Vertical conveyance door open jam.
If copy is pro-
Close the vertical con-
Vertical conveyance door sensor
gressing when
veyance door.
(PS51) was turned OFF when copying /
jam arises, main
printing.
body stops after
Others
LT-211
C-208
J19-02
During operation
Classification
Resulting
operation
Correction
completion of
paper exit.
LCT top cover open jam or LCT front
In case of LCT
Close the LCT top
door open jam. Top cover open/close
paper feed, main
cover or LCT front
sensor (PS100) or front door open/
body stops after
door.
close sensor (PS115) was turned OFF
completion of
when copying/printing.
paper exit. In
case of paper
feed other than
LCT, main body
does not stop.
Paper
exit
J31-02
J32-01
After the registration roller motor (M30)
Printer section
Pull out ADU and
is turned ON, fixing paper exit sensor
stops immedi-
(PS17) is not turned ON.
ately.
if any.
After the fixing paper exit sensor

(PS17) is turned ON, paper exit sensor
specified time.
J32-02
IV JAM CODE LIST
(PS17) is turned ON, reverse paper exit

sensor (PS19) is not turned ON within
the specified time.
J32-03
In the reverse paper exit mode, after

the reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is
turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS13) is
not turned ON within the specified time.
J32-04

(PS17) is turned ON, it is not turned
OFF within the specified time.
J32-05
After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is

turned ON, it is not turned OFF within
the specified time (in straight paper exit
mode).
J32-07

the specified time (in reverse paper exit
mode).
J32-08
When the registration roller motor

(M30) is ON, fixing paper exit sensor
(PS17) is ON.
4-4
Paper
exit
Jam
code
J32-11
J32-12
Causes
When idling
Classification
J32-13
JAM CODE LIST

Resulting
operation
Paper exit sensor (PS13) is ON in the
Correction
Pull out ADU and
idling condition.
Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is
if any.

Reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is
DF-319
AFR-20
J51-01
J61-01
J61-02
J61-03
Close the front door.
Front door open jam. Front door open/
Printer section
stops immedi-
while copying/printing.
ately.
Paper feed section cover open jam.
RADF stops
Close the paper feed
Paper feed cover sensor (PS303) was
immediately.
section cover.
turned OFF when copying.
If there is paper
Paper feed tray open jam. Tray open/
in or after trans-
Close the paper feed
fer process,
tray.
when copying.
main body stops
Paper exit section cover open jam.
after paper exit.
Paper exit cover sensor (PS307) was
Close the paper exit

section cover.
turned OFF when copying.

J62-01
J62-02
J62-03
Registration sensor (PS301) is not
Open the paper feed
turned OFF within specified time after
section cover and
paper feed is started.
After reversal of paper feed motor
if any.
(M301) is started, timing sensor
Remove jammed paper
in the main body con-
specified time.
veyance section, if any.
After the timing sensor (PS302) is

the specified time.
J62-04
J62-05
J62-06
After the reverse/paper exit motor
Open the paper exit
(M303) is turned ON, reverse sensor
section cover and
specified time.
if any.
After the reverse sensor (PS305) is
Remove jammed paper
the specified time.
In the one-sided original exit mode,

paper exit sensor (PS306) is not turned
ON within the specified time after the
start of paper exit.
In the double-sided original exit mode,
original exit sensor (PS306) is not
turned ON within the specified time
after the reverse sensor (PS305) is
turned ON.
4-5
IV JAM CODE LIST
Others
During operation
JAM CODE LIST
DF-319
AFR-20
J62-07
J65-01
Causes
During operation
Jam
code
When idling
Classification
J65-02
Resulting
operation
Correction
RADF stops
Open the paper exit
immediately.
section cover and
the specified time.
If there is paper
in or after trans-
if any.
fer process,
Remove jammed paper
main body stops
after paper exit.
Registration sensor (PS301) is ON in
Open the paper feed

section cover and
if any.
Reverse sensor (PS305) is ON in the
Open the paper exit
idling condition.
section cover and

if any.
J65-03
Timing sensor (PS302) is ON in the
Open the paper feed
idling condition.
section cover and

if any.
J65-04
Open the paper exit
idling condition.
section cover and

IV JAM CODE LIST
Others
FS
J71-01
Others
TU-109
TMG-3
J71-02
FS
J72-16
During operation
if any.
FNS front door open jam. FNS interlock
Printer section
Close the FNS front
switch (MS701) was turned OFF when
stops immedi-
door.
copying/printing.
ately.
TU front door open jam. Front door
Close the TU front
MS2 (MS2) was turned OFF when
door.
copying/printing.
J72-17
FNS/main body
Remove jammed paper
turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is
stop immedi-
in the FNS/main body,
ately.
if any.
After the FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is

turned ON, main tray paper exit sensor
specified time.
J72-18

turned ON, stacker inlet sensor
specified time (when stapling).
4-6
J72-19
J72-20
Causes
Resulting
operation
Correction
After the stacker inlet motor (M713) is
FNS/main body
Remove jammed paper
turned ON, stacker inlet sensor
stop immedi-
ately.
if any.
specified time.
After paper exit operation is started,
main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is
not turned ON within the specified time
(when stapling).
J72-21
After the main tray paper exit sensor

OFF within the specified time (in the
large-size staple mode).
J72-22

turned ON, sub-tray paper exit sensor
specified time within the specified time
(in the sub-tray paper exit mode).
J72-23
After the sub-tray paper exit sensor

large-size staple mode).
J72-24
After completion of stapling, folding

passage sensor (PS726) is not turned
ON.
J72-25
IV JAM CODE LIST
FS
Jam
code
During operation
Classification
JAM CODE LIST
After the folding knife motor (M719) is

turned ON, folding paper exit sensor
specified time.
J72-26
After the folding paper exit sensor

J72-28
After the stacker inlet sensor (PW705)

is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within
the specified time.
J72-29

non-staple mode).
J72-30

small-size staple mode).
4-7
JAM CODE LIST

Jam
code
TU-109
TMG-3
J72-32
J72-33
Causes
During operation
Classification
Resulting
operation
Correction
After the folding paper exit sensor
TU/FNS/main
Remove jammed paper
(PS725) is turned ON, inlet sensor
body stop imme-
in TU/FNS/main body,
diately.
if any.
After the conveyance clutch /L (MC202)
FNS/main body
Remove jammed paper
is turned ON, PI passage sensor /L
stop immedi-
ately.
if any.
specified time.
After the inlet sensor (PS101) is turned
ON, inlet sensor (PS101) is not turned
J72-34
After the conveyance motor (M101) is

turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS108)
is not turned OFF within the specified
time.
PI-110
J72-35
fied time.
PK-120
PK-5
PK-507
J72-43
FS
J72-48
After the punch motor (M801) is turned

ON, punch HP sensor (PS801) is not
After the folding passage sensor
PI-110
J72-49
After the conveyance clutch /U

(MC201) is turned ON, PI passage sen-
IV JAM CODE LIST
sor (PS201) is not turned ON within the

specified time.
J72-50
After the PI passage sensor (PS201) is

turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is
J72-51
After the PI passage sensor /L (PS206)

is turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704)
is not turned ON within the specified
time.
FS
J72-81
After the stapler motor /F (M714) and

clincher motor /F (M715) are turned
ON, stapler HP sensor /F (PS731) and
clincher HP sensor /F (PS733) are not
turned ON within specified time.
J72-82
After the stapler motor /R (M709) and

clincher motor /R (M710) are turned
ON, stapler HP sensor /R (PS730) and
clincher HP sensor (PS732) are not
4-8
FS
Jam
code
Causes
J72-83
After the stapler motor /F, /R (M714),
FNS/main body
Remove jammed paper
M709), and clincher motor /F, /R (M715,
stop immedi-
M710) are turned ON, stapler HP sen-
ately.
if any.
During operation
Classification
JAM CODE LIST

Resulting
operation
Correction
sor /F, /R (PS731, PS730) and clincher

HP sensor /F, /R (PS733, PS732) are
J72-90
After operation stop signal is transmitted from the main body to FNS, FNS
J73-02
When idling
does not stop within the specified time.

J73-01
J73-05
Main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is
Open the FNS front
door and remove
Stacker inlet sensor (PS705) is ON in

FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is ON in the
idling condition.
J73-07
J73-08
J73-09
Sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) is
Remove jammed paper
in the sub-tray, if any.
Stacker no-paper sensor (PS720) is
Open the FNS front
door and remove
Folding passage sensor (PS726) is ON

J73-10
Folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is

J73-11
J73-12
Inlet sensor (PS101) is ON in the idling
Open the TU front door
condition.
and remove jammed
Conveyance sensor (PS102) is ON in
paper, if any.
IV JAM CODE LIST
TU-109
TMG-3

J73-13

idling condition.
PI-110
J73-14
PI passage sensor (PS206) is ON in
Remove paper from
the cover sheet feeder

/L and remove jammed
paper, if any.
J73-17
PI passage sensor /U (PS201) is ON in
Remove paper in the
cover sheet feeder /U

once and remove
ADU
J92-01
During operation

After the reverse paper exit sensor
Printer section
(PS19) is turned ON, ADU reverse sen- stops immedisor (PS21) is not turned ON within the
ately.
Pull out ADU and

if any.
specified time.
4-9
JAM CODE LIST
J93-01
J93-11
J94-02
ADU reverse sensor (PS21) is ON in
After reversal of ADU reverse motor
ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) is ON
After the ADU conveyance sensor
Printer section
(PS20) is turned ON, ADU pre-registra-
stops immedi-
tion sensor (PS23) is not turned ON
ately.
ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23) is
Correction
Pull out ADU and
if any.
Printer section
(M32) is turned ON, ADU conveyance
stops immedi-
sensor (PS20) is not turned ON within
ately.
the specified time.
within the specified time.
IV JAM CODE LIST
J94-11
When idling
J92-11
During operation
Resulting
operation
When idling
Causes
During operation
ADU
Jam
code
When idling
Classification
4-10
ERROR CODE LIST
V ERROR CODE LIST

1. ERROR CODE LIST
Note:
In the F code area of warning codes, "Contact the Service Section" is indicated and in the E
code area, "Turn ON the power switch again" is indicated. On the actual LCD screen, all the indications are SC codes.
Main body
Classification Abnormality
code
Communication
abnormality
F10-10
Paper
feed
motor
abnormality
F13-01
Causes
Resulting
operation
Estimated abnormal parts
Communication abnormality
Main body
between printer control board
stops immedi-
LT drive board (LTDB)
(PRCB) and LT drive board
ately and main
(LTDB)
relay (RL1) is
M41 abnormality detection sig-
turned OFF.
nal was continuously detected

Paper feed motor (M41)
for the specified time when the

paper feed motor (M41) was
LT-211, C-208
LT
paper
feed
motor
abnormality
F13-02
Main body
ON.
Paper
feed
tray
abnormality
F18-01
M101 abnormality detection
LT drive motor (LTDB)
signal was continuously
detected for the specified time

when the paper feed motor
F18-02
F18-03
F18-04
After the tray up/down motor /l
(M40) is turned ON, tray upper
Tray up/down motor /1 (M40)
limit sensor /1 (PS30) is not
turned ON.
(PS30)
After the tray up/down motor /2
Tray upper limit motor /2 (M39)
turned ON.
(PS38)
After the tray up/down motor /3
Tray upper limit motor /3 (M38)
turned ON.
(PS42)
After the tray up/down motor /
Conveyance drive board
BP (M35) is turned ON, the tray
(CVDB)
upper limit sensor /BP (PS25)
Tray up/down motor /BP (M35)
is not turned ON within the
specified time.
(PS25)
5-1
V ERROR CODE LIST
(M101) was ON.
ERROR CODE LIST
LT-211, C-208
code
LT up/
down
motor
abnormality
F18-50
F18-51
Causes
Resulting
operation
When the up/down motor
Main body
(M100) was ON, M100 abnor-
stops immedi-
UP/DOWN motor (M100)
mality detection signal was
ately and main
continuously detected for the
relay (RL1) is
specified time.
turned OFF.
When the upper limit sensor
(PS109) or lower limit sensor
UP/DOWN motor (M100)
(PS101) is OFF, PS101 or
Upper limit sensor (PS109)
PS109 is not turned ON within
Lower limit sensor (PS101)
the specified time after the up/

down motor (M100) is turned
ON.
LT paper
feed assist
fan abnormality
F18-60
When the paper feed assist fan
/R (M137) was ON, M137
Paper feed assist fan /R (M137)
abnormality detection signal

was continuously detected for
the specified time.
F18-61
When the paper feed assist fan
/F (M136) was ON, M136
Paper feed assist fan /F (M136)

Main body
the specified time.

LT
power
abnormality
F18-70
Communication
abnormality
F20-10
24VDC is not supplied to LCT.
DC power unit /2 (DCPS2)

F18-71
12VDC is not supplied to LCT.

Drum drive board /Y (DRDB /Y)
(PRCB) and drum drive board /
Drum drive board /M (DRDB /M)
Y (DRDB /Y) or drum drive

board /M (DRDB /M).
V ERROR CODE LIST
F20-11
Drum drive board /C (DRDB /C)
(PRCB) and drum drive board /
Drum drive board /K (DRDB /K)
C (DRDB /C) or drum drive

board /K (DRDB /K).
F20-12
Transfer belt motor (M18)
(PRCB) and transfer belt motor

(M18)
5-2
Precharging
exposure
lamp
abnormality
F21-01
Resulting
operation
Pre-charging exposure lamp /Y
Main body
(PCL Y) set cannot be
stops immedi-
Pre-charging exposure lamp /Y
detected.
ately and main
(PCL Y)
relay (RL1) is
turned OFF.
F21-02
F21-03
F21-04
Developing
motor
abnormality
Causes
F23-01
Pre-charging exposure lamp /
M (PCL M) set cannot be
Pre-charging exposure lamp /M
detected.
(PCL M)
Pre-charging exposure lamp /C
(PCL C) set cannot be
Pre-charging exposure lamp /C
detected.
(PCL C)
Pre-charging exposure lamp /K
(PCL K) set cannot be
Pre-charging exposure lamp /K
detected.
(PCL K)
When the developing motor /Y
(M20) was ON, M20 abnormal-
Developing motor /Y (M20)
ity detection signal was continuously detected for the

specified time.
F23-02
When the developing motor /M
Developing motor /M (M21)

specified time.
F23-03
When developing motor /C
Developing motor /C (M22)

specified time.
F23-04
When the developing motor /K
Developing motor /K (M23)

specified time.
Drum
motor
abnormality
F23-05
When the drum motor /Y (M14)
was ON, M14 abnormality
Drum drive board /Y (DRDB /Y)
detection signal was continu-
Drum motor /Y (M14)
ously detected for the specified

time.
F23-06
When the drum motor /M (M15)
Drum drive board /M (DRDB /M)
Drum motor /M (M15)

time.
5-3
V ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
Drum
motor
abnormality
F23-07
F23-08
Causes
Resulting
operation
When the drum motor /C (M16)
Main body
stops immedi-
Drum drive board /C (DRDB /C)
ately and main
Drum motor /C (M16)
relay (RL1) is
time.
turned OFF.
When drum motor /K (M17)
Drum drive board /K (DRDB /K)
Drum motor /K (M17)

time.
Transfer
belt unit
abnormality
F23-09
When the transfer belt motor

specified time.
F23-10
When the 1st transfer HP sen-
sor (PS15) is ON, PS15 is not
1st transfer pressing/releasing
turned OFF within the specified
motor (M19)
time after the 1st transfer
1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)
pressing/releasing motor (M19)

is turned ON.
When PS15 is OFF, PS15 is
not turned ON within the specified time after M19 is turned
ON.
V ERROR CODE LIST
Toner
supply
abnormality
F23-11
When either of the toner supply
motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (M49, M50,
Toner supply drive board (TSDB)
M51, or M52), toner bottle
Toner supply motor /Y (M49)
motor (M53), or toner bottle
Toner supply motor /M (M50)
clutch /Y, /M, /C, /K (MC14,
Toner supply motor /C (M51)
MC15, MC16, or MC17) was
Toner supply motor /K (M52)
ON, either abnormality detec-
Toner bottle motor (M53)
tion signal was continuously
Toner bottle clutch /Y (MC14)
detected for the specified time.
Toner bottle clutch /M (MC15)

Toner bottle clutch /C (MC16)
Toner bottle clutch /K (MC17)
L detection
abnormality
F27-01
Output of toner density sensor /
Y (TDS Y) cannot be con-
Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y)
trolled.
F27-02
M (TDS M) cannot be con-
Toner density sensor /M (TDS M)
trolled.
F27-03
C (TDS C) cannot be con-
Toner density sensor /C (TDS C)
trolled.
5-4
L detection
abnormality
F27-04
High
pressure unit
abnormality
F28-01
Causes
Resulting
operation
Output of toner density sensor / Main body

K (TDS K) cannot be con-
stops immedi-
trolled.
ately and main

Toner density sensor /K (TDS K)
relay (RL1) is
When the charging /Y was ON,
turned OFF.
High pressure unit /1 (HV1)
charging /Y abnormality detection signal was continuously

F28-02
When charging /M was ON,

charging /M abnormality detection signal was continuously
F28-03
When charging /C is ON,

charging /C abnormality detection signal was continuously
F28-04
When charging /K was ON,

charging /K abnormality detection signal was continuously
F29-01
When the primary transfer Y
High pressure unit /2 (HV2)
was ON, primary transfer Y
1st transfer roller

the specified time.
F29-02
When the primary transfer M

was ON, primary transfer M
the specified time.
F29-03
When the primary transfer C

was ON, primary transfer C
the specified time.
F29-04
When the primary transfer K

was ON, primary transfer K
the specified time.
5-5
V ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
Process
abnormality
F29-06
Causes
Resulting
operation
Gamma sensor (PS11) improp-
Main body
erly adjusted while in the Dmax
stops immedi-
Gamma sensor (PS11)
control.
ately and main

relay (RL1) is
F29-07
Dmax control /Y resulted in an

abnormality.
turned OFF.

Developing unit /Y
Gamma sensor (PS11)
F29-08
Dmax control /M resulted in an
abnormality.
Developing unit /M
Gamma sensor (PS11)
F29-09
Dmax control /C resulted in an
abnormality.
Developing unit /C
Gamma sensor (PS11)
F29-10
Dmax control /K resulted in an
abnormality.
Developing unit /K
Gamma sensor (PS11)
F29-11
In charging potential control,
drum surface potential /Y was
Drum potential sensor board /Y
out of specification.
(DRPSB Y)
Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y)
F29-12
drum surface potential /M was
Drum potential sensor board /M
(DRPSB M)
Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M)
F29-13
drum surface potential /C was
Drum potential sensor board /C
(DRPSB C)
Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C)
F29-14
drum surface potential /K was
Drum potential sensor board /K
(DRPSB K)
V ERROR CODE LIST
Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K)

F29-15
Charging potential control /Y
resulted in an abnormality.

(DRPSB Y)
F29-16
Charging potential control /M

(DRPSB M)
5-6
Process
abnormality
F29-17
F29-18
Causes
Resulting
operation
Charging potential control /C
Main body
stops immedi-
ately and main
(DRPSB C)
relay (RL1) is
turned OFF.
Charging potential control /K


(DRPSB K)
F29-19
Dot diameter adjustment con-
trol /Y resulted in an abnormal-
ity.
(DRPSB Y)
F29-20
trol /M resulted in an abnormal-
ity.
(DRPSB M)
F29-21
trol /C resulted in an abnormal-
ity.
(DRPSB C)
F29-22
trol /K resulted in an abnormal-
ity.
(DRPSB K)
F29-23
Gamma sensor (PS11) improp-
erly adjusted while in the
Gamma sensor (PS11)
gamma correction control

F30-01
2nd transfer abnormality
High voltage unit /2 (HU2)
F30-02
Separation abnormality
High voltage unit /2 (HU2)
Motor
abnormality
F30-10
ADU conveyance drive board
communication abnormality
(CVDB)
Fan
abnormality
F32-01

When the fixing cooling fan /1
and /2 (M10, M36, M37) were
Fixing cooling fan /1 (M10)
ON, abnormality detection sig-
nal of either of them was con-
tinuously detected for the

specified time.
F32-02
When the drum unit fan /3
Drum unit fan /3 (M47)
ity detection signal was contin-
uously detected for the

specified time.
5-7
V ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
Fan
abnormality
F32-03
Causes
Resulting
operation
When the paper exit fan /F, /M,
Main body
and /R (M28, M27, and M26)
stops immedi-
Paper exit fan /F (M28)
were ON, abnormality detec-
ately and main
Paper exit fan /M (M27)
tion signal of either of them
relay (RL1) is
Paper exit fan /R (M26)
turned OFF.
the specified time.

F32-04
When charging air intake fan
Toner supply drive board
(TSDB)
ity detection signal was contin-
Charging air suction fan (M48)
uously detected for the

specified time.
F32-05
When the drum cooling fan /1
and /2 (M12, M13) were ON,
Drum cooling fan /1 (M12)
abnormality detection signal of
either of them was continuously detected for the specified

time.
F32-06
When the transfer belt cooling
fan (M11) was ON, M11 abnor-
Transfer belt cooling fan (M11)
mality detection signal was

continuously detected for the
specified time.
F32-07
In the case of the new type

While the paper exit fans /1, /
Paper exit fan /1 (M61)
2 and /3 (M61, M62 and M63)
are turned ON, an error
detection signal of either
Note:
M61, M62 or M63 is detected
Since the old type is not
for the specified period of
installed with the M61, M62
time in succession.
and M63, be sure to check
V ERROR CODE LIST
In the case of the old type
to see if the 25 DIPSW is set
For the M61, M62 or M63 that
as shown below:
is not installed, an abnormal
Old type: DIPSW 21-0-0
rotation is detected incorrectly.
5-8
Motor
abnormality
F33-01
F33-02
Causes
Resulting
operation
When the fixing motor (M29)
Main body
Conveyance drive motor
stops immedi-
(CVDB)
ately and main
Fixing motor (M29)
relay (RL1) is
time.
turned OFF.
When the pressure release
sensor (PS16) is ON, PS16 is
(CVDB)
not turned OFF within the
Fixing motor (M29)
specified time after the fixing
Fixing pressure release sensor
motor (M29) is turned ON.
(PS16)
When PS16 is OFF, PS16 is

not turned ON within the specified time after M29 is turned
ON.
F33-03
After the 2nd transfer pressing/
Conveyance drive motor (CVDB)
releasing motor (M34) is turned
2nd transfer pressing/releasing
ON, it is not turned OFF within
motor (M34)
the specified time.

F33-04
Abnormality of Web motor
(M54) or circuit was detected.
(CVDB)
Web motor (M54)
Fixing high temperature abnor-
high
mality (TH1)
AC drive board (ACDB)
temper-
Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2)
ature
(TH1) detection temperature
abnor-
over 250C was continuously
Fixing lower lamp (L4)
mality
Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1)
Fixing
F34-01

WARNING
When F34-**, F35-** or F36-**
(fixing temperature related
abnormality) occurs, be sure
to repair a defective part
before setting the 25 DIPSW
3-1 to 0.
If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is set to
0 without repairing a defective part, this may cause a
fire.
5-9
V ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
Fixing
high
temperature
abnormality
F34-02
F34-03
Causes
Resulting
operation
Main body
mality (TH2)
stops immedi-
ately and main
relay (RL1) is
turned OFF.
mality (TH3)

F34-04
F34-05
WARNING
When F34-**, F35-** or F36-**
mality (TH4)
3-1 to 0.
Fixing compensation high tem-
perature abnormality (TH1)
0 without repairing a defec-
tive part, this may cause a
fire.

F34-06
Fixing compensation high temperature abnormality (TH3)

F34-07
Fixing roller paper winding
V ERROR CODE LIST
abnormality
A condition in which the
detected temperature of the fixing temperature sensor /3
(TH3) is 25C higher than the
detected temperature of the fixing temperature sensor /1, is
detected for the specified
period of time in succession.
F34-08
Fixing roller paper seizure

abnormality
J31-02 occurred 4 continuous
times.
5-10
Fixing
low
temperature
abnormality
F35-01
F35-02
Causes
Resulting
operation
Fixing low temperature abnor-
Main body
mality (TH1)
stops immedi-
ately and main
relay (RL1) is
under 150C was continuously
turned OFF.
detected.
mality (TH2)

F35-03
F35-04
WARNING
When F34-**, F35-** or F36-**
mality (TH3)
3-1 to 0.
mality (TH4)
fire.

F35-05
Fixing compensation low temperature abnormality (TH1)

F35-06
Fixing compensation low temperature abnormality (TH3)

5-11
V ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
Fixing
sensor
abnormality
F36-02
F36-04
Causes
Resulting
operation
Fixing high temperature hardware
Main body
detection abnormality (TH2)
stops immedi-
ately and main
(TH2) detected abnormality signal
relay (RL1) is
continuously for the specified time.
turned OFF.
Fixing high temperature hardware

F36-05
F36-06
F36-07
Fixing low temperature hardware

WARNING
When F34-**, F35-** or F36-**
abnormality (TH2)
3-1 to 0.
fire.

F36-08

F36-09
Fixing compensation high temperature
V ERROR CODE LIST
hardware detection abnormality (TH1)

detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
F36-10
Fixing compensation low temperature

detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
5-12
Fixing
sensor
abnormality
F36-11
F36-12
Causes
Resulting
operation
Fixing compensation high temperature
Main body
stops immedi-
ately and main
detected abnormality signal continu-
relay (RL1) is
ously for the specified time.
turned OFF.
Fixing compensation low temperature
detected abnormality signal continu-
ously for the specified time.

F38-02
F38-03
F39-01
After the sub power switch

(SW2) is turned ON, fixing tem-
WARNING
perature sensor /1 (TH1)
When F34-**, F35-** or F36-**
detection temperature does not
reach 150C within the speci-
fied time.
After the sub power switch
(SW2) is turned ON, fixing tem-
3-1 to 0.
perature sensor /3 (TH3)
detection temperature does not
reach 150C within the speci-
fied time.
fire.
Fixing section has not been

set.
Scanner
abnormality
F41-01
At the home position search,
Scanner drive board (SCDB)
scanner HP sensor (PS1) is
Scanner motor (M1)
not turned on within the speci-
Scanner HP sensor (PS1)
fied time after the scanner

motor (M1) is turned ON.
Motor
abnormality
F41-02
When the polygon motor /Y
(M3) is started or when the
Polygon motor /Y (M3)
speed is switched, M3 lock sig-
Writing suction fan /1 (M43)
nal is not detected within the
specified time.
Writing exhaust fan /1 (M45)
When the write intake fan /1, /2
V ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
ERROR CODE LIST
(M43, M44), and write exhaust

fan /1, /2 (M45, M46) were ON,
time.
5-13
ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
Motor
abnormality
F41-03
Causes
Resulting
operation
When the polygon motor (M4)
Main body
is started or the speed is
stops immedi-
Polygon motor /M (M4)
switched, M4 lock signal is not
ately and main
detected within the specified
relay (RL1) is
time.
turned OFF.

fan /1, /2 (M45, M46) were ON,
time.
F41-04
When the polygon motor /C
(M5) is started or the speed is
Polygon motor /C (M5)
time.

fan /1, /2 (M45, M46) were ON,
time.
F41-05
When the polygon motor /K
(M6) is started or the speed is
Polygon motor /K (M6)
time.
V ERROR CODE LIST
fan /1, /2 (M45, M46) were ON,

time.
Scanner
abnormality
F41-06
When the optical scanning
returns, scanner HP sensor
Scanner motor (M1)
(PS1) is not turned ON within
the specified time after the

scanner motor (M1) is turned
ON.
Motor
abnormality
F41-07
Abnormal temperature of poly-
gon motor /Y (M3) was
detected.
5-14

Causes
Resulting
operation
Main body
abnor-
gon motor /M (M4) was
stops immedi-
mality
detected.
ately and main
F41-09
Abnormal polygon motor /C
relay (RL1) is
(M5) was detected.
turned OFF.
F41-10
gon motor /K (M6) was
Motor
F41-08
detected.
F41-11
Fan
abnormality
F42-01
Temperature detection board
(TDB) detected temperature
Temperature detection board
abnormality in writing unit /K.
(TDB)
fan /1, /2 (M45, M46) were ON,
either of them was continu-

time.
F42-02
When scanner cooling fan (M2)
Scanner cooling fan (M2)
detection signal was continuously detected for the specified

time.
Color
registration
abnormality
F45-01
Color registration base line cor-
rection /F resulted in abnormal-
Color registration sensor /F (PS8)
ity.
F45-03
Color registration base line cor-
rection /R results in abnormal-
Color registration sensor /R (PS9)
ity.
F45-07
F45-08
F45-09
When laser correction motor /Y
(M7) was ON, laser correction
Laser correction motor /Y (M7)
HP sensor /Y (PS5) was turned
OFF.
(PS5)
When the laser correction
motor /M (M8) was ON, laser
Laser correction motor /M (M8)
correction HP sensor /M (PS6)
was turned OFF,
(PS6)
When the laser correction
motor /C (M9) was ON, laser
Laser correction motor /C (M9)
correction HP sensor /C (PS7)
was turned OFF.
(PS7)
5-15
V ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
Color
registration
abnormality
F45-10
Causes
Resulting
operation
After the laser correction motor
Main body
/Y (M7) is turned ON, it is not
stops immedi-
Laser correction motor /Y (M7)
turned OFF within the specified
ately and main
time. Or, laser correction HP
relay (RL1) is
(PS5)
sensor /Y (PS5) installing posi-
turned OFF.
tion is abnormal.
F45-11
Laser correction motor /M (MB)
is not turned OFF within the
Laser correction motor /M (M8)
specified time after it is turned
ON. Or, laser correction HP
(PS6)
sensor /M (PS6) installing position is abnormal.

F45-12
is not turned OFF within the
specified time after it is turned
ON. Or, the laser correction HP
(PS7)
sensor /C (PS7) installing position is abnormal.

F45-20
Color registration correction
results in abnormality.

Image
processing
abnormality
E46-01
When scanning the image,
Writing unit /Y /M /C /K
sub-scan beam correction APC
cannot be applied. Laser does

not light up because 12VDC
power to drive the beam is not
supplied, MPC is not correct, or
because of fault laser.
E46-02
Address abnormality of FIFO
for scanner. When scanning
the image, compression of
V ERROR CODE LIST
scanned image data is not normally completed.

E46-03
Address abnormality of FIFO

for printer. Expansion of
scanned image data is not normally completed.
E46-05
FIFO interrupt error of com-
pression/expansion chip
occurred.
E46-06
Image data expansion abnor-
mality
MU-412
5-16
Image
processing
abnormality
E46-07
E46-08
Causes
Resulting
operation
Connection abnormality
Main body
between CCD board (CCDB)
stops immedi-
and image processing board
ately and main
CCD board (CCDB)
(IPB)
relay (RL1) is
CCD wiring harness
Index sensor output does not
turned OFF.
change by the execution of
APC. Index sensor cannot
detect the laser because the

polygon mirror does not rotate,
or because of the index sensor
out of position or defective
index sensor
E46-09
Connection abnormality
between index sensor /Y, /M, /
C, /K (INDX SB Y, M, C, K) or
laser drive board (LDB Y, M, C,
K) and image processing board
(IPB)
E46-12
After negation of SVV, com-
pression of scanned image and
evolution to page memory are
not completed.
E46-13
compression process from
scanner to memory is not com-
pleted within the specified time.

Evolution from scanner to page
memory is not completed
within the specified time. SVV
is not detected within the specified time.
E46-14
expansion process from mem-
ory to printer is not completed
within the specified time. Out-
V ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
ERROR CODE LIST
put from page memory to

printer is not completed within
the specified time. PVV is not
time.
E46-15
access to expansion device or
Program of overall control
some other improper process
board (OACB)
took place even though there

was no resource.
5-17
ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
Image
processing
abnormality
E46-16
E46-17
Causes
Resulting
operation
Main body
access to compression device
stops immedi-
or some other improper pro-
ately and main
board (OACB)
cess took place even though
relay (RL1) is
there was no resource.
turned OFF.
When processing the image,

filter coefficient cannot be properly prepared.
E46-19
When accessing the memory

device, software fault was
detected.
E46-21
Expansion process from mem-
ory to page memory is not
completed within the specified
time.
board (OACB)
Compression process from

page memory to memory is not
completed within the specified
time.
Evolution from memory to page
memory is not completed
Compressed data transfer from
memory to memory is not completed within the specified time.
E46-23
SVV is not turned OFF within
the specified time and there-
fore scanning of next page

cannot be started.
Shading correction abnormality
(GA abnormality)
Program of image processing
V ERROR CODE LIST
E46-24
board (IPB)
5-18
Image
processing
abnormality
E46-25
Causes
Resulting
operation
AOC/AGC adjustment abnor-
Main body
CCD board (CCDB)
mality
stops immedi-
Exposure lamp (L1)
Blocking cover and lens cover
ately and main
of scanner section are out of
relay (RL1) is
place.
turned OFF.

CCD board (CCDB) connec-
L1 inverter board (L1INVB)
tor is disconnected.
CCDB power cable is disconnected.
CCDB IC protector is broken.
Quantity of light of exposure
lamp (L1) is excess.
L1 does not light up.
E46-26
There is no correction data
Abnormality
which has been reserved by
detection pro-
resolution.
cess is per-
board (OACB)
formed but no
abnormality
code is indicated on the
operation
board and
main body
continues
operation.
Abnormality
code is indicated only for
data collection, list output and
KRDS.
E46-31
E46-32
Before completion of MPC,
Main body
APC initial sampling was
stops immedi-
ICP program
attempted.
ately and main
Execution of MPC was
relay (RL1) is
attempted during execution of
turned OFF.
V ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
ERROR CODE LIST
APC.
E46-35
Continuous page imaging

range abnormality.
Image cannot be evolved on
memory due to abnormal
image range on memory.
5-19
ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
Causes
Resulting
operation
When starting APC, PVV was
Main body
process-
ON (APC was executed during
stops immedi-
ICP program
ing
print)
ately and main
Image
E46-36
relay (RL1) is
abnormality
E46-40
Hard disk initialization abnor-
turned OFF.
mality.
Hard disk (HD-106)
Hard disk failure or improper
HDD I/F board (HDD IFB)
connector connection.
E46-41
JOB information could not be
E46-42
At the time of automatic hard
stored in the hard disk.

disk job deletion, route could
not be opened.
E46-43
Hard disk access error.

Hard disk failure or improper
connector connection.
E46-58
E46-59
Software failure.
CCD board was replaced but
I ROM program
I1ROM version is not compli-
CCD wiring harness of CCD
ant.
board (CCDB)
CCD board (CCDB) bunch or

connector is damaged.
F46-62
V ERROR CODE LIST
F46-63
F46-64
E46-66
Before completion of paper
Abnormality
mis-centering correction, scan-
detection pro-
ning was started (mis-centering
cess is con-
LCT drive board (LTDB)
correction cannot be com-
ducted but no
pleted).
code is indi-
Since the quantity of light of
cated on the
Exposure lamp (L1)
exposure lamp (L1) decreased,
operation
AGC was retried, though no
board and
CCD board (CCDB)
error occurred.
main body
PWM gammer curve was not
continues
properly prepared.
operation.
Abnormality
code is indi-
cated only for
data collec-
tion, list out-
put and
Shift failure at repeat.
KRDS.
5-20
Image
processing
abnormality
E46-80
E46-81
E46-82
Causes
Resulting
operation
Message cue was not enough
Main body
or destructed.
stops immedi-
Parameter value exceeds
ately and main
board (OACB)
allowable range.
relay (RL1) is
Message cue sender task has
turned OFF.
an undefined ID.
E46-83
Message receiving event is
E46-90
Abnormal access to memory
E46-91
Header address scanning
abnormality
MU-412
undefined.
E46-98
Page memory cannot be

secured for printing.
E46-99
Memory initialization abnormality.

Memory may not be correctly
connected.
Communication
abnormality
E50-01
12VDC abnormality.
Abnormality signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
E50-02
24VDC abnormality.
Abnormality signal was continuously detected for the specified time after the specified
time from REN /2 ON.
E50-03
(CVDB) 24VDC abnormality.
Abnormality signal of 24VDC
(CVDB)
for CVDB was detected after

specified time from REN /2 ON.
E50-04
Laser correction motor 5VDC
abnormality.
Abnormal 5VDC for laser correction motor /Y, /M, and /C
(M7, M8, and M9) was
detected.
E50-05
(CVDB) 12VDC abnormality.
Abnormality signal of 12VDC
(CVDB)
for CVDB was detected.
5-21
V ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
ERROR CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
Communication
abnormality
E50-10
Causes
Resulting
operation
Line status error and check
Main body
sum error was detected
stops immedi-
between the overall control
ately and main
board (OACB) and image pro-
relay (RL1) is
cessing board (IPB) and
turned OFF.
demand for re-transmission

was sent but recovery could
not be attained.
Re-transmission was
demanded and answered but
recovery could not be attained.
Space is not obtained in the
transmission ring buffer within
the specified time.
E50-11
Fan
abnormality
F52-01
Communication with the coin
vendor cannot be performed.
Coin vendor
When the DCPS cooling fan
DCPS cooling fan (M42)

specified time.
F52-02
When the IP cooling fan (M24) was
ON, M24 abnormality detection
IP cooling fan (M24)
signal was continuously detected

for the specified time.
F52-03
When the IPB cooling fan
IPB cooling fan (M25)

specified time.
V ERROR CODE LIST
Operation
board
abnormality
E56-02
After the sub power switch (SW2)
is turned ON, communication
between the printer control board
(PRCB), overall control board

(OACB), and operation board /1
(OB1) is not started.
E56-11
When the sub power switch

(SW2) was turned ON, unwritten control program 01 of operation board /1 (OB1) was
detected.
5-22
Main body
code
Operation
board
abnormality
E56-12
E56-13
Causes
ERROR CODE LIST

Resulting
operation
Main body
(SW2) was turned ON, unwrit-
stops immedi-
ten control program 02 of oper-
ately and main
ation board /1 (OB1) was
relay (RL1) is
detected.
turned OFF.


(SW2) was turned ON, unwritten control program 03 of operation board /1 (OB1) was
DF-319, AFR-20
detected.
DF-319
and
AFR-20
abnormality
E60-01
Communication error.

F61-01
F61-02
Registration sensor (PS301)
error.
Timing sensor (PS302) error.

Timing sensor (PS302)
F61-03
Reverse sensor (PS305) error.

Reverse sensor (PS305)
F61-04
F61-05
Paper exit sensor (PS306)
error.
Size VR (VR301) error.

Size VR (VR301)
F61-06
Non-volatile memory error.
F61-07
(SW2) was ON, unwritten control program of RADF control

board (DFCB) was detected.
F61-08
Paper feed motor (M301) error.
F61-09
Conveyance motor (M302)
error.
Reverse paper exit motor
(M303) error.
Reverse paper exit motor
F61-10
V ERROR CODE LIST
FS
(M303)
FS
abnormality
E70-01
F77-01
F77-02
Communication error.
Main body and
FNS stop
Shift unit does not reach the
operation
shifting position or home posi-
immediately
Shift motor (M702)
tion within the specified time.
and main relay
Shift HP sensor (PS718)
After the tray up/down motor
(RL1) is
(M703) was turned ON, tray
turned OFF.
Tray up/down motor (M703)
upper limit sensor (PS702) is
Tray upper limit sensor (PS702)
5-23
ERROR CODE LIST
FS
code
FS
abnormality
F77-03
F77-04
Causes
Resulting
operation
After the alignment motor /U
Main body and
(M705) was turned ON, the
FNS stop
Alignment motor /U (M705)
alignment HP sensor /U
operation
Alignment HP sensor /U
(PS708) is not turned ON or
immediately
(PS708)
and main relay
After the paper exit roller motor
(RL1) is
(M707) was turned ON, speed
turned OFF.
Paper exit roller motor (M707)
does not reach the specified

level within the specified time.
F77-05
F77-06
After the paper exit motor
(M708) is turned ON, paper
Paper exit opening motor
exit opening HP sensor
(M708)
(PS712) is not turned ON or
Paper exit opening sensor
(PS712)
After the stapler moving motor
(M711) is turned ON, stapler
Stapler movement motor (M711)
moving HP sensor (PS711) is
Stapler movement HP sensor (PS711)
not turned ON or OFF within

the specified time.
F77-07
After the clincher rotating motor
(M704) is turned ON, clincher
Clincher rotation motor (M704)
rotating HP sensor (PS714) is
Clincher rotation HP sensor (PS714)

the specified time.
F77-08
After the stapler rotating motor
Stapler rotation motor (M706)
rotating HP sensor (PS713) is
Stapler rotation HP sensor (PS713)

the specified time.
V ERROR CODE LIST
F77-11
After the stapler motor /F
Stapler motor /F (M714)
HP sensor /F (PS731) is not
Stapler HP sensor /F (PS731)
turned ON within the specified

time.
F77-12
After the stapler motor /R
Stapler motor /R (M709)
HP sensor /R (PS730) is not
Stapler HP sensor /R (PS730)

time.
F77-13
After the clincher motor /F
(M715) is turned ON, clincher
Clincher motor /F (M715)
HP sensor /F (PS733) is not
Clincher HP sensor /F (PS733)

time.
5-24
FS
code
FS
abnormality
F77-14
F77-21
ERROR CODE LIST
Causes
Resulting
operation
After clincher motor /R (M710)
Main body and
is turned ON, clincher HP sen-
FNS stop
Clincher motor /R (M710
sor /R (PS732) is not turned
operation
Clincher HP sensor /R (PS732)
immediately
After the stopper motor (M718)
and main relay
is turned ON, stopper HP sen-
(RL1) is
Stopper motor (M718)
sor (PS723) is not turned ON
turned OFF.
Stopper HP sensor (PS723)

F77-22
After the alignment motor /L
(M716) is turned ON, alignment
Alignment motor /L (M716)
HP sensor /L (PS724) is not
Alignment HP sensor /L
(PS724)
time.
F77-25
After the folding knife motor
(M719) is turned ON, folding
Folding knife motor (M719)
knife HP sensor (PS722) is not
(PS722)
time.
F77-26
After the folding conveyance
motor (M720) is turned ON,
speed does not reach the
(M720)
specified level within the speciTU-109,

TMG-3
abnormality
F77-31
After the conveyance motor
(M101) is turned ON, speed
TU drive board (TUDB)
F77-32
F77-33
F77-34
F77-35
After the cutter motor (M102) is
turned ON, cutter HP sensor
(PS106) is not turned ON
Cutter motor (M102)
Cutter HP sensor (PS106)
After the stopper motor (M103)
is turned ON, stopper HP sen-
sor (PS103) is not turned ON
Stopper motor (M103)
After the stopper release motor
(M104) is turned ON, stopper
release HP sensor (PS104) is
Stopper release motor (M104)
not turned ON within the speci-
Stopper release HP sensor
fied time.
(PS104)
After the press motor (M105) is
turned ON, press HP sensor
Press motor (M105)
Press HP sensor (PS105)

5-25
V ERROR CODE LIST
TU-109, TMG-3
fied time.
ERROR CODE LIST
TU-109
code
TU-109
abnormality
F77-36
PI-110
F77-37
PI-110
abnormality
F77-41
Causes
Resulting
operation
After the pressure motor
Main body and
(M107) is turned ON, pressure
FNS stop
HP sensor (PS112) is not
operation
Pusher motor (M107)
immediately
Pusher HP sensor (PS112)
time.
and main relay
After the holder motor (M106)
(RL1) is
is turned ON, upper limit PS
turned OFF.
sensor (PS110) is not turned
Holder motor (M106)
ON.
Upper limit PS sensor (PS110)
After the tray up/down motor /L
(M202) is turned ON, tray
PI drive board (PIDB)
upper limit sensor /L (PS209)
Tray up/down motor /L (M202)
or tray lower limit sensor /L
Tray upper limit sensor /L
(PS209)
Tray lower limit sensor /L

(PS210)
F77-42
After the tray up/down motor /U
(M201) is turned ON, tray
upper limit sensor /U (PS204)
Tray up/down motor /U (M201)
or tray lower limit sensor /U
Tray upper limit sensor /U
(PS204)
Tray lower limit sensor /U

(PS205)
F77-43
After the PI conveyance motor
(M203) is turned ON, speed
PI Conveyance motor (M203)
V ERROR CODE LIST
PK-120, PK-5, PK-507

PK-120,
PK-5,
PK-507
abnormality
F77-44
After the punch shift motor
(M802) is turned ON, punch
Punch drive board (PKDB)
shift HP sensor (PS803) is not
Punch shift motor (M802)
Punch shift HP sensor (PS803)
time.
F77-47
between FNS control board
(FNSCB) and punch drive

board (PKDB)
F77-54
After punch motor (M801) is
turned ON, punch HP sensor
Punch motor (M801)
Punch HP sensor (PS801)
5-26
FS
code
FS
abnormality
F77-81
F77-91
F77-92
Causes
ERROR CODE LIST

Resulting
operation
After the gate drive motor
Main body and
(M712) is turned ON, gate HP
FNS stop
Gate drive motor (M712)
sensor (PS716) is not turned
operation
Gate HP sensor (PS716)
immediately
and main relay
when sub-CPU in FNS control
(RL1) is
board (FNSCB) receives data
turned OFF.
when the main CPU in FNS
control board (FNSCB)
receives data.
F77-98

(SW2) was turned ON, unwritten control program of FNS
control Board (FNSCB) was
detected.
F77-99
Abnormality other than those

known to control program of
Communication
abnormality
E80-01
E80-02
Main body
(SW2) is ON, no response is
stops immedi-
received from the printer con-
ately and main
trol board (PRCB) within the
relay (RL1) is
specified time.
turned OFF.

communication abnormality
E80-03
Operation board communica-
E80-11
tion abnormality
ISW
abnormality
Printer control program
(SW2) was ON, unwritten

range of ISW was detected in
V ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
was detected.
the printer control program.

E80-21
VIF control program
(SW2) was ON, unwritten

range of ISW was detected in
the GIF control program.
E80-30
E80-31
In the data transfer by ISW,
Printer cable
regular header information
USB cable
cannot be received within the
PC parallel port
specified time.
PC USB port
In the data transfer by ISW,
Printer cable
check sum error or header
USB cable
error was detected in the
Program file abnormality
downloaded data.
5-27
ERROR CODE LIST
Main body
code
ISW
abnormality
E80-32
Causes
Resulting
operation
When transferring data by ISW,
Main body
Printer cable
data cannot be correctly written
stops immedi-
USB cable
to flash ROM.
ately and main
Program transferred board
relay (RL1) is
E80-40
Engine continued operation

without preparing image or process patch for the specified
time.
E81-01
A printer control ROM software is not installed that is corresponding to the material
V ERROR CODE LIST
changeover setting.
5-28
turned OFF.
Printer control program
ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION
2. ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION

In the event of following abnormalities, the failed unit can be isolated so that other functions may be temporarily operated.
If any abnormality code is issued, press the Auto Reset key and turn OFF and ON the SW2 (sub power
switch). The unit subjected to abnormality is isolated in the software system and other functions can be
operated. If SW2 is turned OFF or ON without correcting the faulty unit, the abnormality is detected and
the abnormality code is indicated again (a function effective only one time).
Error code
Error
Unit to be cut off
Remarks
18-01
Error in paper feed tray /1 up
Paper feed tray /1
Tray can not be selected.
18-02
Paper feed tray /2
18-03
Paper feed tray /3
18-05
Error in LT tray up
LT tray
13-02
LT paper feed motor abnormality
46-40 to 43
HDD abnormality
HDD
HDD can not be used.
77-22, 25, 26
Folding drive abnormality
Folding machine
Folding mode, stitch-and-
77-31, 37
Cutting drive abnormality
TU-109, TMG-3
fold mode, and cutting
77-41, 42, 43
CF tray drive abnormality
PI-110
mode can not be selected.

Cover sheet mode can not
be selected.
Punch rocking motor abnormality
PK-120, PK-5,
Punch mode can not be
PK-507
selected.
V ERROR CODE LIST
77-44, 47, 55
5-29
ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION
V ERROR CODE LIST
Blank page
5-30
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
VI DIAGRAMS
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
1.1
8050/CF5001/C500/8150 parts layout drawing
A. Switches and sensors

(1) Rear of the main body
[11]
[10]
[9]
[12]
[8] [7] [6] [5]

[4] [3] [2] [1]
Encoder sensor /Y1 (PS60)
[7]
Encoder sensor /C2 (PS65)
[2]
Encoder sensor /M1 (PS62)
[8]
Encoder sensor /K2 (PS67)
[3]
Encoder sensor /C1 (PS64)
[9]
Waste toner full sensor (PS52)
[4]
Encoder sensor /K1 (PS66)
[10]
Waste toner door sensor (PS53)
[5]
Encoder sensor /Y2 (PS61)
[11]
Encoder sensor /belt 2 (PS68)
[6]
Encoder sensor /M2 (PS63)
[12]
Encoder sensor /belt 1 (PS69)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
8050fs6600
6-1

(2) Top of the main body
[5]
[6]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
8050fs6601
[1]
DF reset switch (RS1)
[4]
APS sensor /S (PS3)
[2]
Toner supply unit open/close sensor (PS14)
[5]
[3]
APS sensor /L (PS4)
[6]
AAPS timing sensor (PS2)
(3) Front of the main body
[3]
[4]
VI DIAGRAMS
[2]
[1]
[1]
Front door open/close sensor (PS18)
[3]
Sub power switch (SW2)
[2]
Front door interlock switch (MS1)
[4]
Main power switch (SW1)
6-2
8050fs6602
(4) Right side of the main body
[1]
[1]
8050fs6603
Temp/humidity sensor (TEMP/HUM)
(5) Front side of the main body
[1]
1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
8050fs6604
6-3

(6) Write unit
[5] [6] [7]
[4] [3] [2] [1]
8050fs6605
[1]
Index sensor board /Y (INDX SB Y)
[5]
Laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5)*
[2]
Index sensor board /M (INDX SB M)
[6]
Laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6)*
[3]
Index sensor board /C (INDX SB C)
[7]
Laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7)*
[4]
Index sensor board /K (INDX SB K)
* Laser correction HP sensor does not attached to write unit /K.

(7) Process unit
[4] [3] [2] [1]
8050fs6606
[3]
[2]
[4]
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
6-4
(8) Developing unit
[4]
[3] [2]
[1]
8050fs6607
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
(9) Image correction unit
[2]
[3]
[1]
Gamma sensor (PS11)
[2]
[3]
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
8050fs6608
6-5

[4]
[5]
[3]
[6]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6609
[1]
Toner level detection sensor /K (TLD K)
[4]
Toner supply door open/close sensor (PS54)
[2]
Toner level detection sensor /C (TLD C)
[5]
Toner level detection sensor /M (TLD M)
[3]
Toner supply interlock switch (MS2)
[6]
Toner level detection sensor /Y (TLD Y)
(11) Paper feed tray 1 to 3
[4] [5] [6]
[9] [8] [7]

[3] [2] [1]
VI DIAGRAMS
[18] [17] [16]
[15] [14] [13]
[1]
Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29)
[2]
[3]
[12] [11] [10]
8050fs6630
[10]
Paper size VR/1 (VR1)
[11]
[12]
[4]
No paper sensor /1 (PS31)
[13]
Paper size /S1 (PS33)
[5]
[14]
[6]
[15]
[7]
Tray upper limit sensor /1 (PS30)
[16]
Paper size /L1 (PS34)
[8]
[17]
[9]
[18]
6-6
(12) Bypass feed unit
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
Paper size /LBP (PS49)
[3]
Paper size VR/BP (VR4)
[2]
No paper sensor /BP (PS47)
[4]
Paper size /SBP (PS48)
8050fs6610
(13) Vertical conveyance unit
[2]
[1]
8050fs6631
Vertical conveyance door sensor (PS51)
[2]
Vertical conveyance sensor (PS50)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
6-7

(14) ADU
[6]
[5]
[7]
[4]
[8]
[9]
[3]
[10] [11]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6611
[1]
Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27)
[7]
ADU conveyance sensor (PS20)
[2]
[8]
ADU reverse sensor (PS21)
[3]
ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23)
[9]
[4]
2nd transfer HP sensor (PS24)
[10]
Bypass conveyance sensor (PS26)
[5]
Conveyance lever sensor (PS55)
[11]
[6]
Reverse/exit sensor (PS19)
(15) Paper exit section (left side of the main body)
[2]
[1]
8050fs6612
[2]
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
6-8
Paper exit full sensor (PS12)
(16) Fixing unit
[1]
[8]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
8050fs6632
[5]
Thermostat /2 (TS2)
[6]
[3]
Thermostat /1 (TS1)
[7]
Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17)
[4]
Fixing pressure/release sensor (PS16)
[8]
VI DIAGRAMS
[2]
6-9

B. Loads
[12]
[13]
[14] [15] [16] [17]
[18]
[19] [20] [21] [22]
[5] [4] [3] [2]

[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[1]
1st transfer pressure/release motor (M19)
[13]
DCPS cooling fan (M42)
[2]
Drum motor /Y (M14)
[14]
Developing motor /K (M23)
[3]
Drum motor /M (M15)
[15]
Developing motor /C (M22)
[4]
Drum motor /C (M16)
[16]
Developing motor /M (M21)
[5]
Drum motor /K (M17)
[17]
Scanner motor (M1)
[6]
[18]
Developing motor /Y (M20)
[7]
IP cooling fan (M24)
[19]
[8]
IPB cooling fan (M25)
[20]
Tray up drive motor /1 (M40)
[21]
[22]
[11]
[23]
[12]
VI DIAGRAMS
[9]
[10]
6-10
[23]
[1]
8050fs6613
[1]
[2]
[1]
Scanner cooling fan (M2)
8050fs6614
[2]
Exposure lamp (L1)
[1]
Transfer belt cooling fan (M11)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
8050fs6615
6-11

(4) Right side of the main body
[4]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[7]
[1]
[1]
[5]
Writing intake fan /1 (M43)
[2]
Heater /1 (HTR1)
[6]
[3]
Heater /2 (HTR2)
[7]
Drum unit fan (M47)
[4]
Writing intake fan /2 (M44)
8050fs6616
(5) Left side of the main body
[4]
VI DIAGRAMS
[3]
[5]
[6]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6617
[1]
Paper exit fan /F (M28)
[4]
Paper exit fan /3 (M63) (New type only)
[2]
Paper exit fan /M (M27)
[5]
[3]
Paper exit fan /R (M26)
[6]
6-12
(6) Write unit
[7] [6] [5]
[4] [3] [2] [1]
[1]
[5]
Laser correction motor /Y (M7)*
[2]
[6]
Laser correction motor /M (M8)*
[3]
[7]
Laser correction motor /C (M9)*
[4]
8050fs6618
* Laser correction motor does not attached to write unit /K.

(7) Process unit
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6619
Pre-charging lamp /Y (PCL Y)
[4]
Pre-charging lamp /K (PCL K)
[2]
Pre-charging lamp /M (PCL M)
[5]
Belt separation claw solenoid (SD1)
[3]
Pre-charging lamp /C (PCL C)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
6-13

[2]
[1]
[1]
Gamma shutter solenoid (SD3)
[2]
8050fs6620
Color registration shutter solenoid (SD2)
[9]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[7] [6] [5]
[4] [3]
[1]
Toner bottle clutch /M (MC15)
[6]
Toner supply motor /C (M51)
[2]
Toner bottle motor (M53)
[7]
Toner supply motor /M (M50)
Toner bottle clutch /C (MC16)
[8]
Charger intake fan (M48)
[4]
Toner bottle clutch /K (MC17)
[9]
Toner supply motor /Y (M49)
[5]
Toner supply motor /K (M52)
[10]
Toner bottle clutch /Y (MC14)
VI DIAGRAMS
[3]
6-14
8050fs6621
(10) Paper feed tray 1 to 3
[7] [8] [9]
[6] [5] [4]

[3] [2] [1]
8050fs6633
[1]
Pick up solenoid /1 (SD7)
[6]
Paper feed clutch /3 (MC11)
[2]
[7]
Pre-registration clutch /1 (MC8)
[3]
[8]
[4]
[9]
[5]
(11) Vertical conveyance unit
[1]
Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
8050fs6634
6-15

(12) ADU
[9]
[10] [11] [12]
[8]
[6] [5]
[14]
[4] [3] [2]
[15]
[1]
8050fs6622
[9]
ADU reverse motor (M32)
[2]
[10]
2nd transfer pressure/release motor (M34)
[3]
ADU lock solenoid (SD6)
[11]
Registration motor (M30)
[4]
ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3)
[12]
Loop roller motor (M31)
[5]
ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1)
[13]
Pick up solenoid /BP (SD5)
[6]
Reverse/exit motor (M33)
[14]
Paper feed clutch /BP (MC6)
[7]
[15]
Tray up drive motor /BP (M35)
[8]
Reverse/exit solenoid (SD4)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
[7]
[13]
6-16
(13) Fixing unit
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
8050fs6635
[4]
Fixing motor (M29)
[2]
[5]
[3]
Web motor (M54)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
6-17

C. PCBs and others
[17]
[18] [19]
[20]
[21]
[22] [23]
[24]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[8]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[13]
[2] [1]
8050fs6623
[13]
HDD: option (HD-106)
[2]
Noise filter (NF)
[14]
HDD I/F board: option (HDD IFB)
[3]
Circuit breaker /2 (CBR2)
[15]
Extended memory: option (MU-412)
[4]
Circuit breaker /1 (CBR1)
[16]
Memory board (MB)
[5]
Transformer /LCT (TRNS2)
[17]
High voltage unit /1 (HV1)
[6]
Transformer /main body (TRNS1)
[18]
[7]
DC power supply unit /2 (DCPS2)
[19]
[8]
DC power supply unit /1 (DCPS1)
[20]
[9]
Drum drive board /Y (DRDB Y)
[21]
DC power supply unit /4:Option (DCPS4)
[10]
Drum drive board /M (DRDB M)
[22]
High voltage unit /2 (HV2)
[11]
Drum drive board /C (DRDB C)
[23]
[12]
Drum drive board /K (DRDB K)
[24]
Fixing heater control board: only in EU (FHCB)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
6-18
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6624
[1]
CCD board (CCDB)
[2]
Key counter (C (K))
[3]
L1 inverter board (L1 INVB)
[4]
[2]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[1]
8050fs6625
[1]
Black counter (C (BK))
[5]
OB inverter board (OB INVB)
[2]
Total counter (C (T))
[6]
LCD board (LCDB)
[3]
[7]
Touch panel board
[4]
[8]
6-19
VI DIAGRAMS
[3]

(4) Write unit
[2] [3] [4] [5]
[1]
[1]
[2]
8050fs6626
Temp detection board (TDB)
[3]
Laser drive board /M (LDB M)
(attached to write unit /K only)
[4]
Laser drive board /C (LDB C)
Laser drive board /Y (LDB Y)
[5]
Laser drive board /K (LDB K)
(5) Process unit
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6627
Drum potential sensor board /K (DRSPSB K)
[3]
Drum potential sensor board /M (DRSPSB M)
[2]
Drum potential sensor board /C (DRSPSB C)
[4]
Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRSPSB Y)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
6-20
[1]
[1]
[2]
Color registration board /F (CRB/F)
[2]
8050fs6636
Color registration board /R (CRB/R)
(7) Toner supply section
[1]
[1]
8050fs6628
Toner supply drive board (TSDB)
(8) ADU
[1]
Conveyance drive board (CVDB)
VI DIAGRAMS
[1]
8050fs6629
6-21
1.2
DF-319/AFR-20 parts layout drawing

[18]
[3]
[11]
[10]
[2]
[9]
[7]
[15]
[1]
[16]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[17]
[4]
[14]
[1]
[11]
Paper exit cover sensor (PS307)
[2]
[12]
Tray open/close sensor (PS308)
[3]
Reverse/exit motor (M303)
[13]
Size sensor /S (PS309)
[4]
Registration clutch (MC301)
[14]
Size sensor /L (PS310)
[5]
[15]
Paper exit solenoid (SD301)
[6]
Timing sensor (PS302)
[16]
Reverse solenoid (SD302)
[7]
Paper feed cover sensor (PS303)
[17]
Size VR (VR301)
[8]
No paper sensor (PS304)
[18]
[9]
Reverse sensor (PS305)
[19]
Size sensor board (SSB)
[10]
VI DIAGRAMS
2
[12]
[13]
6-22
8050fs6031
1.3
LT-211/C-208 parts layout drawing

[13] [14]
[15]
SW100 SD100 [1]
FRONT
[2]
[3]
[12]
[11] [10]
[4]
[9]
[1]
M100
[8]
M101 [16]
[7]
[6]
[5]
8050fs6700
Front door interlock switch (MS101)
[9]
Remaining paper sensor /4 (PS105)
[2]
Paper mis-centering sensor (PS120)
[10]
[3]
No paper sensor (PS108)
[11]
[4]
Paper feed sensor (PS107)
[12]
[5]
Feed sensor (PS106)
[13]
Top cover interlock switch (MS102)
[14]
Top cover open/close sensor (PS100)
[7]
Pre-registration clutch (MC102)
[15]
Paper feed clutch (MC101)
[8]
[16]
VI DIAGRAMS
[6]
6-23
1.4
FS-115/FS-215/FN-120/FN-9/FS-513/FS-606 parts layout drawing

[26]
[25]
[27]
[24]
[23]
[1]
[2]
[21]
[22]
[20]
[3]
[19]
[4]
[18]
[5]
[6]
[17]
[16]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
FRONT
[13]
8050fs6701
Sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701)
[13]
Clincher rotation HP sensor(PS714)
[2]
Paper exit opening HP sensor (PS712)
[14]
Folding passage sensor (PS726) (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only)
[3]
Gate HP sensor (PS716)
[15]
[4]
FNS inlet sensor (PS704)
[5]
Stapler movement motor (M711)
[16]
Stacker inlet sensor (PS705)
[6]
FNS interlock switch (MS701)
[17]
Stacker no paper sensor (PS720)
[7]
Clincher rotation motor (M704)
[18]
Stacker auxiliary solenoid (SD702)
[8]
Alignment HP sensor /L (PS724)
[19]
Stack auxiliary motor (M722)
(FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only)
[20]
Alignment HP sensor /U (PS708)
Alignment motor /L (M716)
[21]
Paper exit belt HP sensor (PS709)
[22]
Stacker inlet motor (M713)
Folding knife HP sensor (PS722)
[23]
Shift HP sensor (PS718)
[24]
Shift motor (M702)
Folding knife motor (M719)
[25]
Main tray paper exit sensor (PS706)
[26]
Sub-tray full sensor (PS719)
Stopper motor (M718) (FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only)
[27]
Paper exit opening solenoid (SD704)
[10]
VI DIAGRAMS
[14]
[1]
[9]
[11]
[12]
2
[15]
6-24
[12]
[13]
[14]
[11]
[1]
[10]
[2]
[9]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
8050fs6702
[1]
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS707)
[8]
Relay board (RB)
[2]
[9]
[3]
Counter rest sensor (PS715)
[10]
Gate drive motor (M712)
[4]
Bypass gate solenoid (SD705)
[11]
FNS conveyance motor (M701)
[5]
Tray lower limit sensor (PS703)
[12]
Paper exit opening motor (M708)
[6]
Tray up/down motor (M703)
[13]
Sub-tray paper exit motor (M721)
[7]
Folding conveyance motor (M720)
[14]
Paper exit opening roller motor (M707)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-25
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
Folding paper exit sensor (PS725)
[2]
[5]
[2]
[3]
Three-folding gate solenoid (SD706)
Folding full LED (LED729)
[6]
Stapler rotation motor (M706)
[7]
Stapler movement HP sensor (PS711)
Folding full sensor (PS729)
[8]
Alignment motor /U (M705)
Stapler rotation HP sensor (PS713)
VI DIAGRAMS
2
8050fs6703
[4]
[1]
6-26
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Clincher motor /R (M710)/ clincher motor /
Stapler HP sensor /R (PS730) /stapler HP
[5]
Cartridge switch/R (SW701) / cartridge
sensor /F (PS731)
Clincher HP sensor /R (PS732) / clincher

HP sensor /F (PS733)
switch/F (SW703)
Stapler motor /R (M709) /stapler motor /F
[6]
(M714)
Stapler switch/R (SW702) /stapler switch/F

(SW704)
VI DIAGRAMS
[3]
8050fs6704
[4]
F (M715)
[2]
[1]
6-27
1.5
TU-109/TMG-3 parts layout drawing

[11]
[1]
[10]
[2]
[3]
[9]
[8]
[4]
[7]
[6]
8050fs6705
[1]
[7]
Relay 2 (RL28)
[2]
DC power unit (DCPS)
[8]
Coil (COL)
[3]
[9]
Scrap box detection sensor (PS107)
[4]
Holder motor (M106)
[10]
[5]
Circuit breaker (CBR)
[11]
[6]
Relay 1 (RL1)
VI DIAGRAMS
2
[5]
6-28
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[12]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[11]
[1]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
8050fs6706
Scrap removal fan motor (M108)
[9]
Front door MS2 (MS2)
[2]
Scrap full LED (LED101)
[10]
[3]
Scrap full sensor (PS109)
[11]
Stacker S3 (MS3)
[4]
Entrance sensor (PS101)
[12]
Stacker door sensor (PS114)
[5]
Trimmer motor (M102)
[13]
Stacker MS4 (MS4)
[6]
Trimmer HP sensor (PS106)
[14]
Stacker full sensor (PS113)
[7]
Press HP sensor (PS105)
[15]
Pusher HP sensor(PS112)
[8]
Press motor (M105)
[16]
Pusher motor (M107)
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Stopper movement motor(M103)
[4]
Stopper release motor (M104)
[2]
Conveyance sensor (PS102)
[5]
[3]
Stopper release HP sensor (PS104)
6-29
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6707
1.6
PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 parts layout drawing

M801
Punch motor
PS804
Punch scraps box set PS
(PK-110 only)
PAPER EDGE SENSOR

Paper edge sensor
(PK-120 only)
PS802
Punch scraps full PS
PS801
Punch HP PS
PS804
Punch scraps box set PS
(PK-120 only)
PKDB
Punch drive board
(PK-110 only)
PS803
Punch shift HP PS
(PK-120 only)
M802
Punch shift motor
(PK-120 only)
PKDB
Punch drive board
(PK-120 only)
VI DIAGRAMS
FRONT
6-30
8050fs6119e
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

2.1
2.1.1
8050/CF5001/C500/8150 connector layout drawing

Relay connector
A. Main body rear side - 1
621 (W : 7 pin)
622 (W : 4 pin)
127 (BK : 8 pin)
128 (BK : 8 pin)

623 (GY : 18 pin)
493 (BK : 4 pin)
269 (W : 4 pin)
501 (W : 34 pin)
504 (W : 8 pin)
146 (W : 2 pin)
471 (W : 9 pin)
141 (W : 2 pin)
140 (W : 4 pin)
479 (W : 3 pin)
457 (W : 4 pin)
124 (BK : 8 pin)

123 (BK : 10 pin)
143 (W : 2 pin)
142 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6107
VI DIAGRAMS
456 (W : 7 pin)
6-31
B. Main body rear side - 2
377 (W : 22 pin)
304 (W : 6 pin)
292 (W : 9 pin)
341 (W : 7 pin)
293 (W : 2 pin)
345 (W : 4 pin)
496 (W : 22 pin)
342 (W : 7 pin)
354 (W : 7 pin)
346 (W : 4 pin)
294 (W : 9 pin)
355 (W : 4 pin)
343 (W : 7 pin)
295 (W : 2 pin)
347 (W : 4 pin)
358 (W : 6 pin)
344 (W : 7 pin)
296 (W : 9 pin)
348 (W : 4 pin)
297 (W : 2 pin)
291 (W : 3 pin)
126 (BK : 10 pin)

298 (W : 9 pin)
299 (W : 2 pin)
125 (BK : 10 pin)
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6108
6-32
C. Main body upper side
703 (W : 6 pin)
617 (W : 9 pin)
615 (W : 6 pin)
701 (W : 26 pin)
492 (W : 4 pin)
487 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6109
VI DIAGRAMS
614 (W : 3 pin)
161 (W : 4 pin)
6-33
D. Main body right side
652 (W : 2 pin)
653 (W : 2 pin)
654 (W : 2 pin)
655 (W : 2 pin)
443 (W : 12 pin)
466 (W : 8 pin)
465 (W : 11 pin)
452 (W : 8 pin)
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6110
6-34
E. Main body left side
754 (W : 3 pin)
(New type only)
751 (W : 6 pin)
(New type only)
468 (W : 6 pin)
469 (W : 6 pin)
483 (W : 6 pin)
482 (W : 12 pin)
8050fs6111e
Writing section
273 (W : 17 pin)
656 (W : 15 pin)
277 (W : 17 pin)
660 (W : 15 pin)
281 (W : 17 pin)
664 (W : 15 pin)
668 (W : 15 pin)
VI DIAGRAMS
F.
285 (W : 17 pin)
8050fs6112
6-35

G. Process unit section
361 (BK : 60 pin)
367 (W : 12 pin)
366 (W : 8 pin)
8050fs6113
H. Toner supply section
170 (W : 12 pin)
171 (W : 6 pin)
741 (W : 8 pin)
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6115
6-36

I.
Paper supply tray 1 to 3
566 (W : 2 pin)
567 (W : 2 pin)
568 (W : 2 pin)
401 (BK : 32 pin)
415 (BK : 32 pin)
429 (BK : 32 pin)
402 (W : 13 pin)
416 (W : 13 pin)
430 (W : 13 pin)
J.
409 (W : 5 pin)
423 (W : 5 pin)
437 (W : 5 pin)
8050fs6116
ADU section
511 (W : 11 pin)
514 (W : 6 pin)
557 (W : 3 pin)
505 (W : 8 pin)
555 (W : 6 pin)
502 (W : 34 pin)
521 (W : 6 pin)
556 (W : 3 pin)
508 (W : 4 pin)
509 (W : 3 pin)
530 (B : 3 pin)
570 (W : 4 pin)
551 (BK : 3 pin)
554 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6117
VI DIAGRAMS
552 (W : 3 pin)
6-37
K. Fixing section
130 (BK : 12 pin)
516 (W : 3 pin)
131 (BK : 12 pin)
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6118
6-38

2.1.2
Connector in the board
A. Printer control board
650 (W : 20 pin) 357 (W : 9 pin) 360 (W : 40 pin) 391 (GY : 18 pin)

651 (W : 20 pin)
384 (W : 30 pin)
572 (W : 10 pin)
(New type only)
340 (W : 28 pin)
700 (W : 26 pin)
572 (W : 10 pin)
(Old type only)
620 (BN : 7 pin)
600 (BN : 20 pin)
376 (W : 28 pin)
564 (W : 2 pin)
393 (W : 24 pin)
309 (W : 36 pin)
573 (W : 3 pin)
300 (BN : 18 pin)
353 (BN : 12 pin)
303 (W : 2 pin)
302 (W : 6 pin)
574 (W : 3 pin)
500 (BN : 34 pin)

467 (BN : 6 pin)
400 (BN : 32 pin)

2 (N.C.)
1 (N.C.)
4 (N.C.)
414 (B : 32 pin)
464 (BN : 19 pin)

736 (W : 24 pin)
442 (W : 34 pin)
150 (GY : 24 pin)
37 (N.C.)
8050fs6033e
VI DIAGRAMS
428 (BN : 30 pin)
459 (W : 10 pin)
151 (GY : 8 pin)
36 (N.C.)
730 (W : 32 pin)
301 (W : 4 pin)
6-39

B. AC drive board
120 (W : 5 pin)
156 (W : 5 pin)
152 (W : 11 pin)
121 (W : 8 pin)
153 (W : 4 pin)
155 (W : 5 pin)
8050fs6034
157 (W : 4 pin)
C. CCD drive board
511 (W : 50 pin)
8050fs6035
D. Conveyance drive board
534 (W : 12 pin) 536 (W : 6 pin)
3 (N.C.) 5 (N.C.) 539 (W : 22 pin)
524 (W : 7 pin)
548 (W : 6 pin)
518 (W : 15 pin)
1 (N.C.)
VI DIAGRAMS
527 (W : 15 pin)
569 (B : 4 pin)
6-40
513 (W : 6 pin)
503 (W : 34 pin)
510 (W : 11 pin)
507 (W : 6 pin)
8050fs6036
E. DC power unit/1
102 (W : 4 pin)
103 (W : 6 pin)
108 (W : 4 pin)
106 (W : 8 pin)
101 (W : 3 pin)
107 (W : 7 pin)
104 (W : 10 pin)
105 (W : 6 pin)
8050fs6037
F.
DC power unit/2
111 (W : 12 pin)
110 (W : 4 pin)
112 (W : 6 pin)
113 (W : 4 pin)
114 (W : 9 pin)
115 (W : 8 pin)
8050fs6038
G. DC power unit/3
109 (W : 6 pin)
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6100
6-41
H. Drum drive board /Y, /M, /C, /K
316,323,330,337 (W : 3 pin)
313,320,327,334 (W : 6 pin)
312,319,326,333 (W : 2 pin)
8050fs6039
311,318,325,332 (W : 9 pin)
I.
Fixing heater control board
158 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6040
J.
High voltage unit/1
731 (W : 8 pin)
732 (W : 8 pin)
735 (W : 3 pin)
733 (W : 8 pin)
734 (W : 8 pin)
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6041
6-42
K. High voltage unit/2
737 (W : 12 pin)
739 (W : 3 pin)
738 (W : 10 pin)
740 (N.C.)
8050fs6042
Image processing board
271 (W : 6 pin)
270 (BK : 60 pin)

260 (W : 68 pin)
253 (BK : 100 pin)
272 (W : 34 pin)
220 (W : 120 pin)
254 (BK : 120 pin)
280 (B : 34 pin)
9 (N.C.) 8 (N.C.)
8050fs6043
VI DIAGRAMS
L.
6-43
M. Index sensor /Y, /M, /C, /K
274,278,282,286 (GY : 5 pin)
8050fs6044
N. L1 inverter board
606 (W : 3 pin)
?? (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6045
O. Laser drive board /Y, /M, /C, /K
275,279,283,287 (W : 12 pin)
8050fs6046
P.
Memory board
141 (W : 40 pin)
142 (W : 20 pin)
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6047
6-44
Q. Overall control board
250 (W : 18 pin)
217 (BN : 50 pin)
258 (N.C.)
13 (N.C.)
251 (W : 16 pin)
270 (W : 60 pin)
252 (W : 4 pin)
9 (N.C.)
12 (N.C.)
257 (BK : 9 pin)
253 (W : 100 pin)
10 (N.C.)
256 (BK : 36 pin)
259 (BK : 4 pin)

254 (W : 120 pin)
255 (BK : 8 pin)
11 (N.C.)
6 (N.C.)
7 (N.C.)
14 (N.C.)
5 (N.C.)
8 (N.C.)
8050fs6048
R. OB inverter board
166 (W : 4 pin)
165 (W : 3 pin)
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6049
6-45
S. Operation board /1
176 (W : 6 pin)
173 (W : 6 pin)
172 (W : 12 pin)
175 (W : 4 pin)
174 (W : 14 pin)
8050fs6050
T.
Operation board /2
162 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6051
U. Operation board /3
158 (W : 3 pin)
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6101
6-46

V.
Scanner drive board
607 (W : 3 pin) 609 (W : 14 pin)
1 (N.C.)
601 (W : 20 pin)
603 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6052
602 (W : 4 pin) 605 (W : 3 pin)
W. Temperature detection board
670 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6053
X. Toner supply drive board
704 (W : 6 pin)
724 (W : 18 pin)
702 (W : 26 pin)
711 (W : 8 pin)
726 (W : 12 pin)
706 (W : 6 pin)
Gamma sensor
558 (W : 5 pin)
8050fs6055
6-47
VI DIAGRAMS
Y.
8050fs6054
708 (W : 11 pin)
705 (W : 7 pin)

Z.
Color registration board /F, /R
498 (W : 4 pin)
381 (W : 4 pin)
379 (W : 4 pin)
382 (W : 4 pin)
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6056
6-48
2.2
DF-319/AFR-20 connector layout drawing
A. DF drive board
14 (W : 9 pin)
13 (W : 15 pin)
3 (W : 7 pin)
12 (W : 5 pin)
2 (W : 6 pin)
1 (N.C.)
5 (W : 5 pin)
8 (N.C.)
10 (W : 8 pin)
6 (W : 2 pin)
8050fs6102
VI DIAGRAMS
7 (W : 9 pin)
4 (W : 6 pin)
6-49
2.3
LT-211/C-208 connector layout drawing

802 (W : 10 pin)
807 (W : 14 pin)
5 (N.C.)
804 (W : 12 pin)
805 (W : 11 pin)
4 (N.C.)
800 (W : 6 pin)
808 (W : 2 pin)
3 (N.C.)
801 (W : 11 pin)
803 (W : 6 pin)
2 (N.C.) 1 (N.C.)
VI DIAGRAMS
806 (W : 15 pin)
6-50
8050fs6103
2.4
FS-115/FS-215/FN-120/FN-9/FS-513/FS-606 connector layout drawing
A. FNS control board
61 (W : 2 pin) 51 (W : 32 pin)
33 (W : 38 pin)
12 (W : 24 pin)
62 (W : 40 pin)
8 (W : 8 pin)
1 (W : 18 pin)
52 (W : 6 pin)
10 (W : 4 pin)
11 (W : 9 pin)
43 (W : 8 pin)
FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only
42 (W : 5 pin)
7 (W: 6 pin)
5 (W : 22 pin)
6 (W : 5 pin)
41 (GY : 30 pin)
9 (W : 28 pin)
4 (W : 40 pin)
2 (W : 5 pin) 3 (W : 11 pin)
8050fs6104e
B. Relay board
6 (W : 30 pin)
5 (W : 30 pin)
10 (W : 8 pin)
8 (W : 34 pin)
4 (W : 24 pin)
9 (W : 2 pin) FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only

1 (W : 40 pin)
7 (W : 28 pin) FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only
8050fs6105e
VI DIAGRAMS
2 (W : 22 pin) 3 (W : 28 pin) FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 only
6-51
2.5
TU-109/TMG-3 connector layout drawing

402 (GY : 28 pin) 404 (GY : 18 pin)
406 (GY : 20 pin)
403 (W : 5 pin)
401 (GY : 40 pin)
405 (W : 4 pin)
408 (W : 3 pin)
407 (W : 2 pin)
8050fs6106
409 (W : 4 pin)
2.6
PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 connector layout drawing
A. Punch control board
69 (W : 6 pin)
70 (W : 15 pin)
64 (W : 2 pin)
65 (W : 5pin)
68 (W : 8 pin)
66 (GY : 9 pin)
67 (W : 3 pin)
63 (GY : 38 pin)
8050fs6120
B. Paper edge sensor
25 (W : 7 pin)
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6121
6-52
Time (sec)
6-53
8050fs6324
VI DIAGRAMS
2nd transfer
Separation AC/DC
Transfer Drum separation claw solenoid (SD1)
Developer bias AC /Y
Developer bias AC /M
Developer bias AC /C
Developer bias AC /K
1st transfer /Y
1st transfer /M
1st transfer /C
1st transfer /K
Charging /Y
Charging /M
Charging /C
Charging /K
Developer bias DC /Y
Developer bias DC /M
Developer bias DC /C
Developer bias DC /K
Drum motor /Y (M14)

Drum motor /M (M15)
Drum motor /C (M16)
Drum motor /K (M17)
Reverse/exit solenoid (SD4)

ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3)
1st transfer pressure/release motor (M19)

2nd transfer pressure/release motor(M34)
Reverse/exit motor (M33) F
R
ADU reverse motor (M32) F
R
Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17)

Reverse/exit sensor (PS19)
ADU reverse sensor (PS21)
ADU conveyance (PS20)
ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23)
Loop roller motor (M31)

Register out roller motor (M30)
F
Fixing motor (M29)
R
V_TOP


3.1

Item

TIMING CHART
3. TIMING CHART
8050/CF5001/C500/8150 timing chart
A. Full color, life size, ADF single sided original document of 2 sheets, double sided original document of 2 copies, paper feed tray /1 paper feed
6-54
Paper exit solenoid SD301
Reverse solenoid SD302
Paper exit sensor PS306
Reverse/exit motor M303
Reverse sensor PS305
Conveyance motor M302
Timing sensor PS302
CW 300 mm/s
Paper feed motor M301
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 900 mm/s
CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 150 mm/s

CCW 400 mm/s
Stop
CW 150 mm/s
CW 350 mm/s
CW 400 mm/s
CW 710 mm/s
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 300 mm/s

CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 138 mm/s
Stop
CW 710 mm/s
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 300 mm/s
Stop
CW 67 mm/s
OFF
ON
Registration clutch MC301
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
3.2
Registration sensor PS301
No paper sensor PS304
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
DF-319/AFR-20 timing chart
A. A4, life size, single-sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (1/3)
8050fs6310
6-55
8050fs6311
VI DIAGRAMS
Timing sensor PS302
CW 300 mm/s
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 900 mm/s
CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 400 mm/s
CCW 150 mm/s
Stop
CW 150 mm/s
CW 350 mm/s
CW 400 mm/s
CW 710 mm/s
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 300 mm/s

CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 138 mm/s
Stop
CW 710 mm/s
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 300 mm/s
Stop
CW 67 mm/s
OFF
ON
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded

TIMING CHART
A. A4, life size, single sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (2/3)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-56
Timing sensor PS302
CW 300 mm/s
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 900 mm/s
CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 400 mm/s
CCW 150 mm/s
Stop
CW 150 mm/s
CW 350 mm/s
CW 400 mm/s
CW 710 mm/s
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 300 mm/s

CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 138 mm/s
Stop
CW 710 mm/s
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 300 mm/s
Stop
CW 67 mm/s
OFF
ON
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
TIMING CHART
A. A4, life size, single sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (3/3)
8050fs6312
6-57
8050fs6313
VI DIAGRAMS
Timing sensor PS302
CW 300 mm/s
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 900 mm/s
CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 400 mm/s
CCW 150 mm/s
Stop
CW 150 mm/s
CW 350 mm/s
CW 400 mm/s
CW 710 mm/s
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 300 mm/s

CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 138 mm/s
Stop
CW 710 mm/s
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 300 mm/s
Stop
CW 67 mm/s
OFF
ON
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded

TIMING CHART
B. A4, life size, double sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (1/4)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-58
Timing sensor PS302
CW 300 mm/s
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 900 mm/s
CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 400 mm/s
CCW 150 mm/s
Stop
CW 150 mm/s
CW 350 mm/s
CW 400 mm/s
CW 710 mm/s
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 300 mm/s

CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 138 mm/s
Stop
CW 710 mm/s
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 300 mm/s

CCW 710 mm/s
Stop
CW 67 mm/s
OFF
ON
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
TIMING CHART
8050fs6314
6-59
8050fs6315
VI DIAGRAMS
Timing sensor PS302
CW 300 mm/s
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 900 mm/s
CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 400 mm/s
CCW 150mm/s
Stop
CW 150mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 400mm/s
CW 710 mm/s
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 300 mm/s

CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 138 mm/s
Stop
CW 710 mm/s
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 300 mm/s

CCW 710 mm/s
Stop
CW 67 mm/s
OFF
ON
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded

TIMING CHART
B. A4, life size, double sided original document, original documents of 3 sheets (3/4)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-60
Timing sensor PS302
CW 300 mm/s
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 900 mm/s
CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 400 mm/s
CCW 150 mm/s
Stop
CW 150 mm/s
CW 350 mm/s
CW 400 mm/s
CW 710 mm/s
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 300 mm/s

CCW 710 mm/s
CCW 138 mm/s
Stop
CW 710 mm/s
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
CCW 300 mm/s

CCW 710 mm/s
Stop
CW 67 mm/s
OFF
ON
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded
Paper unloaded
TIMING CHART
8050fs6316
6-61
8050fs6317
VI DIAGRAMS

(PS27)
Feed sensor (PS106)
Paper feed sensor (PS107)
Pre-registration clutch (MC102)
Paper feed solenoid (SD100)
Start button ON
3.3
Paper feed clutch (MC101)
Time (sec)
Item

TIMING CHART
LT-211/C-208 timing chart
A. A4, single sided, 2-sheet paper feed
Time (sec)
400 mm/s
400 mm/s
253 mm/s
M707
SD704
PS718
M702
M701
PS704
Main tray paper exit sensor PS706

Tray upper limit sensor PS702
UP
M703
Tray up/down motor
DOWN
Paper exit roller motor
Shift motor
Shift HP sensor
FNS Conveyance motor
670 mm/s
Code
FNS operation start signal ON
Copy 2 Page 2
6-62
Copy 3 Page 1
Copy 1 Page 1
Copy 3 Page 2
Copy 1 Page 2
Time (sec)
M707
SD704
PS718
M702

Tray upper limit sensor PS702
UP
Tray up/down motor M703
DOWN
400 mm/s
253 mm/s
PS704
Code
FNS Conveyance motor M701
Shift motor
Shift HP sensor
400 mm/s
670 mm/s
FNS Entrance sensor
Item
Copy 2 Page 1
3.4
FNS Entrance sensor
Item
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
FS-115/215/FN-120/9/FS-513/606 timing chart
A. Sort, A4, document of 2 sheets, 3-copy setting, single sided
8050fs6318
PS709
PS706
SD704
M709, M710
M714, M715
M711
M705
Code
PS704
M701
SD705
PS705
M713
M722
SD702
950 mm/s
660 mm/s M707
280 mm/s
8050fs6319
6-63
VI DIAGRAMS
PS707
UP
Tray up/down motor
M703
DOWN
Time (sec)
Item
FNS Entrance sensor
FNS Conveyance drive motor
670 mm/s
Stack drive motor
Stack drive solenoid
Close
Alignment motor /U
Open
Stapler movement motor
Stapler, clincher motor /F
Stapler, clincher motor /R
0
2
Copy 1 Page 1
13
15
16
30
Copy 1 Page 11
Copy 2 Page 11
29
Copy 1 Page 10
14
Copy 2 Page 10
28
Copy 1 Page 9
27
Copy 2 Page 9
26
Copy 1 Page 2 Copy 1 Page 3
18
31
32
FNS conveyance drive motor
M705
Code
PS704
M701
SD705
PS705
M713
M722
SD702
UP
Tray up/down motor
DOWN
280 mm/s
660 mm/s Paper exit roller motor
950 mm/s
M703
PS707
M707
M714, M715
M709, M710
PS709
Paper exit opening solenoid SD704
Stapler movement motor M711

Stack drive motor
Stack drive solenoid
Close Alignment motor /U
Open
670 mm/s
Copy 2 Page 4
20
Item
Copy 2 Page 3
19
FNS Entrance sensor
Time (sec)
Copy 2 Page 1 Copy 2 Page 2
17

TIMING CHART
B. Flat stapling at 2 points, A4, document of 11 sheets, 2-copy setting
VI DIAGRAMS
Time (sec)
6-64
10
11
Copy 2 Page 2
FNS Operation Open start signal ON
Copy 2 Page 1
Code
FNS Entrance sensor PS704
FNS Conveyance drive motor M701
Stacker Entrance sensor PS705
Stacker
670 mm/s
entrance motor 500 mm/s M713
Alignment HP sensor /U PS708
Alignment
Close
motor /U
Open M705
Alignment HP sensor /L PS724
Alignment motor /L Close M716
Open
Stapler motor,clincher motor /F M714, M715
Stapler motor,clincher motor /R M709, M710
PS723
Stopper HP sensor
Stopper motor Down M718
Up
Folding con670 mm/s
veyance motor 500 mm/s M720
Folding conveyance sensor PS725
Folding knife motor M719
Folding knife HP sensor PS722
Folding passage sensor PS726
Paper exit opening HP sensor PS712
Paper exit opening motor M706
Item
12
Copy 1 Page 1
2
4
14
Copy 1 Page 2
Copy 2 Page 3
13
15
16
Copy 1 Page 3
17
Folding conveyance sensor PS72

Folding knife motor M719
Folding knife HP sensor PS722
Folding passage sensor PS726
Paper exit opening HP sensor PS712
Paper exit opening HP sensor M708
400 mm/s Folding Conveyance motor

M720
800 mm/s
Time (sec)
Item Code
FNS Entrance sensor PS704
FNS Conveyance motor M701
Stacker Entrance sensor PS705
670 mm/s Stacker entrance motor M713
500 mm/s
Alignment HP sensor /U PS708
Close Alignment motor /U
M705
Open
Alignment HP sensor /L PS724
Close Alignment motor /L M716
Open
Stapler motor,clincher motor /F M714, M715
Stapler motor,clincher motor /R M709, M710
Stopper HP sensor PS723
Down Stopper motor
M718
Up
TIMING CHART
C. Stitch and fold, A4R, original document of 3 sheets, 2-copy setting, single sided
8050fs6320
8050fs6321
6-65
VI DIAGRAMS
Time (sec)
670 mm/s
500 mm/s

Folding knife motor
Down
Stopper motor
Up
Folding Conveyance motor
Folding exit sensor

FNS Entrance sensor
Gate drive motor
Close
Alignment motor /U
Open
Close
Alignment motor /L
Open
Stacker Entrance sensor
Item
SD706
M720
PS725
M718
PS726
M719
PS722
M701
M713
PS705
M716
M705
M707
PS709
PS704
M712
Code
16
17
18
19
20
10
11
13
14

Folding knife motor
Down
Stopper motor
Up
Folding Conveyance motor
Folding exit sensor
670 mm/s
500 mm/s
Item
FNS Entrance sensor
Gate drive motor
Close
Alignment motor /U
Open
Close
Alignment motor /L
Open
Stacker Entrance sensor
Time (sec)
12
SD706
M720
PS725
M718
PS726
M719
PS722
M701
M713
PS705
M716
M705
M707
PS709
PS704
M712
Code

TIMING CHART
D. Three-folding, A4R, original document of 3 sheets, 2-copy setting, single sided
Item
Time (sec)
6-66
Holder motor M106

Pressure motor M107
Press motor M105

Cutter motor M102
Stopper clear motor M104

Entrance sensor PS101
Stopper motor M103
Conveyance sensor PS102
-52
-51
Copy 1
82
83
84
Copy 2
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
3.5
Folding Conveyance motor M720 (FNS)
Code
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
TU-109/TMG-3 timing chart
A. Cutting mode, A3, 16 sheets, 2 copies
8050fs6322
6-67
8050fs6323
VI DIAGRAMS
Stopper clear motor M104

Holder motor M106
Pressure motor M107
Stopper motor M103

Conveyance sensor PS102
Press motor M105
Cutter motor M102
Time (sec)
Code Item
Folding Conveyance motor M720 (FNS)
Entrance sensor PS101
-52
-51
Copy 1
82
83
84
86
Copy 2
85
87
88
89
90
91
92
93

TIMING CHART
B. Through mode, A3, 16 sheets, 2 copies
6-68
SD704 Paper exit SD
PS706 Main tray paper exit PS
SD705 Bypass gate SD

PS705 Stacker entrance PS
M713 Stacker entrance motor
M705 Alignment motor /U CLOSE
OPEN
M714
M715
M709
M710
M707 Paper exit roller motor
PS709 Paper exit belt HP PS
Start signal for FNS ON
10
3.6
M701
Time (sec)
Symbol Items
PS37 Paper exit PS
M712 Gate drive motor PS
PS704 FNS entrance PS
Paper edge sensor
F
M802 Punch shift motor
R
M801 Punch motor
PS801 Punch HP PS
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 timing chart
A. Punch, 2-staple flat stapling, A4, 2 sheets, 3 copies set, single sided
8050fs6122
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
4. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM

4.1
DF-319/AFR-20 Overall Wiring Diagram

1
NO PAPER SENSOR
REGISTRATION
SENSOR
A
M301
PAPER FEED MOTOR
M302
CONVEYANCE MOTOR
M303
REVERSE/EXIT MOTOR
PS303
PS304
PS301
TIMING SENSOR
PS302
TRAY OPEN/CLOSE
SENSOR
PS308
SIZE SENSOR BOARD
D
SIZE
SENSOR/L
SSB
PS310
SD302
DFCB
PAPER FEED
COVER SENSOR
SIZE
SENSOR/S
PS309
SD301
SIZE VR
REVERSE SOLENOID
PAPER EXIT SOLENOID
VR301
MC301
REGISTRATION CLUTCH
F
REVERSE SENSOR
PS305
PAPER EXIT
SENSOR
PS306
G
PAPER EXIT
COVER SENSOR
PS307
Symbol
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
I
1
8
6-69
9
2
Symbol
Part name
Location
DFCB
RADF control board
4-A
M301
Paper feed motor
7-A
M302
Conveyance motor
7-B
M303
Reverse/exit motor
7-C
MC301
Registration clutch
7-F
PS301
Registration sensor
1-B
PS302
Timing sensor
1-C
PS303
Paper feed cover sensor
1-A
PS304
No paper sensor
1-B
PS305
Reverse sensor
1-F
PS306
Paper exit sensor
1-G
PS307
Paper exit cover sensor
1-G
PS308
Tray open/close sensor
1-D
PS309
Size sensor /S
1-E
PS310
Size sensor /L
1-D
SD301
Paper exit solenoid
7-E
SD302
Reverse solenoid
7-D
SSB
Size sensor board
2-D
VR301
Size VR
1-E
6-70
LT-211/C-208 Overall Wiring Diagram
835-2
MAIN BODY
836-1
836-2
24V
P.G.
P.G.
H/L
24V
815-11
815-10
815-9
LD
815-7
815-8
CLK
CW/CCW
815-5
5V
S.G.
CONT
815-4
815-3
815-2
815-1
830-1-2
830-2-1
826-2-1
832-1
813-2
813-1
810-10
810-9
810-8
810-6
810-7
810-4
810-5
810-3
MC101 MC102
HTR101
HTR102
839-3-3
835-1
HTR100
839-2-4
834-2
839-1-5
834-1
810-2
810-1
SW100
M101
PS100
826-1-2
PS115
PS120
PAPER FEED MOTOR
FRONT DOOR UPPER COVER

PREOPEN/CLOSE OPEN/CLOSE
REGISTSENSOR
TRAY DOWN SENSOR
PAPER FEED RATION
SWITCH
CLUTCH
CLUTCH
PAPER MIS-CENTERING SENSOR
833-3
815-6
833-2
833-1
832-3
832-2
B
MS102
817-2
839-5-1
839-4-2
817-1
MS101
816-2
816-1
Faston
Connector
Crimp
Relay connector
I
1
UP/DOWN
MOTOR
PS101
PS102
PS103
PS104
PS105
LOWER LIMIT REMAINING REMAINING REMAINING REMAINING

SENSOR
PAPER
PAPER
PAPER
PAPER
SENSOR/1 SENSOR/2 SENSOR/3 SENSOR/4
805-11 24V2
805-10 24V2
805-9 PGND
805-8 PGND
805-6 LCTM_EM
805-7 LCTMGAIN
805-5 LCTM_F/R
805-4 LCTM_CLOCK
805-3 LCTMCONT
805-1 5V2
805-2 SGND
804-11 24V2
804-12 CONT
804-9 24V2
M137
PAPER FEED PAPER FEED

ASSIST FAN/F ASSIST FAN/R
807-1 24V
841-1-14
807-2 CONT
841-2-13
807-3 SGND
841-3-12
807-4 PS
841-4-11
807-5 5V2
841-5-10
807-6 SGND
807-7 PS
841-6-9
807-8 5V2
841-7-8
841-8-7
807-9 5V2
841-9-6
807-10 PS
807-12 5V2
807-11 SGND
841-10-5
841-11-4
841-12-3
PS106
FEED
SENSOR
PS107
PS108
PS109
829-1-2
831-3
831-2
831-1
825-3
825-2
825-1
824-3
824-2
824-1
823-3
823-1
M136
811-1-3
811-2-2
811-3-1
812-1-3
812-2-2
822-3
822-2
822-1
821-3
821-2
821-1
820-3
820-2
820-1
819-3
819-2
819-1
818-3
812-3-1
M100
818-2
818-1
814-1
814-2
Symbol
804-10 CONT
804-8 SGND
804-7 PS
804-6 5V2
804-5 SGND
804-4 PS
804-3 5V2
804-2 SGND
804-1 DW_SW
802-10 24V2
802-9 LED
802-8 CLOCK
802-6 SI
802-7 SGND
802-5 SGND
802-4 -5V
802-3 5V2
802-2 SGND
802-1 VIDEO
807-13 PS
801-1 SOUT(TXD)
841-13-2
465-11
823-2
801-2 SIN(RXD)
464-11 SIN(RXD)
807-14 SGND
465-10
841-14-1
801-3 SGND
464-10 SOUT(TXD)
803-1 DRIVE
465-9
837-1-6
801-4 LTSCL
464-9 SGND
803-2 LOCK
465-8
837-2-5
801-5 LTRCL
464-8 LTSCL
803-3 PGND
465-7
837-3-4
801-6 LTSSD
464-7 LTRCL
803-4 DRIVE
801-7 LTCCL
465-6
837-4-3
465-5
837-6-1
464-5 LTCCL
464-6 LTSSD
LTDB
803-5 LOCK
801-8 SGND
837-5-2
465-4
803-6 PGND
801-9 LTSO_SIG
464-4 SGND
806-1 SGND
465-3
806-2 PS
801-10 LTRP_SIG
464-3 LTSO_SIG
806-3 5V2
801-11 LTNP_SIG
465-2
806-4 SGND
465-1
464-2 LTRP_SIG
806-5 PS
464-1 LTNP_SIG
806-6 5V2
PRCB
800-1 5V2
806-7 SGND
800-4 SGND
806-8 PS
466-1
806-9 5V2
466-2
106-3 5V2
800-2 12V
806-10 SGND
106-7 12V
106-6 SGND
800-5 SGND
806-11 PS
DCPS1
466-3
800-3 24V2
806-12 5V2
466-4
106-8 SGND
800-6 PGND
806-13 SGND
466-5
111-7 24V2
806-14 PS
466-6
111-10 PGND
806-15 5V2
466-7
153-4 24VAC(N)
808-2 DRIVE2
DCPS2
466-8
153-3 24VAC(H)
808-1 DRIVE1
ACDB
829-2-1
4.2
SD100
PAPER NO PAPER UPPER

PAPER
FEED
SENSOR
LIMIT
FEED
SENSOR
SENSOR SOLENOID
I
5
6-71
Symbol
Part name
Location
LT211
LT211
4-D
M101
Paper feed motor
8-A
M100
Up/down motor
5-H
M136
Paper feed assist fan/F
7-H
M137
Paper feed assist fan/R
7-H
MC101
Paper feed clutch
7-B
MC102
Pre-registration clutch
7-B
MS101
Front door interlock switch
9-C
MS102
Upper cover interlock switch
9-C
PS120
Paper mis-centering sensor
6-A
PS100
Upper cover open/close sensor
7-A
PS101
Lower limit sensor
5-H
PS102
5-H
PS103
6-H
PS104
6-H
PS105
6-H
PS106
Feed sensor
7-H
PS107
Paper feed sensor
8-H
PS108
No paper sensor
8-H
PS109
Upper limit sensor
8-H
PS115
7-A
SD100
Paper feed solenoid
8-H
SW100
Tray down switch
6-B
HTR100
Heater/1
5-B
HTR101
Heater/2
5-B
HTR102
Heater/3
5-C
LTDB
LT drive board
4-D
6-72
I
1
2
FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 ONLY
3
4
5
PS733
DRIVE1
DRIVE1
DRIVE2
DRIVE2
SGND
PS
5V
F_CST
5V
F_LS
5V
DRIVE1
DRIVE1
DRIVE2
DRIVE2
SGND
PS
5V
R_CST
5V
R_LS
5V
6
M705
PS708
ALIGNMENT
MOTOR/U
ALIGNMENT HP
SENSOR/U
PS705
PS709
PS720
STACKER ENTRANCE
SENSOR
PAPER EXIT BELT
HP SENSOR
STACKER NO PAPER
SENSOR
195-6
195-5
195-4
199-3
199-2
199-1
195-3
195-2
195-1
185-1
185-2
185-3
198-3
198-2
198-1
158-1
158-6
158-3
158-4
158-5
158-6
155-1
155-2
155-5
155-6
155-3
155-4
156-1
156-2
156-5
156-6
156-3
156-4
195-9
195-8
195-7
157-1
157-2
157-3
157-4
157-5
157-6
182-3
182-2
182-1
181-11
181-12
181-8
181-9
181-6
181-3
181-5
181-2
181-4
181-1
181-7
180-11
180-12
180-8
180-9
180-6
180-3
180-5
180-2
180-4
180-1
180-7
177-3
177-2
177-1
184-1
184-2
184-3
186-1
186-2
186-3
M713
183-1
183-2
183-3
187-1
187-2
187-3
M711
PS713
M706
PS714
154-1
154-2
154-5
154-6
154-3
154-4
1
2
3
RB
6-73
6-A15 5V
6-A14 PS
6-A13 GND
6-A12 5V
6-A11 PS
6-A10 GND
6-B3 5V
6-B2 PS
6-B1 GND
6-B10 24V
6-B11 24V
6-B12 A
6-B13 A
6-B14 B
6-B15 B
6-A9 5V
6-A8 PS
6-A7 GND
6-A1 24V
6-A2 24V
6-A3 A
6-A4 A
6-A5 B
6-A6 B
6-B6 5V
6-B5 PS
6-B4 GND
FS-215/FN-9/FS-606 ONLY
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
5-A7 24V
5-A8 24V
5-A9 A
5-A10 A
5-A11 B
5-A12 B
8-B17 GND
8-B16 PS
8-B15 5V
8-A12 24V
8-A13 24V
8-A14 A
8-A15 A
8-A16 B
8-A17 B
8-B1 M714 DRIVE1

8-B2 M714 DRIVE1
8-B3 M714 DRIVE2
8-B4 M714 DRIVE2
8-B5 5V
8-B6 F_LS
8-B7 PS731
8-B8 F_CS
8-B9 F_CST-IN
8-B10 F_CD
8-B11 SGND
8-A1 M709 DRIVE1

8-A2 M709 DRIVE1
8-A3 M709 DRIVE2
8-A4 M709 DRIVE2
8-A5 5V
8-A6 R_LS
8-A7 PS730
8-A8 R_CS
8-A9 R_CST-IN
8-A10 R_CD
8-A11 SGND
5-A15 5V
5-A14 IN
5-A13 SGND
5-A1 24V
5-A2 24V
5-A3 A
5-A4 A
5-A5 B
5-A6 B
5-B8 24V
5-B9 24V
5-B10 M715 DRIVE2
5-B11 M715 DRIVE2
5-B1 SGND
5-B2 PS733
5-B3 5V
9-A1 SUBIN5PI
9-A2 SD706 CONT
9-A3 PS722
9-A4 PS723
9-A5 PS724
9-A6 PS725
9-A7 PS726
9-A8 PS729
9-A9 PS730
9-A10 BMSET
9-A11 M716 A
9-A12 M716 A
9-A13 M716 B
9-A14 M716 B
9-B1 M719 DRIVE1
9-B2 M719 DRIVE2
9-B3 SUBOUT1
9-B4 M718 MODE
9-B5 M718 CLOCK
9-B6 M718 RESET
9-B7 M718 F/R
9-B8 M718 CONT1
9-B9 M718 CONT2
9-B10 M720 BRAKE
9-B11 M720 CONT
9-B12 M720 CLOCK
9-B13 M720 PLL
9-B14 M720 F/R
3-A1 NC
3-A2
3-A3
3-A4
3-A5
3-A6
3-A7
3-A8
3-A9
3-A10 SGND
3-A11
3-A12
3-A13
3-A14
3-B1
3-B2
3-B3 NC
3-B4
3-B5
3-B6
3-B7
3-B8
3-B9
3-B10
3-B11
3-B12
3-B13
3-B14
141
4
3
2
140
3
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
110
BY-PASS GATE
SOLENOID
PS715
SD705
133-1
133-2
133-3
10-1 24V
10-2 N.C.
10-3 DRIVE
10-4 N.C.
10-5 N.C.
10-6 N.C.
10-7 24V
10-8 CONT
752-1
752-2
752-3
752-4
752-5
752-6
753-1
753-2
753-3
753-4
753-5
753-6
29-1
752-6
752-5
752-4
752-3
752-2
752-1
PS719
124-1
124-2
124-3
FNS INTERLOCK
SWITCH
SUB-TRAY
FULL SENSOR
SUB-TRAY PAPER
EXIT SENSOR
106-1 MTXD
106-2 SGND
106-3 MCTS
106-4 MRXD
106-5 SGND
106-6 MRTS1
1-1 24V
1-2 5V
1-3 SGND
1-4 PGND
1-5 PGND
1-6 FGND
MS701
PS701
SUB-TRAY PAPER
EXIT MOTOR
STAPLER PAPER EXIT

UPPER LIMIT SENSOR
120-1
120-2
120-3
M721
COUNTER RESET
SENSOR
PS707
132-1
132-2
132-3
TRAY UPPER
LIMIT SENSOR
PS702
TRAY LOWER
LIMIT SENSOR
131-1
131-2
131-3
103-4
104-3
104-6
104-5
104-2
104-1
29-2
MAIN TRAY PAPER

EXIT SENSOR
TRAY UP/DOWN
MOTOR
PS706
PS703
M703
PAPER EXIT
OPENING
HP SENSOR
PAPER EXIT
OPENING SOLENOID
PS712
PAPER EXIT
OPENING MOTOR
PAPER EXIT
ROLLER MOTOR
SHIFT HP SENSOR
SHIFT MOTOR
GATE HP SENSOR
130-1
130-2
130-3
111-1
111-2
106-1
106-2
125-1
125-2
125-3
SD704
122-1
122-2
122-3
M708
M707
PS718
M702
PS716
7-1 SRXD
7-2 SGND
7-3 SRTS
7-4 STXD
7-5 SGND
7-6 SCTS
6-2 5V
6-3 SGND
6-4 PGND
6-5 PGND
6-1 24V-PS
12-A5 5V
12-A11 PS
12-B2 GND
12-A1 5V
12-A7 PS
12-B6 GND
1-B8 B
1-B7 B
1-B6 A
1-B5 A
1-B4 24V
1-B3 24V
3-10 24V
3-11 DRIVE
3-3 5V
3-6 PS
3-9 GND
3-2 5V
3-5 PS
3-8 GND
3-1 5V
3-4 PS
3-7 GND
2-3 5V
2-4 PS
2-5 GND
2-1 DRIVE-F
2-2 DRIVE-R
11-1 5V
11-4 PS
11-7 GND
10-3 24V
10-4 DRIVE
101-1
101-2
FNS ENTRANCE
SENSOR
GATE DRIVE
MOTOR
PS704
STACKER ENTRANCE
MOTOR
PS711
STAPLER MOVEMENT
MOTOR
STAPLER ROTATION
HP SENSOR
STAPLER ROTATION
MOTOR
SW703
SW704
PS731
M714
SW701
SW702
PS730
M709
CLINCHER ROTATION
HP SENSOR
M704
178-4
178-3
178-2
178-1
178-5
178-6
178-7
12-A3 5V
12-A9 PS
12-B4 GND
8-8 DRIVE
8-7 24V
M712
123-1
123-2
123-3
104-1
104-2 NC
104-3
104-4
104-5
104-6
104-7 NC
104-8
104-9
104-10
104-11
127-1
127-2
127-3
102-1
102-2
105
3
5
4
6
1
2
121-1
121-2
121-3
STAPLER MOVEMENT
HP SENSOR
STAPLE SWITCH/F
CARTRIDGE SWITCH/F
STAPLER HP SENSOR/F
STAPLER MOTOR/F
STAPLE SWITCH/R
CARTRIDGE SWITCH/R
SGND
PS
5V
M715
CLINCHER ROTATION
MOTOR
DRIVE2
DRIVE2
PS732
5-B12 24V
5-B13 24V
5-B14 M710 DRIVE2
5-B15 M710 DRIVE2
5-B4 SGND
5-B5 PS732
5-B6 5V
9-1 PS
9-2 GND
1-A1 5V
1-A3 P/S
1-A4 CLOCK
1-A5 F/R
1-A6 LOCK
1-A7 H/L
1-A8 PGND
1-A9 PGND
1-B2 24V
1-B1 24V
4
2
3
1
6
5
142
3
2
1
STAPLER HP SENSOR/R
STAPLER MOTOR/R
CLINCHER HP
SENSOR/F
SGND
PS
5V
179-4
179-3
179-2
179-1
179-5
179-6
179-7
176-3
176-1
4-B4 GND
4-B6 5V
4-B3 5V
4-B2 PS
4-B1 GND
11-3 5V
11-6 PS
11-9 GND
10-1 24V
10-2 DRIVE
12-A4 5V
12-A10 PS
12-B3 GND
12-B12 B
12-B11 B
12-B10 A
12-B9 A
12-B8 24V
12-B7 24V
1
2
3
FNS CONVEYANCE
MOTOR
CLINCHER
MOTOR/F
CLINCHER HP
SENSOR/R
DRIVE2
DRIVE2
PS729
194-1
194-2
175-3
175-1
LED729
PS726
4-A12 5V
4-A11 PS
4-A10 GND
7-B13 24V
7-B14 CONT
7-B1 5V
7-B2 BRAKE
7-B3 CONT
7-B4 CLOCK
7-B5 PLL
7-B6 F/R
7-B7 24V
7-B8 24V
7-B9 PGND
7-B10 PGND
7-B11 SGND
4-A3 5V
4-A2 PS
4-A1 GND
7-A13 24V
7-A14 DRIVE
4-A6 5V
4-A5 PS
4-A4 GND
M710
FOLDING FULL
SENSOR
FOLDING FULL
LED
193-1
193-2
193-3
174-1
174-2
174-3
PS725
160-1
160-2
153-1
153-7
153-3
153-4
153-6
153-5
153-10
153-11
153-8
153-9
153-2
191-1
191-2
191-3
170-1
170-2
170-3
153-1
152-1
152-2
190-1
190-2
190-3
173-1
173-2
173-3
SD706
M720
PS722
M719
PS723
171-1
171-2
171-3
4-A1 24V
4-A2 24V
4-A3 24V
4-A4 24V
4-A5 NC
4-A6 PGND
4-A7 PGND
4-A8 PGND
4-A9 PGND
4-A10 M713 CLOCK
4-A11 M713 RESET
4-A12 M713 CONT
4-A13 M704 A
4-A14 M704 A
4-A15 M704 B
4-A16 M704 B
4-A17 M705 A
4-A18 M705 A
4-A19 M705 B
4-A20 M705 B
4-B1 SG
4-B1 SG
4-B3 SG
4-B4 5V
4-B5 5V
4-B6 5V
4-B7 M711 A
4-B8 M711 A
4-B9 M711 B
4-B10 M711 B
4-B11 M706 A
4-B12 M706 A
4-B13 M706 B
4-B14 M706 B
4-B15 M709 CONT
4-B16 M709 F/R
4-B17 M710 CONT
4-B18 M714 CONT
4-B19 M714 F/R
4-B20 M715 CONT
5-A1 PS705
5-A2 PS708
5-A3 PS709
5-A4 PS711
5-A5 PS713
5-A6 PS714
5-A7 PS720
5-A8 F_CHP
5-A9 R_CHP
5-A10
5-A11
5-B1
5-B2 F_LS
5-B3 F_DHP
5-B4 F_CS
5-B5 F_LST
5-B6 F_CD
5-B7 R_LS
5-B8 R_DHP
5-B9 R_CS
5-B10 R_LST
5-B11 R_CD
E
1-A1
1-A2
1-A3
1-A4
1-A5
1-A6
1-A7
1-A8
1-A9
1-A10
1-A11
1-A12
1-A13
1-A14
1-A15
1-A16
1-A17
1-A18
1-A19
1-A20
1-B1
1-B2
1-B3
1-B4
1-B5
1-B6
1-B7
1-B8
1-B9
1-B10
1-B11
1-B12
1-B13
1-B14
1-B15
1-B16
1-B17
1-B18
1-B19
1-B20
2-A1
2-A2
2-A3
2-A4
2-A5
2-A6
2-A7
2-A8
2-A9
2-A10
2-A11
2-B1
2-B2
2-B3
2-B4
2-B5
2-B6
2-B7
2-B8
2-B9
2-B10
2-B11
12-A2 5V
12-A8 PS
12-B5 GND
M701
FOLDING PASSAGE
SENSOR
FOLDING EXIT
SENSOR
THREE-FOLDING GATE
SOLENOID
FOLDING CONVEYANCE
MOTOR
FOLDING KNIFE
HP SENSOR
FOLDING KNIFE
MOTOR
FOLDING STOPPER
HP SENSOR
M718
7-A7 24V
7-A8 24V
7-A9 A
7-A10 A
7-A11 B
7-A12 B
4-A9 5V
4-A8 PS
4-A7 GND
100-2
100-5
100-1
100-3
100-4
100-6
CLINCHER
MOTOR/R
H
151-2
151-5
151-4
151-6
151-3
151-1
G
191-4
191-5
191-6
FOLDING STOPPER
MOTOR
172-1
172-2
172-3
8-1 24V
8-2 24V
8-3 A
8-4 A
8-5 B
8-6 B
PS724
7-A1 24V
7-A2 24V
7-A3 A
7-A4 A
7-A5 B
7-A6 B
ALIGNMENT HP
SENSOR/L
M716
150-1
150-2
150-3
150-4
150-5
150-6
4.3
ALIGNMENT
MOTOR/L

FS-115/215/FN-120/9/FS-513/606 Overall Wiring Diagram

8
9
MAIN BODY
111-2
113-1
113-2
FNS CB
111-1
M722
STACKING ASSIST MOTOR
SD702
Symbol
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
STACKING ASSIST SOLENOID
Symbol
Part name
Location
Symbol
Part name
Location
FNSCB
FNS control board
1-C
PS718
Shift HP sensor
3-B
M701
1-A
PS719
Sub-tray full sensor
7-A
M702
Shift motor
3-A
PS720
Stacker no paper sensor
8-H
M703
Tray up/down motor
5-B
PS722
2-H
M704
Clincher rotation motor
4-H
PS723
Folding stopper HP sensor
2-H
M705
Alignment motor/U
7-H
PS724
Alignment HP sensor/L
1-H
M706
Stapler rotation motor
6-H
PS725
Folding exit sensor
3-H
M707
3-A
PS726
3-H
M708
Paper exit opening motor
4-A
PS729
Folding full sensor
3-H
M709
Stapler motor/R
5-H
PS730
Stapler HP sensor/R
5-H
M710
Clincher motor/R
4-H
PS731
Stapler HP sensor/F
5-H
M711
Stapler movement motor
6-H
PS732
Clincher HP sensor/R
4-H
M712
Gate drive motor
2-B
PS733
Clincher HP sensor/F
4-H
M713
7-H
LED729
Folding full LED
3-H
M714
Stapler motor/F
5-H
SW701
Cartridge switch/R
5-H
M715
Clincher motor/F
4-H
SW702
Staple switch/R
5-H
M716
Alignment motor/L
1-H
SW703
Cartridge switch/F
6-H
M718
Folding stopper motor
2-H
SW704
Staple switch/F
6-H
M719
Folding knife motor
2-H
M720
2-H
M721
Sub-tray paper exit motor
7-A
M722
Stacking assist motor
9-E
SD702
Stacking assist solenoid
9-E
SD704
4-B
SD705
6-B
SD706
3-H
MS701
FNS interlock switch
8-A
PS701
Sub-tray paper exit sensor
7-A
PS702
Tray upper limit sensor
5-B
PS703
Tray lower limit sensor
5-B
PS704
FNS entrance sensor
1-A
PS705
7-H
PS706
4-B
PS707
6-B
PS708
Alignment HP sensor/U
7-H
PS709
8-H
PS711
Stapler movement HP sensor
7-H
PS712
Paper exit opening HP sensor
4-A
PS713
Stapler rotation HP sensor
6-H
PS714
Clincher rotation HP sensor
5-H
PS715
Counter reset sensor
6-B
PS716
Gate HP sensor
2-A
6-74
4.4
TU-109/TMG-3 Overall Wiring Diagram

1
Symbol
Faston
Connector
Crimp
Relay connector
I
1
6-75
Symbol
Part name
Location
CBR
Circuit breaker
2-H
Coil
Coil
4-H
DCPS
DC power supply unit
5-H
LED101
Scraps full LED
2-D
M101
Conveyance motor
1-D
M102
Trimmer motor
3-D
M103
Stopper motor
3-C
M104
Stopper release motor
3-C
M105
Press motor
5-D
M106
Holder motor
7-B
M107
Pusher motor
7-B
M108
Scraps removal motor
1-C
MS2
Front door MS
3-H
MS3
Stacker MS3
6-D
MS4
Stacker MS4
7-D
PS101
Entrance PS
2-D
PS102
Conveyance PS
4-D
PS103
Stopper HP PS
4-D
PS104
Stopper release HP PS
4-D
PS105
Press HP PS
5-D
PS106
Trimmer HP PS
3-D
PS107
Scraps box detection PS
2-D
PS108
Exit PS
6-D
PS109
Scraps full PS
2-D
PS110
Upper limit PS
6-D
PS111
Lower limit PS
6-D
PS112
Pusher PS
6-D
PS113
Stacker full PS
5-C
PS114
Stacker door PS
5-C
RL1
Relay 1
2-H
RL2
Relay 2
2-H
TUDB
TU drive board
1-E
6-76
I
3
4
5
P
P
P
P
CN505-1
CN505-2
CN505-3
PS803
PUNCH SHIFT
MOTOR
PUNCH SHIFT HP
SENSOR
M802
PUNCH SCRAPS
FULL SENSOR
PS802
CN67-1 PS803 5V
H CN67-2 PS803 IN
CN67-3 PS803 SG
CN502-1
CN502-2
CN502-3
CN158-3
CN158-9
CN158-1
CN158-5
CN158-7
CN158-11
CN531-1
CN531-2
CN531-3
PUNCH SCRAPS
BOX SET SENSOR
PS804
PAPER EDGE
SENSOR
CN69-1 24V
CN69-2 24V
CN69-3 M802 DRVA
CN69-4 M802 DRVA
CN69-5 M802 DRVB
CN69-6 M802 DRVB
CN531-3
CN531-2
CN531-1
CN66-3 5V NC
CN66-6 IN NC
CN66-9 SG NC
CN66-1 PS802 5V
H CN66-4 PS802 IN
CN66-7 PS802 SG
CN504-1
CN504-2
CN504-3
CN504-1
CN504-2
CN504-3
CN504-4
CN504-5
CN504-6
CN504-7
CN66-2 PS804 5V
H CN66-5 PS804 IN
CN66-8 PS804 SG
CN68-1 5V
CN68-2 IN1
CN68-3 IN2
CN68-4 IN3
CN68-5 IN4
CN68-6 IN5
CN68-7 SG
CN68-8 N.C.
PUNCH HP
SENSOR
PS801
L
L
L
L
L
B
CN501-1
CN501-2
CN501-3
PUNCH MOTOR
A
M801
CN64-1 24V
CN64-2 PG
CN551-1
CN551-2
CN61-1 24V
CN61-2 PG
CN63-A 1 5V
CN63-A 2 5V
CN63-A 3 OUT-1 P
CN63-A 4 OUT-2 P
CN63-A 5 OUT-3 P
CN63-A 6 OUT-4 P
CN63-A 7 OUT-5 P
CN65-1 M801 DRV1
CN63-A 8 OUT-6 P
CN65-2 M801 DRV2
CN63-A 9 OUT-7 P
CN63-A10 OUT-8 P
CN63-A11 OUT-9 P
CN63-A12 OUT-10 P
CN63-A13 N.C.
CN63-A14 PS801 L
CN63-A15 N.C.
CN63-A16 N.C.
CN63-A17 PS802 IN H
CN63-A18 PS804 IN H
CN63-A19 N.C.
CN63-A20 N.C.
CN63-B 1 N.C.
CN63-B 2 N.C.
CN63-B 3 PKSET2 L
CN63-B 4 PKSET
L
CN63-B 5
CN63-B 6
CN65-3 PS801 5V
CN63-B 7
H CN65-4 PS801 IN
CN63-B 8
CN65-5 PS801 SG
CN63-B 9
CN63-B10
CN63-B11
CN63-B12
CN63-B13
CN63-B14
CN63-B15
CN63-B16
CN63-B17 N.C.
CN63-B18 N.C.
CN63-B19 SG
CN63-B20 SG
4.5
CN62-A 1 5V
CN62-A 2 5V
CN62-A 3
CN62-A 4
CN62-A 5
CN62-A 6
CN62-A 7
CN62-A 8
CN62-A 9
CN62-A10
CN62-A11
CN62-A12
CN62-A13 N.C.
CN62-A14
CN62-A15 N.C.
CN62-A16 N.C.
CN62-A17
CN62-A18
CN62-A19 N.C.
CN62-A20 N.C.
CN62-B 1 N.C.
CN62-B 2 N.C.
CN62-B 3 PKSET2
CN62-B 4 PKSET
P CN62-B 5 SIG_1
P CN62-B 6 SIG_2
P CN62-B 7 SIG_3
P CN62-B 8 SIG_4
P CN62-B 9 SIG_5
P CN62-B10 SIG_6
P CN62-B11 SIG_7
P CN62-B12 SIG_8
P CN62-B13 SIG_9
P CN62-B14 SIG_10
CN62-B15 M801CONT
CN62-B16 M801F/R
CN62-B17 N.C.
CN62-B18 N.C.
CN62-B19 SG
CN62-B20 SG

PK-120/PK-5/PK-507 Overall Wiring Diagram

7
8
7
8
6-77
9
A
D
D
PKDB
F
G
G
Symbol
Faston
Connector
Crimp
Relay connector
FNS CB
I
Symbol
Part name
Location
PKDB
Punch drive board
2-D
FNS CB
FNS control board
2-H
M801
Punch motor
3-B
PS801
Punch HP PS
4-B
Paper edge sensor
5-B
PS804
Paper scraps box set PS
5-B
PS802
Paper scraps full PS
6-B
M802
Punch shift motor
7-A
PS803
Punch shift HP PS
8-B
6-78
1
2
I
3
INDEX SB Y
LDB Y
INDEX SB M
5
LDB M
INDEX SB C
6
LDB C
7
Appendix-1
INDEX SB K
285- 7 - 11
285- 6 - 12
285- 5 - 13
285- 4 - 14
285- 3 - 15
285- 2 - 16
285- 1 - 17
287-6
287-5
287-4
287-3
287-2
287-1
280-4 5V3
280-3 5V3
280-2 SGND
280-1 SGND
267-4 5V2
267-3 SGND
267-2 SGND
267-1 12V
266-4 5V2
266-3 SGND
266-2 SGND
266-1 12V
608-1-3
608-2-2
608-3-1
616-1
APS TIMING
SENSOR
SCANNER
COOLING FAN
RESET SWITCH
SCANNER HP
SENSOR
280-1B LD5V
280-2B SGND
280-3B /S/H_K
280-4B /LDKENB
280-5B PWMK+
280-6B PWMK-
280-7B /LDKALM
280-8B /ALMKRST
280-9B MPCKCK
280-10B MPCKDI
280-11B MPCKLD
280-12B LDKJTB
280-13B LD5V
280-14B SGND
280-15B LDKIDX
MU-412
(OPTION)
280-16B SGND
CN220(PCi B to B)
260-B34 GND
260-B33 N.C
260-B32 WAKEUP260-B31 CPRDY+
260-B30 CTS260-B29 RXD+
260-B28 ONLINE260-B27 AC_DOWN+
260-B26 ENG_SLP260-B25 ENG_SET+
260-B24 RTS260-B23 TXD+
260-B22 PSIG0260-B21 GND
260-B20 PSIG1260-B19 PSIG2260-B18 GND
260-B17 PCLK260-B16 PSIG3260-B15 GND
260-B14 PSIG4260-B13 PSIG5260-B12 GND
260-B11 PSIG6260-B10 PSIG7260-B8 SSIG3+
260-B7 SCLK+
260-B5 SSIG2+
260-B4 SSIG1+
260-B3 GND
260-B2 SSIG0+
260-B1 GND
260-A34 GND
260-A33 N.C
260-A32 WAKEUP+
260-A31 CPRDY260-A30 CTS+
260-A29 RXD260-A28 ONLINE+
260-A27 AC_DOWN260-A26 ENG_SLP+
260-A25 ENG_SET260-A24 RTS+
260-A23 TXD260-A22 PSIG0+
269-8
269-7
269-6
269-5
269-4
269-3
269-2
269-1
HDD
280-17B IDXKJTB
280-1A LD5V
280-2A SGND
280-3A /S/H_C
138
280-4A /LDCENB
280-5A PWMC+
136 137 135 134
280-6A PWMC-
280-7A /LDCALM
280-8A /ALMCRST
280-9A MPCCCK
280-10A MPCCDI
280-11A MPCCLD
280-12A LDCJTB
280-13A LD5V
280-14A SGND
280-15A LDCIDX
280-16A SGND
280-17A IDXCJTB
272-1B LD5V
272-2B SGND
272-3B /S/H_Y
272-4B /LDMENB
272-5B PWMM+
272-6B PWMM-
272-7B /LDMALM
272-8B /ALMMRST
272-9B MPCMCK
272-10B MPCMDI
272-11B MPCMLD
272-12B LDMJTB
272-13B LD5
607-3 PGND
607-2 EM
607-1 CONT
616-2
611-1
611-2
611-3
610-1
610-2
610-3
APS
SENSOR/L
287-7
285- 8 - 10
287-8
281- 8 - 10
283-8
285- 9 - 9
281- 9 - 9
283-9
287-9
281-10 - 8
283-10
285-10 - 8
281-11 - 7
283-11
287-10
281-12 - 6
283-12
285-11 - 7
281-13 - 5
282-1
287-11
281-14 - 4
282-2
285-12 - 6
281-15 - 3
282-3
287-12
281-16 - 2
282-4
285-13 - 5
281-17 - 1
282-5
286-1
277- 1 - 17
279-1
285-14 - 4
277- 2 - 16
279-2
286-2
277- 3 - 15
279-3
285-15 - 3
277- 4 - 14
279-4
286-3
277- 5 - 13
279-5
285-16 - 2
277- 6 - 12
279-6
285-17 - 1
277- 7 - 11
279-7
286-4
277- 8 - 10
279-8
286-5
277- 9 - 9
279-9
281- 1 - 17
277-10 - 8
279-10
281- 2 - 16
277-11 - 7
279-11
283-1
277-12 - 6
279-12
272-14B SGND
131
132 133 130
283-2
277-13 - 5
278-1
14
281- 3 - 15
277-14 - 4
278-2
272-15B LDMIDX
272-16B SGND
G
HD
-106
283-3
277-15 - 3
278-3
272-17B IDXMJTB
HDD
IFB
281- 4 - 14
277-16 - 2
278-4
SCDB
283-4
277-17 - 1
278-5
272-1A LD5V
609-13 SIG
609-14 SGND
614-1-3
614-2-2
613-1
613-2
RS1
281- 5 - 13
273- 1 - 17
275-1
272-2A SGND
615-1-6
617-1-9
613-3
PS2
272-3A /S/H_Y
615-2-5
617-2-8
APS
SENSOR/S
PS1
281- 6 - 12
273- 2 - 16
275-2
609-6 5V2
615-3-4
617-3-7
612-1
612-2
612-3
PS4
283-5
273- 3 - 15
275-3
272-4A /LDYENB
609-5 PS
609-4 SGND
615-4-3
617-4-6
614-3-1
615-5-2
EXPOSURE
LAMP
SCANNER
MOTOR
PS3
283-6
273- 4 - 14
275-4
272-5A PWMY+
272-6A PWMY-
609-3 5V2
609-2 PS
609-1 SGND
609-12 SGND
609-11 PS
609-10 5V2
609-9 SGND
615-6-1
606-3
617-7-3
617-5-5
606-2
617-8-2
617-6-4
606-1
617-9-1
604-2
604-1
604-6
604-5
604-4
604-3
604-7
DSET
RTS
SGND
DRXD
CTS
SGND
281- 7 - 11
273- 5 - 13
602-4 PGND
602-3 24V2
602-2 SGND
602-1 5V2
601-1
601-2
601-3
601-4
609-8 PS
609-7 5V2
605-3 PGND
605-2 CONT
605-1 24V4
603-3 W
603-2 V
603-1 U
623-1A-9A
623-2A-8A
623-3A-7A
623-4A-6A
623-5A-5A
623-6A-4A
623-7A-3A
623-8A-2A
SGND
DTXD
283-7
273- 6 - 12
13
275-5
160
272-7A /LDYALM
12
272-8A /ALMYRST
11
275-6
273- 8 - 10
275-8
156
159
272-9A MPCYCK
F
158
273- 7 - 11
273- 9 - 9
275-9
157
272-10A MPCYDI
155
272-11A MPCYLD
154
601-5
601-6
601-7
601-8
601-9
601-10
601-11
601-12
601-13
601-14
601-15
601-16
601-17
601-18
621-1-7
621-2-6
621-3-5
621-4-4
621-5-3
623-9A-1A
623-8B-1B
5V
SGND
275-7
273-10 - 8
152
275-10
153
273-11 - 7
151
275-11
148
150
272-12A LDYJTB
149
273-12 - 6
147
275-12
144
146
272-13A LD5V
145
272-14A SGND
143
273-13 - 5
140
142
273-14 - 4
141
274-1
139
274-2
136
138
M1
272-15A LDYIDX
137
273-15 - 3
135
274-3
134
621-6-2
621-7-1
B
L1
272-16A SGND
272-17A IDXYJTB
115
L1 INVB
273-16 - 2
114
622-2-2
623-7B-2B
ADF (OPTION)
273-17 - 1
16
622-1-1
5V
PGND
PGND
274-4
15
623-6B-3B
623-5B-4B
623-4B-5B
24V
274-5
E
622-4-4
622-3-3
F/G
623-3B-6B
601-19
601-20
D
24V
F/G
623-2B-7B
5.1
623-1B-8B
623-1-1

APPENDIX
5. APPENDIX
8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/8)
9
M2
SCANNER UNIT 1/2

B
C
C
HD-106 (OPTION)
IP-921 (OPTION) 1/2
IP-901(OPTION) 1/2
141
139 140
LDB K
IPB 1/2
9
2
APPENDIX
Symbol
Part name
Location
ADF
ADF (option)
1-A
HD-106
HD-106 (option)
6-D
HDD
HDD (IP-921)
7-D
HDD IFB
HDD I/F board
5-D
INDX SB Y
INDEX sensor board /Y
3-I
INDX SB M
INDEX sensor board /M
5-I
INDX SB C
INDEX sensor board /C
6-I
INDX SB K
INDEX sensor board /K
8-I
IP-901
IP-901 (option)
7-D
IP-921
IP-921 (option)
7-D
L1
Exposure lamp
3-A
LDB Y
4-I
LDB M
5-I
LDB C
7-I
LDB K
8-I
M1
Scanner motor
2-A
M2
Scanner cooling fan
5-A
MU-412
MU-412 (option)
3-F
PS1
Scanner HP sensor
4-A
PS2
APS timing sensor
4-A
PS3
APS sensor /S
3-A
PS4
APS sensor /L
4-A
RS1
DF Reset switch
4-A
L1INVB
L1 inverter
3-B
IPB
Image processing board
3-F
SCDB
Scanner drive board
2-C
Appendix-2
I
161
2
162
163
164
165
166
167
3
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
177
10
7
5 6
8 9
5
MB
USB
OACB
DB-9
RJ-45
IP-901(OPTION) 2/2
251-16 SGND
251-15 5V
251-14 SGND
170-1-12
170-2-11
170-3-10
170-4-9
170-5-8
170-6-7
172-1
172-2
172-3
172-4
172-5
172-6
172-7
172-8
172-9
14PIN
165-2 GND
176-2
158-1 LCD_24V
165-3 5V
176-1
158-2 LCD_ADJ
DSP_OFF
176-6
NC
174- 1
158-3 SGND
FLM
174- 2
176-5
LP
174- 3
176-4
CP
174- 4
165-1 PWM
5V
174- 5
LCDB
176-3
GND
LD1
174- 6
LD2
174-10
LCD_24V
LD3
174-11
174- 7
LCD_24V
174-12
LD0
LCD_ADJ
174-14
174-13
174- 8
X2CONT
175-1
174- 9
Y2CONT
175-2
251-13 SW_SIG
251-12 ST_SIG
251-11 ST_LED
251-10 WT_LED
251-9 CARD_TXD
251-8 CARD_RXD
251-7 CARDIN
251-6 REQ_OP
170-7-6
170-8-5
170-9-4
172-10
172-11
172-12
CT6PIN
251-5 REQ_M
251-4 ACK_OP
251-3 ACK_M
170-10-3
170-11-2
4PIN
256-1 HT_CLOCK
256-2 CENTD0
256-3 CENTD1
256-4 CENTD2
256-5 CENTD3
256-6 CENTD4
256-7 CENTD5
256-8 CENTD6
256-9 CENTD7
256-10 PR_CLOCK
256-11 PR_BUSY
256-12 ADREQ
256-13 XFLAG
256-14 HT_BUSY
256-15 N.C
256-16 N.C
256-17 N.C
256-18 N.C
256-19 GND
256-20 GND
256-21 GND
256-22 GND
256-23 GND
256-24 GND
256-25 GND
256-26 GND
256-27 GND
256-28 N.C
256-29 N.C
256-30 N.C
256-31 INT_ISWB
256-32 DAVALB
256-33 N.C
256-34 N.C
256-35 N.C
256-36 AC1284
251-1 DATA_M
251-2 DATA_OP
170-12-1
75 78
77 79
76
173-6
173-5 12V
173-4 SGND
X1CONT
175-3
TOUCH PANEL
BOARD
171-6-1
171-5-2
171-4-3
173-3 SGND
Y1CONT
175-4
259-1 VBUS
259-2 D259-3 D+
259-4 GND
IPB 2/2
173-2 5V2
171-3-4
IP-921 (OPTION) 2/2

173-1 5V2
171-2-5
CCDB
252-4 AC_OFF
E
171-1-6
SCANNER UNIT 2/2
252-3 REM/1
252-2 SGND
551-50
551-49
551-48
551-47
551-46
551-45
551-44
551-43
551-42
551-41
551-40
551-39
551-38
551-37
551-36
551-35
551-34
551-33
551-32
551-31
551-30
551-29
551-28
551-27
551-26
551-25
551-24
551-23
551-22
551-21
551-20
551-19
551-18
551-17
551-16
551-15
551-14
551-13
551-12
551-11
551-10
551-9
551-8
551-7
551-6
551-5
551-4
551-3
551-2
551-1
252-1 5V1
250-18
250-17
250-16
250-15
250-14
250-13
250-12
250-11
250-10
250-9
250-8
217-50 GND
217-49 AD_12V
217-48 AD_12V
217-47 GND
217-46 AD_5V
217-45 AD_5V
217-44 AD_5V
217-43 AD_5V
217-42 AD_5V
217-41 ADRST
217-40 LVDSCK1+
217-39 LVDSCK1217-38 GND
217-37 AD_D4+
217-36 AD_D4217-35 GND
217-34 AD_D3+
217-33 AD_D3217-32 GND
217-31 LVDSCK0+
217-30 LVDSCK0217-29 GND
217-28 AD_D2+
217-27 AD_D2217-26 GND
217-25 AD_D1+
217-24 AD_D1217-23 GND
217-22 AD_D0+
217-21 AD_D0217-20 GND
217-19 SDO
217-18 SDI
217-17 /SEN
217-16 SCK
217-15 GND
217-14 LVDSCK217-13 LVDSCK+
217-12 GND
217-11 RCK217-10 RCK+
217-9 GND
217-8 TCK217-7 TCK+
217-6 GND
217-5 BCLAMP
217-4 ACLAMP
217-3 CLAMP
217-2 TG
217-1 GND
250-7
250-6
250-5
250-4
250-3
250-2
250-1
271-6 SGND
271-5 3.5V
271-4 SGND
271-3 5V2
271-2 SGND
271-1 12V
5.2
260-A21 GND
260-A20 PSIG1+
260-A19 PSIG2+
260-A18 GND
260-A17 PCLK+
260-A16 PSIG3+
260-A15 GND
260-A14 PSIG4+
260-A13 PSIG5+
260-A12 GND
260-A11 PSIG6+
260-A10 PSIG7+
260-A9 GND
260-A8 SSIG3260-A7 SCLK260-A6 GND
260-A5 SSIG2260-A4 SSIG1260-A3 GND
260-A2 SSIG0260-A1 GND

APPENDIX

7
8
161-4-1
FT-32
161-3-2
FT-31
161-2-3
161-1-4
162-2
7
8
Appendix-3
OB_INVB
OB3
6PIN
CT12PIN
OB1
SW2
Amphenol 36pin
SUB POWER
SWITCH
162-1
162-3
OB2
255-1 TX+
255-2 TX255-3 RX+
255-4 GND
255-5 GND
255-6 RX255-7 GND
255-8 GND
LAN I/F
257-1 DCD
257-2 RXD
257-3 TXD
257-4 DTR
257-5 GND
257-6 DSR
257-7 RTS
257-8 CTS
257-9 RI
KRDS I/F
(RS-232)
3
1 2 4
178
176
APPENDIX
Symbol
Part name
Location
SW2
Sub power switch
8-D
OB INVB
OB inverter board
7-A
LCDB
LCD board
6-A
Touch panel board
5-A
CCDB
CCD board
2-A
OB1
Operation board /1
5-C
OB2
Operation board /2
8-E
OB3
Operation board /3
8-A
OACB
Overall control board
3-F
MB
Memory board
6-G
Appendix-4
1
TDS Y
TDS M
TDS C
TONER
DENSITY
SENSOR/Y
TONER
DENSITY
SENSOR/M
TONER
DENSITY
SENSOR/C
2
3
DRPSB Y DRPSB M DRPSB C
4
DRPSB K
DRPS Y
DRPS M
DRPS C
DRPS K
DRUM POTENTIAL
SENSOR BOARD/Y
DRUM POTENTIAL
SENSOR BOARD/M
DRUM POTENTIAL
SENSOR BOARD/C
DRUM POTENTIAL
SENSOR BOARD/K
SD1
PROCESS UNIT
5
COLOR REGISTRATION
SENSOR/F
PS8
381-4
PS11
SD3
PS12 PS13
PS9
Appendix-5
COLOR REGISTRATION
SENSOR/R
M13
PS14
TONER SUPPLY DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR
IMAGE CORRECTION UNIT
M12
DRUM COOLING FAN/2
M11
487-2
487-1
492-3
492-4
389-1
490-4-1
490-3-2
490-2-3
490-1-4
489-4-1
489-3-2
489-2-3
496-11B-1B
496-10B-2B
496-9B-3B
496-8B-4B
496-7B-5B
496-6B-6B
496-5B-7B
496-4B-8B
496-3B-9B
496-2B-10B
496-1B-11B
496-6A-6A
496-5A-7A
496-4A-8A
496-3A-9A
496-2A-10A
384-15B 5V
384-14B PS
384-13B SGND
384-12B SGND
384-11B H/L
384-10B EM
384-9B DRIVE
384-8B SGND
384-7B H/L
384-6B EM
384-5B DRIVE
384-4B GND
384-3B H/L
384-2B EM
384-1B DRIVE
384-15A
384-14A SHUT_24V
384-13A TCNT_DRIVE1
384-12A SHUT_24V
384-11A TCNT_DRIVE2
384-10A 5V
384-9A PS
384-8A SGND
384-7A 5V
384-6A PS
384-5A SGND
384-4A SGND
384-3A H/L
384-2A EM
384-1A DRIVE
376-14B N.C
376-13B N.C
376-12B N.C
376-11B DRIVE
376-10B 24V2
376-9B DS2_SIG
376-8B 12V
376-7B SGND
376-6B DS2_CNT
376-5B DS2_VREF
376-4B 5V2
376-3B SGND
376-2B CREG2LED
376-14A N.C
376-1B CREG2MON
376-13A N.C
376-12A N.C
376-6A 5V2
376-5A SGND
376-4A CREG1LED
376-3A CREG1MON
376-2A DRIVE
376-1A 24V2
651-1 SGND
651-2 KHP_SIG
651-3 5V2
651-4 TEMP.ERROR
651-5 LOCK
651-6 CLOCK
651-7 CONT
651-8 5V2
651-9 5V2
551-10 A
651-11 A
651-12 B
651-13 B
651-14 SGND
651-15 PS
651-16 5V2
651-17 TEMP.ERROR
651-18 LOCK
651-19 CLOCK
651-20 CONT
650-1B 5V2
650-2B 5V2
550-3B A
650-4B A
650-5B B
650-6B B
650-7B SGND
650-8B PS
650-9B 5V2
650-10B TEMP.ERROR
663-1
660-15-1
655-2-1
655-1-2
667-3
667-4
667-2
667-1
664-12-4
664-13-3
664-14-2
664-15-1
668-15-1
668-14-2
668-13-3
668-12-4
668-11-5
668-10-6
668-9-7
668-8-8
668-7-9
668-6-10
668-5-11
668-4-12
668-3-13
668-2-14
669-6
669-5
669-4
669-3
669-2
669-1
667-5
664-11-5
668-1-15
667-6
665-6
665-5
665-4
665-3
665-2
664-10-6
664-9-7
664-8-8
664-7-9
664-6-10
664-5-11
664-4-12
664-3-13
665-1
663-2
660-14-2
664-1-15
663-4
660-13-3
664-2-14
663-3
660-12-4
654-2-1
663-5
660-11-5
654-1-2
663-6
661-6
661-5
661-4
661-3
660-10-6
660-9-7
660-8-8
660-7-9
660-6-10
660-5-11
660-4-12
661-2
670-3
670-2
670-1
666-3
666-2
666-1
662-3
662-2
662-1
389-2
389-3
487-3
492-2
489-1-4
487-4
492-1
390-2-1
390-1-2
559-2-1
559-1-2
483-6-1
483-5-2
483-4-3
483-3-4
483-2-5
483-1-6
377-11B-1B
377-10B-2B
377-9B-3B
377-8B-4B
377-7B-5B
377-6B-6B
377-5B-7B
377-4B-8B
377-3B-9B
377-2B-10B
377-1B-11B
377-6A-6A
377-5A-7A
377-4A-8A
377-3A-9A
377-2A-10A
496-1A-11A
564-1 24V2
650-11B LOCK
650-12B CLOCK
660-3-13
TDB
DRUM COOLING FAN/1
488-3-1
361D-1-18
475-1-2
564-2 DRIVE
650-13B CONT
M6
TRANSFER BELT
COOLING FAN
361D-2-17
475-2-1
476-1
661-1
M9
488-2-2
361D-3-16
477-6
476-2
660-1-15
660-2-14
653-2-1
659-1
656-15-1
653-1-2
659-2
656-14-2
488-1-3
C(T)
361D-4-15
477-5
476-3
476-4
PRCB 1/2
TOTAL COUNTER
361D-5-14
477-4
476-5
21 22
C(BK)
387-1
387-2
387-3
388-1
361D-6-13
477-3
650-1A 5V2
659-4
656-13-3
LASER
CORRECTION
MOTOR/C
BLACK COUNTER
PAPER EXIT SENSOR
M10
388-2
361D-7-12
477-2
476-6
550-3A A
650-2A 5V2
659-3
656-12-4
PS7
388-3
361D-8-11
477-1
360-20B PGND
360-19B SGND
659-5
656-11-5
LASER
CORRECTION
SENSOR/C
491-4-1
491-3-2
361B-20-1
367-12-1
650-4A A
659-6
656-10-6
658-3
658-2
M5
491-2-3
361B-19-2
367-11-2
360-18B SURF_EVK
650-5A B
650-6A B
656-9-7
658-1
POLYGON
MOTOR/C
PAPER EXIT FULL SENSOR
G
491-1-4
361B-18-3
367-10-3
360-17B 24V2
650-7A SGND
656-8-8
657-6
657-5
FIXING COOLING FAN/1
306-1
306-2
558-1
558-2
558-3
361B-17-4
367-9-4
360-16B PGND
650-8A PS
19 20
558-4
361B-16-5
367-8-5
360-15B SGND
360-14B SURF_EVC
656-7-9
656-6-10
657-4
657-3
M8
GAMMA SHUTTER
SOLENOID
CRB/R
558-5
382-1
382-2
382-3
361B-15-6
367-7-6
650-9A 5V2
650-10A TEMP.ERROR
656-5-11
656-4-12
657-2
LASER
CORRECTION
MOTOR/M
GAMMA SENSOR
383-4
381-3
381-2
382-4
361B-14-7
367-6-7
360-13B 24V2
650-11A LOCK
650-12A CLOCK
656-3-13
657-1
383-3
383-2
SD2 CRB/F
381-1
379-1
379-2
361B-13-8
367-5-8
360-12B PGND
650-13A CONT
652-2-1
PS6
383-1
498-4
498-3
379-3
379-4
361B-12-9
367-4-9
360-11B SGND
656-1-15
656-2-14
652-1-2
LASER
CORRECTION
SENSOR/M
499-4
498-2
361B-11-10
367-3-10
360-9B 24V2
360-10B SURF_EVM
17 18
498-1
361B-10-11
367-2-11
574-3 GND
M4
378-1
361B-9-12
367-1-12
360-8B PGND
360-7B SGND
574-1 5V
574-2 M_TEMP2
POLYGON
MOTOR/M
377-1A-11A
361B-8-13
366-8-1
360-5B 24V2
360-6B SURF_EVY
M7
378-2
375-1
361B-7-14
366-7-2
573-3 GND
LASER
CORRECTION
MOTOR/Y
COLOR REGISTRATION
SHUTTER SOLENOID
PGND
SGND
361B-6-15
366-6-3
360-4B TDSKVREF
573-1 5V
573-2 M_TEMP1
PS5
375-2
375-3
375-4
374-1
361B-5-16
366-5-4
360-3B SGND
LASER
CORRECTION
SENSOR/Y
SURFK_EV
24V2
PGND
361B-4-17
366-4-5
360-1B 12V
360-2B TONERK_S
M3
374-2
374-3
374-4
373-1
373-2
373-3
373-4
361B-3-18
366-3-6
POLYGON
MOTOR/Y
SGND
SURFC_EV
24V2
PGND
SGND
SURFM_EV
372-1
372-2
361B-2-19
366-2-7
24V2
PGND
SGND
372-3
372-4
371-4-1
371-3-2
361B-1-20
366-1-8
600-19 SGND
600-20 SCAN_CK
499-3
24V2
TDS_VREF
SGND
371-2-3
371-1-4
360-19A SGND
360-20A TDSCVREF
160
499-2
12V
TDS_SIG
361C-12-1
361C-11-2
600-17 SGND
600-18 SCAN_EN
159
370-4-1
370-3-2
360-17A 12V
360-18A TONERC_S
156
SGND
361C-10-3
158
TDS_VREF
370-2-3
499-1
12V
600-15 SGND
600-16 SCANVREF
157
TDS_SIG
361C-9-4
360-15A SGND
360-16A TDSMVREF
155
370-1-4
361C-8-5
152
369-4-1
600-12 APS3
600-14 SCAN_PC
600-13 SCAN_CW
DRUM SEPARATION
CLAW SOLENOID
SGND
360-13A 12V
360-14A TONERM_S
600-10 APS1
600-11 APS2
154
TDS_VREF
361C-7-6
361C-6-7
361C-5-8
600-8 M2 EM
600-9 M2 CONT
153
369-3-2
369-2-3
369-1-4
360-12A TDSYVREF
360-11A SGND
360-10A TONERY_S
148
151
12V
361C-4-9
361C-3-10
361C-2-11
150
TDS_SIG
368-4-1
368-3-2
368-2-3
149
TDS_VREF
SGND
600-6 PS1
600-7 SGND
147
TDS_SIG
360-9A 12V
600-5 PS2
600-4 PS3
600-3 PS4
144
361C-1-12
360-8A PCLCONTK
360-7A 24V2
146
368-1-4
361A-10-1
145
12V
365-2-1
600-2 SGND
143
CONT
24V2
361A-9-2
600-1 L1 CONT
140
365-1-2
360-5A 24V2
360-6A PCLCONTC
142
SURFY_EV
PCL K
PRECHARGING
LAMP/K
361A-8-3
361A-7-4
620-7 DSET
620-6 CTS
620-5 SGND
141
364-2-1
364-1-2
24V2
360-3A 24V2
360-4A PCLCONTM
139
CONT
361A-6-5
361A-5-6
620-3 RTS
620-4 SOUT
136
363-2-1
363-1-2
360-2A PCLCONTY
360-1A 24V2
138
TDS K
PCL C
PRECHARGING
LAMP/C
24V2
361A-4-7
361A-3-8
137
CONT
362-2-1
362-1-2
TONER
DENSITY
SENSOR/K
PCL M
24V2
CONT
620-1 SIN
PRECHARGING
LAMP/M
I
135
PCL Y
H
620-2 SGND
134
361A-2-9
5.3
PRECHARGING
LAMP/Y
F
361A-1-10

APPENDIX

9
POLYGON MOTOR/K
TEMP
DETECTION
BOARD
23 24
APPENDIX
Symbol
Part name
Location
Symbol
Part name
Location
TDS Y
Toner density sensor /Y
2-H
CRB /F
Color registration board /F
5-H
TDS M
Toner density sensor /M
2-H
CRB /R
Color registration board /R
6-H
TDS C
Toner density sensor /C
2-H
TDS K
Toner density sensor /K
3-H
M3
Polygon motor /Y
3-A
M4
Polygon motor /M
5-A
M5
Polygon motor /C
6-A
M6
Polygon motor /K
8-A
M7
Laser correction motor /Y
4-A
M8
Laser correction motor /M
6-A
M9
Laser correction motor /C
7-A
M10
7-G
M11
8-H
M12
Drum cooling fan /1
9-G
M13
Drum cooling fan /2
9-G
PCL Y
1-H
PCL M
1-H
PCL C
1-H
PCL K
1-H
PS5
Laser correction motor /Y
4-A
PS6
Laser correction motor /M
5-A
PS7
Laser correction motor /C
7-A
PS8
5-I
PS9
6-I
PS11
Gamma sensor
6-H
PS12
Paper exit full sensor
7-G
PS13
Paper exit sensor
7-G
PS14
Toner supply unit open/close sensor
9-G
SD1
Drum separation claw solenoid
5-H
SD2
Color Registration shutter solenoid
5-H
SD3
Gamma shutter solenoid
7-H
DRPS Y
3-I
DRPS M
3-I
DRPS C
4-I
DRPS K
4-I
DRPSB Y
3-H
DRPSB M
3-H
DRPSB C
4-H
DRPSB K
4-H
TDB
Temp detection board
8-A
PRCB
1-D
C (T)
Total counter
8-G
C (BK)
Black counter
8-G
Appendix-6
I
1
2
3
4
335-3
335-2
PS68
355-4-1
355-3-2
355-2-3
355-1-4
356-8
356-9
356-10
356-11
M18
M19
341-7-1
341-6-2
341-5-3
341-4-4
341-3-5
341-2-6
341-1-7
345-4-1
345-3-2
345-2-3
345-1-4
342-7-1
342-6-2
342-5-3
342-4-4
342-3-5
342-2-6
342-1-7
346-4-1
346-3-2
346-2-3
346-1-4
343-7-1
343-6-2
343-5-3
343-4-4
343-3-5
343-2-6
343-1-7
347-4-1
347-3-2
347-2-3
347-1-4
344-7-1
344-6-2
344-5-3
344-4-4
344-3-5
344-2-6
344-1-7
348-4-1
348-3-2
348-2-3
348-1-4
349-2
349-3
349-4
349-5
349-6
349-7
349-8
349-9
349-10
349-11
350-1
350-2
350-3
350-4
350-5
350-6
350-7
350-8
350-9
350-10
350-11
351-1
351-2
351-3
351-4
351-5
351-6
351-7
351-8
351-9
351-10
351-11
352-1
352-2
352-3
352-4
352-5
352-6
352-7
352-8
352-9
352-10
352-11
PS15
349-1
359-1
291-3-1
291-2-2
291-1-3
50
359-2
49
359-3
358-6-1
358-5-2
358-4-3
358-3-4
51
358-2-5
45
46
48
47
41
42
Appendix-7
44
M20
M21
M22
43
37
38
340-1B H/L
70 69 72 116 73 74
71
117
340-2B LOCK
467-1 SOUT
340-3B CW/CCW
340-4B CLOCK
340-5B START/STOP
467-2 SGND
467-3 CTS
467-4 SIN
467-5 SGND
467-6 RTS
572-4 N.C
572-3 N.C
470-2-3
470-1-4
463-4-1
463-3-2
463-2-3
463-1-4
471-5-5
471-4-6
471-3-7
471-2-8
471-1-9
40
39
33
5V2
SGND
24V2
PGND
IP
COOLING FAN
IPB
COOLING FAN
34
469-6
469-5
469-2
469-3
469-1
469-4
468-6-1
468-5-2
468-4-3
468-3-4
468-2-5
468-1-6
470-3-2
471-6-4
5V2
M25
340-6B SGND
340-7B 5V2
340-8B H/L
572-2 N.C
572-1 N.C
464-19 PGND
470-4-1
471-7-3
DCPS1
471-8-2
471-9-1
465-1-11
465-2-10
465-3-9
465-4-8
465-5-7
465-6-6
465-7-5
465-8-4
465-9-3
465-10-2
465-11-1
SGND
12V
SGND
24V2
PGND
24VAC
PGND
340-9B LOCK
340-10B CW/CCW
340-11B CLOCK
340-12B START/STOP
464-18 H/L
464-16 DRIVE
(24V1)
464-17 STFAN_ER
464-15 PGND
464-14 H/L
(24V1)
464-13 STFAN_ER
464-12 DRIVE
464-11 SIN2-2
464-10 SOUT2-2
464-9 SGND
464-8 LTSCLCNT
464-7 LTRCLCNT
464-6 LTSSDCNT
464-5 LTCCLCNT
464-4 SGND
464-3 LTSO_SIG
464-2 LTPR_SIG
464-1 LTNPSIG
466-1
466-2
466-3
466-4
466-5
466-6
466-7
466-8
M24
340-13B SGND
340-14B 5V2
37-1 OP_SOUT
37-2 OP_DTR
37-3 OP_CTS
37-4 OP_SIN
37-5 OP_DSR
COIN VENDOR
340-1A H/L
37-7 SGND
37-6 OP_RTS
LCT (OPTION)
340-2A LOCK
340-3A CW/CCW
340-4A CLOCK
340-5A START/STOP
340-6A SGND
340-7A 5V2
340-8A H/L
340-9A LOCK
340-10A CW/CCW
340-11A CLOCK
340-12A START/STOP
340-13A SGND
340-14A 5V2
357-9 5V2
357-8 PS
357-7 SGND
357-6 24V2
357-5 24V2
357-4 B
357-3 B
357-2 A
357-1 A
353-1 H/L
353-2 LOCK
353-3 CW/CCW
353-4 CLOCK
DEVELOPING
MOTOR/K
354-1-7
356-7
52
DEVELOPING
MOTOR/C
354-2-6
356-6
25 29
PRCB 2/2
DEVELOPING
MOTOR/M
354-3-5
356-5
37-9 24V
37-8 COPV_ENB
63 64
DEVELOPING
MOTOR/Y
354-4-4
356-4
353-7 5V2
353-5 CONT
353-6 SGND
1st TRANSFER
HP SENSOR
354-5-3
356-3
37-10 GND
37-11 5V2
35-10 PGND
35-9 CPF1
35-8 CPF0
35-7 CVUP_SIG
35-6 CV_SIZE3
35-5 CV_SIZE2
35-4 CV_SIZE1
35-3 CV_SIZE0
35-2 CVFD_SIG
CV
(SERIAL)
1st TRANSFER
PRESSURE/RELEASE
MOTOR
354-6-2
356-2
353-8 5V2
353-9 PS
353-10 SGND
353-11 5V2
353-12 PS
353-13 SGND
309-18B SGND
309-17B 5V2
309-16B ENA2
309-15B ENA1
35-1 CVM1_SIG
CV
(PARALLEL)
358-1-6
354-7-1
304-4-3
304-5-2
304-6-1
304-1-6
304-2-5
304-3-4
298-9-1
298-8-2
298-7-3
298-6-4
309-14B H/L2
309-13B H/L1
309-12B ENABLE
300-2 AC_OFF
300-1 MRL_OFF
COIN VENDOR
356-1
289-3
289-2
289-1
305-3
332-1
332-2
332-3
332-4
298-5-5
298-4-6
298-3-7
309-11B FH
309-10B CLOCK
TRANSFER BELT
MOTOR
PS69
ENCODER SENSOR/BELT2
H
305-2
305-1
DRDB/K
ENCODER SENSOR/BELT1
334-1 5V2
334-2 PS
334-3 SGND
332-5
332-6
332-7
298-2-8
298-1-9
300-4 S_VV
300-3 EE_VV
176
335-1
334-4 5V2
334-5 PS
332-8
332-9
299-1-2
299-2-1
300-5 REM/4
300-6 SGND
300-7 P_PTOP
ENCODER
SENSOR/K2
M17
334-6 SGND
337-3 W
DRDB/C
178
336-3
338-1
333-2
333-1
309-9B SGND
309-8B 5V2
309-7B ENA2
177
336-2
336-1
337-2 V
296-9-1
296-8-2
296-7-3
26 30
337-1 U
325-1
325-2
325-3
300-9 SGND
300-8 P_VTOP
172
175
ENCODER
SENSOR/K1
PS64 PS65
174
338-2
338-3
327-1 5V2
327-2 PS
309-6B ENA1
309-5B H/L2
300-10 PK_IDX
173
DRUM
MOTOR/K
328-3
296-6-4
309-4B H/L1
171
328-2
325-4
325-5
296-5-5
300-11 PC_IDX
168
327-3 SGND
325-6
309-3B ENABLE
300-12 PM_IDX
170
328-1
327-4 5V2
296-4-6
296-3-7
309-1B CLOCK
309-2B FH
169
329-3
325-7
296-2-8
296-1-9
ENCODER
SENSOR/C2
M16
327-5 PS
DRDB/M
325-8
325-9
167
327-6 SGND
330-3 W
300-14 SGND
300-13 PY_IDX
164
331-1
297-1-2
297-2-1
300-15 P_CTS
300-16 P_STS
309-18A SGND
300-17 P_RTS
309-17A 5V2
300-18 P_CMD
309-16A ENA2
309-15A ENA1
166
329-2
329-1
330-2 V
326-2
326-1
27 31
330-1 U
294-9-1
294-8-2
294-7-3
294-6-4
303-2 SGND
165
ENCODER
SENSOR/C1
PS62 PS63
318-1
318-2
318-3
318-4
309-14A H/L2
309-13A H/L1
303-1 5V2
302-6 N.C
302-5 N.C
163
331-2
331-3
320-1 5V2
320-2 PS
320-3 SGND
294-5-5
294-4-6
309-12A ENABLE
309-11A FH
309-10A CLOCK
302-3 24V2
302-4 PGND
162
321-3
321-2
318-5
318-6
294-3-7
294-2-8
294-1-9
321-1
320-4 5V2
320-5 PS
318-7
318-8
318-9
295-1-2
295-2-1
302-2 PGND
302-1 24V1
301-4 SGND
301-3 SGND
301-2 12V
301-1 5V2
161
DRUM
MOTOR/C
M15
322-3
DRDB/Y
320-6 SGND
323-3 W
323-2 V
319-2
319-1
309-9A SGND
309-8A 5V2
309-7A ENA2
309-6A ENA1
309-5A H/L2
309-4A H/L1
309-3A ENABLE
309-2A FH
53 54 56 57 59 60
55
58
322-2
322-1
324-1
323-1 U
292-9-1
292-8-2
292-7-3
292-6-4
292-5-5
292-4-6
309-1A CLOCK
ENCODER
SENSOR/M2
PS60 PS61
311-1
311-2
311-3
311-4
311-5
311-6
311-7
28 32
324-2
324-3
313-1 5V2
313-2 PS
313-3 SGND
313-4 5V2
313-5 PS
292-3-7
292-2-8
292-1-9
ENCODER
SENSOR/M1
314-3
314-2
314-1
315-3
311-8
311-9
293-1-2
293-2-1
DRUM
MOTOR/M
ENCODER
SENSOR/Y2
M14
315-2
G
313-6 SGND
316-3 W
312-2
312-1
ENCODER
SENSOR/Y1
315-1
317-1
316-2 V
316-1 U
317-2
317-3
5.4
DRUM
MOTOR/Y

APPENDIX

9
FNS (OPTION)
67
65 66 68
36
35
M23
PS66 PS67
APPENDIX
Symbol
Part name
Location
PS60
Encoder sensor /Y1
1-I
PS61
Encoder sensor /Y2
2-I
PS62
Encoder sensor /M1
2-I
PS63
Encoder sensor /M2
2-I
PS64
Encoder sensor /C1
3-I
PS65
Encoder sensor /C2
3-I
PS66
Encoder sensor /K1
4-I
PS67
Encoder sensor /K2
4-I
PS69
Encoder sensor /BELT1
4-G
PS68
Encoder sensor /BELT2
5-G
FNS
FNS (option)
8-A
LCT
LCT (option)
6-A
M14
Drum motor /Y
1-I
M15
Drum motor /M
2-I
M16
Drum motor /C
3-I
M17
Drum motor /K
4-I
M18
Transfer belt motor
5-G
M19
6-G
M20
Developing motor /Y
7-G
M21
Developing motor /M
7-G
M22
Developing motor /C
8-G
M23
Developing motor /K
9-G
M24
IP cooling fan
7-A
M25
IPB cooling fan
8-A
PS15
6-G
CV
Coin vendor (parallel)
4-A
CV
Coin vendor (serial)
5-A
DRDB /Y
Drum drive board /Y
1-G
DRDB /M
Drum drive board /M
2-G
DRDB /K
Drum drive board /C
3-G
DRDB /C
Drum drive board /K
4-G
Appendix-8
I
179
180
181
1
182
183
184
185
99
101
186
187
188
100
189
190
PRCB
F/G
102
191
103
192
104
105
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
204
205
203
4
206
207
208
209
210
211
PRCB
106
212
215
213
216
214
5
219
217
218
220
223
221
222
224
225
402-5-9
227
226
228
229
402-6-8
402-7-7
402-8-6
402-9-5
402-10-4
402-11-3
402-12-2
402-13-1
566-1-2
566-2-1
401-6B-11B
230
401-7B-10B
401-8B-9B
401-9B-8B
231
401-10B-7B
401-11B-6B
401-12B-5B
401-13B-4B
232
233
234
401-14B-3B
401-15B-2B
235
236
239
237
238
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
Appendix-9
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
413-2
413-1
409-2-4
409-3-3
409-4-2
409-5-1
416-1-13
416-2-12
416-3-11
416-4-10
416-5-9
416-6-8
416-7-7
416-8-6
416-9-5
401-12A-3A
401-13A-2A
401-14A-1A
415-1B-16B
415-2B-15B
415-3B-14B
415-4B-13B
415-5B-12B
415-6B-11B
415-7B-10B
415-8B-9B
415-9B-8B
NO PAPER
SENSOR/2
TRAY /1
257
255
256
258
261
259
260
262
263
264
419-3
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
419-2
156-4
419-1
FNS
268-1 12V
268-2 GND
268-4 5VIN
268-3 5VOUT
268-6 24V
268-5 GND
156-2
418-3
TRAY UPPER LIMIT

SENSOR/2
123-1
123-10
108-4 SGND
108-3 24V1
108-2 SGND
108-1 5V2
105-4 SGND
105-2 5V2
105-6 N.C
105-5 24V1
105-1 5V2
105-3 SGND
104-10 PGND
104-5 24V1
418-2
PRCB
68 107
418-1
PREREGISTRATION
SENSOR/2
DRDB
DCPS4
123-9
123-8
123-7
123-6
123-5
67
417-3
PAPER SIZE VR/1
123-3
123-4
64
417-2
417-1
413-3
409-1-5
401-11A-4A
412-3
401-10A-5A
401-9A-6A
PAPER SIZE/L1
156-5
412-2
CH12
412-1
104-8 SGND
SW1
401-8A-7A
123-2
104-2 5V2
104-9 PGND
104-4 24V1
401-7A-8A
PAPER SIZE/S1
63
411-3
411-2
58
401-6A-9A
401-5A-10A
106
57
411-1
56
401-4A-11A
PS31 MC7 MC8 SD7
REMAINING PAPER
SENSOR/1
104-7 SGND
104-6 SGND
104-3 12V
104-1 5V2
103-3 3.5V
103-5 SGND
103-6 SGND
55
410-3
IPB
54
410-2
103-4 SGND
103-2 5V2
53
401-3A-12A
102-4 AC_OFF
103-1 12V
10
401-2A-13A
410-1
HTR2
401-1A-14A
145-1
145-2
PICK UP
SOLENOID/1
HTR1
408-2
144-1
144-2
408-1
OACB
PREREGISTRATION
CLUTCH/1
PAPER FEED
CLUTCH/1
407-2
PS30
407-1
156-1
406-2
406-1
102-3 REM/1
102-2 SGND
CBR2
405-3
PS29
NO PAPER
SENSOR/1
102-1 5V1
TRNS1
405-2
143-1
143-2
141-1
141-2
TRANSFORMER/MAIN BODY
405-1
TRAY UPPER LIMIT

SENSOR/1
140-4
142-4
109
404-3
404-2
404-1
PREREGISTRATION
SENSOR/1
121B-3
401-16B-1B
402-4-10
EUROPE ONLY
403-3
M28
403-2
M27
403-1
M26
401-5B-12B
105
PAPER EXIT
FAN/F
155-5 H1(N)
484-4
104
484-3
155-4 H1(H)
401-4B-13B
103
484-2
155-2 H1(N)
402-3-11
102
484-1
101
485-4
FIXING UNIT
PAPER EXIT
FAN/M
155-1 H1(H)
401-3B-14B
100
121B-4
TRANSFORMER/LCT
402-2-12
99
485-3
98
485-2
AC(N)
485-1
70
TRNS2
402-1-13
97
RL3
24V1
PAPER EXIT
FAN/R
RL2
24V1
121B-2
NF
401-2B-15B
96
121A-4
140-1
142-1
140-2
142-2
140-3
142-3
FT15
401-1B-16B
FHCB
121A-3
121A-2
121A-1
486-4
152-1
152-2
RL1
24V1
120-5
FT9
152-3
152-4
152-5
152-6
120-3
120-4
POWER PLUG
152-7
152-8
152-9 -24VIN
152-10 PGND
152-11 PGND
120-1
120-2
FT7
486-3
69
153-4 24VAC(N)
AC(H)
486-2
107
153-3 24VAC(H)
486-1
153-1 24V1
153-2 NC
482-1-12
482-2-11
482-3-10
482-4-9
482-5-8
482-6-7
482-7-6
482-8-5
482-9-4
482-10-3
482-11-2
482-12-1
157-4 5V2
FT19 AC_N
157-3 L2_CONT
ACDB
131-A1 - A4
131-A2 - A3
131-A3 - A2
131-A4 - A1
131-B1 - B4
131-B2 - B3
131-B3 - B2
131-B4 - B1
98
FT6
131-1 - 1
97
158-1
Y/G
131-4 - 4
G
FT5
131-3 - 3
BT-4
BT-2
BT-3
BT-1
157-2 L3_CONT
F
158-2
FT4
157-1 SGND
FT2
FT3
158-3
CBR1
158-4
FT18
FT17
131-2 - 2
96
146-1
FT18 AC_N
FT1
146-2
146-2
FT17 AC_N
130-A1 - A4
130-A2 - A3
130-A3 - A2
130-A4 - A1
130-B1 - B4
130-B2 - B3
130-B3 - B2
130-B4 - B1
H
130-4 - 4
146-1
130-3 - 3
E
FT16 AC_H
5.5
130-2 - 2
130-1 - 1

APPENDIX

9
MAIN POWER SWITCH
FT10
101-1 AC(H)
101-2 NC
DCPS1 1/2
FT8
AC(N)
84
85
ACDB CVDB
130 131
132 133
TRAY /2 1/2
PS32
PS33
PS34
VR1
PS35
PS36
PS37
265
APPENDIX
Symbol
Part name
Location
CBR1
Circuit breaker /1
1-A
CBR2
Circuit breaker /2
1-B
DCPS1
DC power suply unit /1
6-A
DCPS4
DC power suply unit /4 (HD-106)
9-D
RL1
Main relay
4-D
RL2
DCPS2 relay
4-D
RL3
HTR relay
4-D
HTR1
Heater /1
6-E
HTR2
Heater /2
6-E
M26
Paper exit fan /R
5-F
M27
Paper exit fan /M
5-F
M28
Paper exit fan /F
6-F
MC7
7-F
MC8
7-F
PS29
6-F
PS30
6-F
PS31
No paper sensor /1
6-F
PS32
8-F
PS33
Paper size /S1
8-F
PS34
Paper size /L1
8-F
PS35
9-F
PS36
9-F
PS37
No paper sensor /2
9-F
SD7
Pick up solenoid /1
7-F
SW1
Main power switch
3-A
TRNS1
Transformer/main body
5-C
TRNS2
Transformer/LCT
5-C
VR1
Paper size VR /1
8-F
NF
Noise filter
2-A
Power plug
1-B
ACDB
AC drive board
1-D
FHCB
Fixing heater control board
2-F
Appendix-10
I
416-12-2
416-13-1
567-1-2
567-2-1
415-12B-5B
266
415-13B-4B
267
415-14B-3B
415-15B-2B
268
269
1
270
273
271
272
274
277
275
276
278
279
280
2
281
423-5-1
430-1-13
430-2-12
430-3-11
430-4-10
430-5-9
430-6-8
430-7-7
430-8-6
430-9-5
430-10-4
430-11-3
430-12-2
430-13-1
568-1-2
568-2-1
415-14A-1A
429-1B-16B
429-2B-15B
429-3B-14B
429-4B-13B
429-5B-12B
429-6B-11B
429-7B-10B
429-8B-9B
429-9B-8B
429-10B-7B
429-11B-6B
429-12B-5B
429-13B-4B
429-14B-3B
429-15B-2B
444-1
423-4-2
415-13A-2A
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
291
289
290
3
292
293
294
295
296
297
299
298
300
301
302
4
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
311
310
312
317
313
5
314
315
316
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
335
334
336
337
338
339
340
341
Appendix-11
343
344
342
345
347
346
348
349
110
111
112
350
351
354
352
353
355
18 20
22 24
33 34 37 38 41 42 45 46 35 36 39 40 43 44 47 48
52 51 95 49 50 94
M4
M5
M6
M20,M21,M22,M23
M18
PS52
PS53
M42
356
357
358
462-4-1
21 23
M3
462-3-2
DCPS COOLING FAN
17 19
462-2-3
462-1-4
124-8
124-7
124-6
124-2
124-5
124-1
83
124-3
124-4
82
461-3
PS51
WASTE TONER DOOR SENSOR
M41
115-5 N.C
115-8 PGND
115-7 PGND
115-6 PGND
115-4 PGND
115-3 PGND
115-2 24V2
115-1 24V2
114-5 24V2
114-4 24V2
114-9 PGND
114-8 PGND
114-7 PGND
114-3 24V2
114-6 PGND
114-2 24V2
114-1 NC
113-3 24V2
113-1 24V2
113-4 PGND
113-2 PGND
461-2
PAPER FEED MOTOR
461-1
M41
81
WASTE TONER FULL SENSOR
80
460-3
113
460-2
HV1
112
479-3-1
111
479-2-2
PRCB
93 110
460-1
92
479-1-3
60
458-1
458-2
458-3
458-4
458-5
458-6
458-7
458-8
458-9
458-10
458-11
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE DOOR SENSOR
125-10
125-1
126-10
126-1
456-1-7
456-2-6
456-3-5
456-4-4
456-5-3
456-6-2
456-7-1
457-1-4
457-2-3
457-3-2
457-4-1
455-3
MC13 PS50
455-2
125-9
125-8
125-7
125-6
125-5
59
452-8-1
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SENSOR
125-3
125-4
90
452-7-2
455-1
454-3
454-2
INTERMEDIATE CONVEYANCE CLUTCH/1
TSDB
452-6-3
452-5-4
452-4-5
454-1
M40
453-2
M39
452-3-6
453-1
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/1
M38
452-2-7
451-2
125-2
126-9
126-8
126-7
126-6
126-5
126-4
126-3
126-2
112-6 N.C
112-4 N.C
112-5 PGND
112-3 PGND
451-1
PS49
450-2
PS48
450-1
VR4
PAPER SIZE/LBP
BY-PASS TRAY
449-2
449-1
447-3
PS47
452-1-8
443-12-1
128-5
128-1
112-2 24V2
112-1 24V2
110-1 AC(H)
447-2
447-1
446-3
446-2
128-8
128-7
128-6
128-4
128-3
127-5
127-1
112-2
443-11-2
443-10-3
443-9-4
443-8-5
446-1
445-3
445-2
445-1
128-2
127-8
127-7
127-6
127-4
127-3
127-2
111-11 PGND
111-12 PGND
443-7-6
443-6-7
443-5-8
443-4-9
VR3
444-3
PS46
443-3-10
PS45
PAPER SIZE/SBP
437-5-1
429-14A-1A
PS44
PAPER SIZE VR/BP
437-4-2
429-13A-2A
PAPER SIZE VR/3
TRAY /3
NO PAPER SENSOR/BP
441-1
437-3-3
429-12A-3A
91
444-2
441-2
437-2-4
429-11A-4A
111-9 24V2
111-8 24V2
111-7 24V2
111-10 PGND
111-3 24V2
111-6 PGND
111-5 PGND
111-2 24V2
111-4 PGND
109-8 12V
109-7 SGND
109-6 SGND
109-5 5V2
109-4 5V3
109-3 5V3
109-2 SGND
443-2-11
441-3
LCT
437-1-5
89
429-10A-5A
PAPER SIZE/L2
88
440-3
440-2
72
429-9A-6A
429-8A-7A
FNS
440-1
71
429-7A-8A
PAPER SIZE/S2
66
439-3
65
429-6A-9A
PS43 MC11 MC12 SD9
439-2
ADF
429-5A-10A
16
439-1
SCDB
438-3
15
429-4A-11A
OB1
14
429-3A-12A
13
REMAINING
PAPER SENSOR/3
79
438-2
111-1 24V2
110-4 AC(N)
429-2A-13A
438-1
IP-921
429-1A-14A
PICK UP
SOLENOID/3
TRAY /2 2/2
436-2
PREREGISTRATION
CLUTCH/3
PAPER FEED
CLUTCH/3
136
436-1
PS42
109
435-2
PS41
435-1
VR2
434-2
PS40
434-1
PS39
433-3
PS38
NO PAPER
SENSOR/3
135
433-2
141 134
433-1
140
432-3
TRAY UPPER LIMIT

SENSOR/3
139
432-2
138
432-1
B
109-1 SGND
112-3
431-3
PREREGISTRATION
SENSOR/3
431-2
PAPER SIZE VR/2
443-1-12
427-1
423-3-3
415-12A-3A
429-16B-1B
427-2
423-2-4
415-11A-4A
PAPER SIZE/L2
107-7 12V
DCPS1 2/2
431-1
427-3
426-3
423-1-5
415-10A-5A
415-9A-6A
426-2
107-2 5V2
107-5 SGND
107-4 SGND
107-1 5V2
107-6 SGND
107-3 5V2
106-4 SGND
106-1 5V2
106-7 12V
106-8 SGND
106-3 5V2
106-6 SGND
106-5 SGND
106-2 5V2
415-8A-7A
PAPER SIZE/S2
78
426-1
425-3
77
415-7A-8A
415-6A-9A
TSDB
425-2
76
415-5A-10A
75
425-1
REMAINING PAPER
SENSOR/2
87
415-4A-11A
424-3
MC9 MC10 SD8
415-3A-12A
ADF
86
424-2
LCT
424-1
115
415-2A-13A
117 114
415-1A-14A
PICK UP
SOLENOID/2
116
422-2
SCDB
74
422-1
73
421-2
12
PREREGISTRATION
CLUTCH/2
11
421-1
PAPER FEED
CLUTCH/2
F
420-2
420-1
415-16B-1B
416-11-3
G
416-10-4
415-11B-6B
5.6
415-10B-7B

APPENDIX

9
IP-921 (OPTION)
DCPS3
A
112-1
DCPS2
110-2 NC
137
110-3 NC
121
CVDB
113
359
APPENDIX
Symbol
Part name
Location
DCPS2
DC power supply unit /2
4-A
DCPS3
DC power supply unit /3 (IP-921)
3-A
M38
7-F
M39
7-F
M40
7-F
M41
Paper feed motor
8-F
M42
DCPS cooling fan
9-F
MC9
1-F
MC10
1-F
MC11
3-F
MC12
4-F
MC13
7-F
PS38
2-F
PS39
Paper size /S2
2-F
PS40
Paper size /L2
2-F
PS41
3-F
PS42
3-F
PS43
No paper sensor /3
3-F
PS44
4-F
PS45
Paper size /S2
5-F
PS46
Paper size /L2
5-F
PS47
No paper sensor /BP
6-F
PS48
Paper size /SBP
6-F
PS49
Paper size /LBP
6-F
PS50
Vertical conveyance sensor
7-F
PS51
Vertical conveyance door sensor
8-F
PS52
Waste toner full sensor
9-F
PS53
Waste toner door sensor
9-F
SD8
Pick up solenoid /2
1-F
SD9
Pick up solenoid /3
4-F
VR2
Paper size VR /2
2-F
VR3
Paper size VR /3
5-F
VR4
Paper size VR /BP
6-F
Appendix-12
I
MC1
MC2
ADU
CONVEYANCE
CLUTCH/2
1
SD4
REVERSE/
EXIT
ADU
REGISTRATION
SOLENOID REVERSE/
ADU
REVERSE
SENSOR
EXIT
ADU
ADU
CONVEYANCE
SENSOR
SENSOR
PREADU
PRECLUTCH/1
STRATION
CONVEYANCE
REGISTRATION
CLUTCH
SENSOR
SENSOR
PS19
PS20
PS21
2
MC3
PS22
PS23
118
119
120
3
PS24
PS55
2nd
CONVEYANCE
TRANSFER
LEVER
HP
SENSOR
SENSOR
4
5
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
REGISTRATION
ROLLER
MOTOR
LOOP
ROLLER
MOTOR
ADU
REVERSE
MOTOR
REVERSE/
EXIT MOTOR
2nd TRANSFER
PRESSURE/RELEASE
MOTOR
CONVEYANCE UNIT
TRAY UP
DRIVE
MOTOR/BP
M35
PAPER
PICK UP
INTERMEDIATE
SOLENOID/ FEED
CONVEYANC
CLUTCH/
BP
CLUTCH/2
BP
INTERMEDIATE
CONVEYANC
CLUTCH/3
TRAY
BY-PASS
INTERMEDIATE
UPPER CONVEYANCE
CONVEYANCE
LIMIT
SENSOR
INTERMEDIATE
SENSOR/2
SENSOR/BP
CONVEYANCE
SENSOR/1
PS25
PS26
PS27
MC5
Appendix-13
SD5
539-A1 DRIVE
SD6
CHARGER/C
ADU LOCK
SOLENOID
CHARGER/K
734-8
734-7
730-1B DEVEKCLOCK
730-2B DEVEKDCV
730-3B DEVEACK
263
93
HV1
414-9A PS
260
264
414-8A SGND
262
414-10A 5V2
261
414-11A SGND
414-12A PS
414-13A 5V2
259
734-6
DEVELOPING BIAS/K
414-14A SGND
414-15A PS
414-16A 5V2
256
730-4B DEVEDCK
730-5B CHGK_ER
730-6B GKDCV
730-7B CHGKDCV
400-1B SGND
258
734-5
734-4
734-3
734-2
730-8B CHGKCONT
400-2B T1DET(H)
257
DEVELOPING BIAS/C
DEVELOPING BIAS/M
734-1
730-9B SGND
730-10B DEVECDCV
730-11B DEVEACC
255
733-8
400-4B VR
400-3B SGND
254
733-7
733-6
730-12B DEVEDCC
253
733-5
400-5B 3.3V
250
730-13B CHGC_ER
730-14B GCDCV
730-15B CHGCDCV
400-7B PS
400-6B SGND
252
733-4
733-3
730-16B CHGCCONT
251
DEVELOPING BIAS/Y
GRID/C
733-2
733-1
400-8B 5V2
249
545-1-2
730-1A DEVECCLOCK
730-2A DEVEMDCV
PRCB(2/2) 1/2
732-8
246
732-7
400-9B SGND
400-10B PS
400-11B 5V2
248
539-A2 24V2
730-3A DEVEACM
730-4A DEVEDCM
730-5A CHGM_ER
730-6A GMDCV
247
732-6
732-5
732-4
732-3
400-13B PS
400-12B SGND
545-2-1
CHARGER/M
539-A3 DRIVE
GRID/M
544-1-2
539-A4 24V2
730-7A CHGMDCV
730-8A CHGMCONT
400-15B N.C
400-14B 5V2
245
544-2-1
732-2
732-1
400-1A N.C
400-16B N.C
242
539-A5 5V2
539-A6 PS
730-9A SGND
730-10A DEVEYDCV
730-11A DEVEACY
730-12A DEVEDCY
730-13A CHGY_ER
244
557-1-3
557-2-2
731-8
731-7
731-6
731-5
731-4
243
543-3
CHARGER/Y
539-A7 SGND
539-A8 DRIVE
539-A9 24V2
GRID/Y
557-3-1
541-1-2
400-3A 24V2
400-2A DRIVE
241
543-2
543-1
MC4
730-14A GYDCV
730-15A CHGYDCV
730-16A CHGYCONT
238
731-3
731-2
731-1
400-5A 24V2
240
541-2-1
539-A11 24V2
539-A10 DRIVE
92
400-4A DRIVE
239
540-1-2
735-2 NC
400-6A DRIVE
400-7A 24V2
400-8A SGND
400-9A PS
400-10A 5V2
237
540-2-1
MS1
735-1 24V2
500-17B 24V
500-16B LOCK SD
500-15B
735-3 PGND
121
539-B1 5V2
539-B2 PS
539-B3 SGND
501-16B-2B
501-17B-1B
234
556-1-3
556-2-2
556-3-1
502-16B-2B
502-17B-1B
236
542-3
542-2
503-1B N.C
563-2-1
563-1-2
400-12A PS
400-11A SGND
235
542-1
539-B4 SGND
503-2B N.C
503-3B TR4_CW
120
555-1-6
539-B6 5V2
85
539-B5 PS
500-14B
400-13A 5V2
233
547-3
555-2-5
555-3-4
503-4B TR4_CONT
500-13B
500-12B
230
547-2
539-B7 SGND
503-5B H/L
503-6B LOCK
232
547-1
555-4-3
539-B9 5V2
539-B8 PS
231
546-3
555-5-2
400-14A SGND
400-15A PS
400-16A 5V2
229
555-6-1
F/G
500-11B
500-10B
500-9B
226
503-7B CW/CCW
503-8B CLOCK
500-8B
228
546-2
503-10B BPCLCONT
503-9B START/STOP
150-5B EM
150-6B DRIVE
227
546-1
539-B10 1
539-B11 2
500-7B
150-4B H/L
553-2
553-1
503-11B MCL3CONT
500-6B
150-3B PGND
222
225
548-1 B
503-12B MCL2CONT
500-5B
500-4B
150-1B EM
150-2B DRIVE
224
548-2 B
503-13B APCLCONT
503-14B AMC2CONT
500-3B
150-12A H/L
223
548-3 A
548-4 A
503-15B AMC1CONT
500-2B
150-11A PGND
221
548-5 24V2
548-6 24V2
503-16B EXSDCONT
500-1B
500-17A
218
550-1
550-2
550-3
550-4
550-5
550-6
503-1A REG_CONT
503-17B BPSDCONT
150-9A EM
150-10A DRIVE
220
524-7 N.C
524-6 B
500-16A
150-8A H/L
219
524-5 B
524-4 A
503-2A 12V
500-15A
214
217
524-3 A
503-3A FRL_SIG
150-7A PGND
216
524-2 24V2
524-1 24V2
500-14A
150-7B N.C
150-8B FIXTEMP4
215
503-4A BPNF_SIG
500-13A
500-12A
150-9B FIXTEMP4
525-2
525-5
525-1
525-3
525-4
525-6
503-5A REV_SIG
503-6A HAN2_SIG
500-11A
150-10B FIXTEMP3
150-11B FIXTEMP3
213
503-7A HAN1_SIG
500-10A
500-9A
500-8A
211
503-8A FD_OPEN
503-9A FEXT_SIG
503-10A ADUR_SIG
212
534-12 B
534-11 B
150-5A FIXTEMP2
150-12B FIXTEMP3
210
534-10 A
534-9 A
500-7A
150-4A FIXTEMP2
150-3A FIXTEMP1
207
503-11A REG_SIG
500-6A
500-5A
150-2A FIXTEMP1
209
534-8 24V2
503-12A BMAX_SIG
503-13A ADUH_SIG
500-4A
208
534-7 24V2
534-6 B
534-5 B
503-14A ADUP_SIG
150-1A FIXTEMP1
206
534-4 A
500-3A
500-2A
203
503-15A SGND
500-1A
205
534-3 A
503-17A DDRV_Txd
204
503-16A DDRV_Rxd
534-2 24V2
CVDB
534-1 24V2
151-7 L4_DRIVE
151-8 PWRL_DRIVE
(REM/2)
150-6A FUSERSET
202
536-6 B
151-6 L3_DRIVE
199
536-5 B
151-5 L2_DRIVE
201
536-4 A
507-5 5V2
84
507-6 SGND
83
536-3 A
82
536-2 24V2
536-1 24V2
151-3 H1_DRIVE
151-4 MRL_DRIVE
200
538-2
538-5
538-1
538-3
538-4
538-6
535-3
535-9
535-1
535-5
535-7
535-11
535-2
535-4
535-6
535-8
535-10
537-2
537-5
537-1
537-3
537-4
537-6
151-1 5V2
151-2 S_GND
198
507-4 PGND
81
507-3 PGND
80
527-1 SGND
504-1
504-2
504-3
504-4
504-5
504-6
504-7
504-8
501-1A-17A
501-2A-16A
501-3A-15A
501-4A-14A
501-5A-13A
501-6A-12A
501-7A-11A
501-8A-10A
501-9A-9A
501-10A-8A
501-11A-7A
501-12A-6A
501-13A-5A
501-14A-4A
501-15A-3A
501-16A-2A
501-17A-1A
501-1B-17B
501-2B-16B
501-3B-15B
501-4B-14B
501-5B-13B
501-6B-12B
501-7B-11B
501-8B-10B
501-9B-9B
501-10B-8B
501-11B-7B
501-12B-6B
501-13B-5B
501-14B-4B
501-15B-3B
FRONT
DOOR
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
197
565-3
PS18
505-1
505-2
505-3
505-4
505-5
505-6
505-7
505-8
502-1A-17A
502-2A-16A
502-3A-15A
502-4A-14A
502-5A-13A
502-6A-12A
502-7A-11A
502-8A-10A
502-9A-9A
502-10A-8A
502-11A-7A
502-12A-6A
502-13A-5A
502-14A-4A
502-15A-3A
502-16A-2A
502-17A-1A
502-1B-17B
502-2B-16B
502-3B-15B
502-4B-14B
502-5B-13B
502-6B-12B
502-7B-11B
502-8B-10B
502-9B-9B
502-10B-8B
502-11B-7B
502-12B-6B
502-13B-5B
502-14B-4B
502-15B-3B
135-1-2
195
507-2 24V2
507-1 24V2
TH4
196
527-2 PS
FT20
527-3 5V2
527-4 SGND
506-1A
506-2A
FIXING
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/4
565-2
554-1-3
508-1
508-2
194
565-1
549-3
527-5 PS
527-6 5V2
135-2-1
193
554-2-2
554-3-1
TH2
134-3-1
134-2-2
134-1-3
549-2
527-7 SGND
506-1B
506-2B
M54
508-3
508-4
532-3
532-2
FRONT DOOR
OPEN/CLOSE
SENSOR
527-8 PS
119
527-9 5V2
118
509-3-1
509-2-2
FIXING
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/2
549-1
527-11 PS
WEB MOTOR
527-10 SGND
532-1
FT30
551-1-3
509-1-3
137-1
3191-01P1
192
531-3
527-12 5V2
571-1-4
FIXING PRESSURE/
FIXING
RELEASE SENSOR EXIT SENSOR
551-2-2
570-1-4
571-2-3
FIXING UNIT
551-3-1
569-4 B
570-2-3
L4
FIXING LOWER HEATER LAMP
191
531-2
527-14 PS
527-13 5V2
569-3 B
TS2
133-1-2
190
531-1
530-1-3
530-2-2
527-15 SGND
FT29
533-3
530-3-1
571-3-2
571-4-1
TH3
133-2-1
189
533-2
533-1
570-3-2
570-4-1
PS17
569-2 A
569-1 A
FIXING
EMPERATURE
SENSOR/3
527-16 DRIVE
517-3
516-3-1
FT24
527-17 24V2
517-2
188
529-1-2
514-6-1
517-1
516-2-2
515-3
516-1-3
187
529-2-1
518-1 SGND
513-2 PS
513-1 SGND
514-5-2
514-4-3
514-3-4
TH1
185
518-2 PS
518-3 5V2
513-3 5V2
515-2
515-1
186
521-1-6
521-2-5
518-4 SGND
513-5 PS
513-4 SGND
514-2-5
514-1-6
523-3
523-2
521-3-4
518-6 5V2
518-5 PS
513-6 5V2
PS16
523-1
521-4-3
521-5-2
518-7 SGND
FIXING
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR/1
522-3
522-2
552-1-3
M29
521-6-1
522-1
132-3-1
132-2-2
132-1-3
182
184
520-3
FIXING MOTOR
510-1 24V2
183
518-8 PS
FT22
FT21
518-9 5V2
FT26
552-2-2
552-3-1
L3
FT25
510-2 24V2
510-3 PGND
FT28
520-2
510-5 H/L
510-4 PGND
L2
FIXING
UPPER HEATER LAMP/2
FT27
520-1
518-10 DRIVE
TS1
FIXING UPPER HEATER LAMP/1
181
518-11 24V2
510-6 LOCK
510-7 CW/CCW
FT23
518-12 DRIVE
510-8 CLOCK
510-9 START/STOP
512-1
512-2
512-3
512-4
512-5
512-6
512-7
512-8
512-9
512-10
512-11
F/G
518-13 24V2
511-1-11
511-2-10
511-3-9
511-4-8
511-5-7
511-6-6
511-7-5
511-8-4
511-9-3
511-10-2
511-11-1
519-1-2
510-11 5V2
180
526-2
526-1
H
510-10 SGND
179
519-2-1
G
518-15 24V2
518-14 DRIVE
528-1-2
5.7
528-2-1

APPENDIX

9
265
GRID/K
F/G
MC6
PS28
APPENDIX
Symbol
Part name
Location
Symbol
Part name
Location
TS1
Thermostat /1
1-C
Developing bias /Y
9-E
TS2
Thermostat /2
2-C
Developing bias /M
9-E
HV1
High voltage unit /1
7-C
Developing bias /C
9-E
L2
Fixing upper heater lamp /1
1-B
Developing bias /K
9-E
L3
Fixing upper heater lamp /2
1-B
Charger /Y
7-E
L4
Fixing lower heater lamp
2-B
Charger /M
8-E
M29
Fixing motor
1-D
Charger /C
8-E
M30
Registration roller motor
4-H
Charger /K
8-E
M31
Loop roller motor
4-H
Grid /Y
7-E
M32
ADU reverse motor
4-H
Grid /M
7-E
M33
Reverse/exit motor
5-H
Grid /C
8-E
M34
6-H
Grid /K
8-E
M35
Tray up drive motor /BP
6-H
PRCB
3-A
M54
Web motor
2-D
CVDB
1-F
MC1
1-H
MC2
1-H
MC3
ADU Pre-registration clutch
2-I
MC4
7-H
MC5
7-H
MC6
8-H
PS16
Fixing pressure/release sensor
2-D
PS17
Fixing exit sensor
2-D
PS18
3-D
PS19
Reverse/Exit sensor
1-I
PS20
ADU conveyance sensor
2-I
PS21
ADU reverse sensor
2-I
PS22
Registration sensor
2-I
PS23
ADU Pre-registration sensor
3-I
PS24
2nd Transfer HP sensor
3-I
PS25
6-I
PS26
By-pass conveyance sensor
7-I
PS27
7-I
PS28
8-I
PS55
Conveyance lever sensor
3-I
SD4
Reverse/Exit solenoid
1-H
SD5
Pick up solenoid /BP
8-H
SD6
ADU lock solenoid
7-F
MS1
Front door interlock switch
3-D
TH1
1-C
TH2
3-C
TH3
2-C
TH4
3-C
Appendix-14
I
2
3
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
4
MS2
TONER SUPPLY
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
TONER
TONER
TONER
TONER
BOTTLE
BOTTLE
BOTTLE
BOTTLE
CLUTCH/Y CLUTCH/M CLUTCH/C CLUTCH/K
MC14 MC15 MC16 MC17
Symbol
M49
TONER SUPPLY
MOTOR/Y
Appendix-15
M50
M51
M52
TONER SUPPLY
MOTOR/M
TONER SUPPLY
MOTOR/C
TONER SUPPLY
MOTOR/K
708-1 24V2
701-1B-13B
700-1B DBLT_CLOCK
358
PRCB(2/2) 2/2
95
TEMP/HUMIDITY
SENSOR
459-1 DRIVE
459-2 EM
459-3 H/L
459-4 PGND
357
702-13B
459-6 PS
459-5 SGND
356
700-2B DBLT_CNT
700-3B TBK_CLOCK
700-4B TBK_EN
459-7 5V2
353
701-2B-12B
701-3B-11B
701-4B-10B
700-5B KBCL_DRIVE
700-6B TBK_SIG
355
702-12B
702-11B
702-10B
701-6B-8B
701-5B-9B
459-8 SGND
459-9 PS
459-10 5V2
354
708-2 24V2
702-9B
702-8B
700-7B TBC_CLOCK
700-8B TBC_EN
700-9B CBCL_DRIVE
708-3 PGND
708-4 PGND
700-11B SGND
700-10B TBC_SIG
352
708-5 H/L
701-7B-7B
701-8B-6B
701-9B-5B
701-10B-4B
700-12B CHFAN_ON
349
702-7B
701-12B-2B
701-11B-3B
442-2B EM
442-1B H/L
351
708-6 LOCK
702-6B
702-5B
702-4B
702-3B
702-2B
700-13B CHFAN_ER
700-1A TBO_SIG
442-5B CONT
442-4B CLOCK
442-3B CW/CCW
350
708-7 CW/CCW
708-8 CLOCK
708-9 CONT
708-10 SGND
708-11 5V2
701-1A-13A
701-13B-1B
700-2A SGND
700-3A TB_5V_SIG
346
348
702-1B
702-13A
701-3A-11A
701-2A-12A
442-7B 5V2
442-6B SGND
347
726-12 24V2
726-11 24V2
702-12A
702-11A
700-4A TBM_SIG
700-5A MBCL_DRIVE
442-9B PS
442-8B SGND
342
345
726-10 B
701-5A-9A
701-4A-10A
700-6A TBM_EN
344
726-9 B
702-9A
702-10A
701-6A-8A
442-10B 5V2
343
726-8 A
726-7 A
702-8A
700-7A TBM_CLOCK
700-8A TBY_SIG
442-12B PS
442-11B SGND
341
726-6 24V2
726-5 24V2
701-8A-6A
701-7A-7A
700-9A YBCL_DRIVE
442-13B 5V2
338
702-7A
702-6A
701-9A-5A
700-10A TBY_EN
700-11A TBY_CLOCK
340
726-4 B
702-5A
701-11A-3A
701-10A-4A
442-15B 24V2
442-14B DRIVE
339
726-3 B
726-2 A
726-1 A
702-4A
702-3A
700-12A H/L
700-13A DRV_ERR
334
337
705-7 N.C
701-13A-1A
701-12A-2A
442-17B 24V2
442-16B DRIVE
336
705-6 24V2
702-2A
702-1A
393-12B N.C
393-11B 5V2
393-10B HUM
709-1
709-2
709-3
709-4
709-5
709-6
709-7
709-8
709-9
709-10
709-11
705-3 B
705-5 24V2
703-6
DCPS2
88
91
90
89
705-4 B
704-6 PGND
703-4
703-5
442-2A 24V2
442-1A DRIVE
333
705-2 A
704-4 24V2
704-5 PGND
393-9B SGND
332
705-1 A
393-7B PGND
393-8B TEMP
335
728-1-6
728-2-5
728-3-4
728-4-3
728-5-2
728-6-1
TSDB
706-6 24V2
398-3-1
399-4
399-3
399-2
399-1
442-4A 24V2
442-3A DRIVE
727-1-6
727-2-5
727-3-4
727-4-3
727-5-2
727-6-1
707-1-6
707-2-5
707-3-4
707-4-3
707-5-2
707-6-1
TONER DCPS1
TONER
TONER
TONER
TONER
SUPPLY
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
DOOR
DETECTION LEVEL DETECTION
DETECTION SENSOR/M DETECTION SENSOR/K OPEN/CLOSE
87
86
SENSOR/Y
SENSOR/C
SENSOR
706-5 24V2
M47
704-3 24V2
WRITING
WRITING
WRITING
WRITING
DRUM UNIT
INTAKE FAN/1 INTAKE FAN/2 EXHAUST FAN/1 EXHAUST FAN/2
FAN
703-3
393-6B EM
393-5B DRIVE
331
706-4 B
703-2
703-1
TLD_Y TLD_M TLD_C TLD_K PS54
704-1 5V2
M46
704-2 SGND
398-2-2
398-1-3
442-6A PS
442-5A SGND
330
706-3 B
725-3
725-2
393-4B PGND
442-7A 5V2
329
706-2 A
724-2 PS
397-4-1
442-9A PS
442-8A SGND
328
724-1 SGND
725-1
393-3B H/L
393-2B ER
393-1B DRIVE
442-10A 5V2
327
724-3 5V2
397-3-2
397-2-3
397-1-4
393-12A PGND
393-11A H/L
324
721-3
721-2
M45
326
724-4 SGND
721-1
396-4-1
396-3-2
442-11A SGND
442-12A VR
442-13A 3.3V3
325
724-5 TLD_SIG
724-6 5V
718-3
718-2
M44
393-10A EM
393-9A DRIVE
393-8A PGND
320
323
724-7 SGND
396-2-3
396-1-4
395-4-1
322
724-8 TLD_SIG
718-1
715-3
715-2
442-15A PS
442-14A SGND
321
724-9 5V
724-10 SGND
393-7A H/L
393-6A ER
442-17A N.C
442-16A 5V2
319
724-11 TLD_SIG
M43
395-3-2
395-2-3
393-5A DRIVE
393-4A PGND
316
715-1
712-3
395-1-4
428-1B SGND
428-2B T3DET(H)
318
724-12 5V
712-2
712-1
393-3A H/L
393-2A EM
393-1A DRIVE
317
724-13 SGND
724-14 TLD_SIG
394-3-2
394-4-1
394-2-3
394-1-4
706-1 A
711-1 CONT
472-3-1
M48
(24V1)
724-15 5V
724-16 DRIVE
INDICATOR LAMP
741-1-8
711-2 24V2
472-2-2
CHAGER
INTAKE FAN
722-2
741-2-7
724-17 EM
428-4B VR
428-3B SGND
315
722-1
711-3 CONT
M37
741-3-6
472-1-3
428-5B 3.3V
428-6B SGND
428-7B PS
428-8B 5V2
428-9B SGND
428-10B PS
428-11B 5V2
314
719-2
724-18 PGND
391-1A 24V
391-2A PAT1_DRIVE
391-3A PAT2_DRIVE
391-4A PAT3_DRIVE
428-13B PS
428-12B SGND
310
313
711-4 24V2
495-5
495-1
495-2
495-3
391-5A PAT4_DRIVE
391-9B PGND
391-6A PGND
391-7A H/L
428-15B N.C
428-14B 5V2
312
741-4-5
FIXING
COOLING
FAN/2
495-4
495-6
392-4
392-3
391-8A FFAN_ER
428-1A N.C
428-16B N.C
306
309
719-1
E
391-9A DRIVE
B
308
711-5 CONT
KEY
COUNTER
391-1B PGND
391-2B H/L
428-3A 24V2
428-2A DRIVE
302
305
711-6 24V2
FIXING
COOLING
FAN/3
304
311
741-5-4
M36
392-2
391-4B DRIVE
391-3B EM
428-5A 24V2
428-4A DRIVE
298
301
307
741-6-3
C(K)
391-5B KEY_SET
391-6B PGND
716-2
F/G
300
303
711-7 CONT
493-2
494-2
391-7B KEY_CONT
428-7A 24V2
428-6A DRIVE
294
297
392-1
493-1
494-1
391-8B 24V
428-8A SGND
296
307-1
307-2
307-3
307-4
493-3
HV2
493-4
94
494-3
C
428-9A PS
428-10A 5V2
293
494-4
736-12B SEPA_ER
428-11A SGND
428-12A PS
428-13A 5V2
290
739-1 24V2
739-2 NC
739-3 PGND
736-11B SEPA_DCI
736-10B SEPA_ACI
736-9B SEPA_CNT
736-8B 2ND_ER
292
738-1
738-2
738-3
738-4
428-14A SGND
428-15A PS
428-16A 5V2
414-1B SGND
414-2B T2DET(H)
414-3B SGND
414-4B VR
414-5B 3.3V
289
738-5
414-7B PS
414-6B SGND
286
736-7B 2ND_GAIN
736-6B 2ND_VI
736-5B 2ND_CONT
736-4B GPCONT
736-1B N.C
736-2B N.C
736-3B SGND
736-12A TRANSKER
736-11A TRANSKI
736-10A TRANSK
736-9A TRANSCER
736-8A TRANSCI
736-7A TRANSC
736-6A TRANSMER
414-8B 5V2
288
738-6
738-7
738-8
738-9
738-10
737-1
737-2
737-3
737-4
737-5
737-6
737-7
736-5A TRANSMI
736-4A TRANSM
736-3A TRANSYER
414-9B SGND
414-10B PS
414-11B 5V2
284
285
299
716-1
H
737-8
737-9
737-10
414-13B PS
414-12B SGND
280
283
295
713-2
G
711-8 24V2
PAPER EXIT
FAN/3
282
291
741-7-2
741-8-1
PAPER EXIT
FAN/2
713-1
PAPER EXIT
FAN/1
276
279
287
GUIDE PLATE
M63
736-2A TRANSYI
414-15B N.C
414-14B 5V2
SEPARATION
M62
736-1A TRANSY
(New type only)
278
2nd TRANSFER
M61
572-10
572-9
572-8
572-7
414-1A N.C
414-16B N.C
272
275
1st TRANSFER/K
754-3-1
754-2-2
572-6
572-5
274
281
1st TRANSFER/C
751-6-1
753-3-1
414-3A 24V2
414-2A DRIVE
269
271
277
710-2-1
710-1-2
F
572-4
414-5A 24V2
414-4A DRIVE
1st TRANSFER/M
751-5-2
753-2-2
572-3
572-2
A
270
273
737-11
751-4-3
753-1-3
737-12
751-3-4
268
754-1-3
751-2-5
752-3-1
414-7A 24V2
414-6A DRIVE
267
1st TRANSFER/Y
D
752-2-2
572-1
266
751-1-6
5.8
752-1-3

APPENDIX

9
359
TEMP
/HUM
M53
TONER BOTTLE MOTOR
APPENDIX
Symbol
Part name
Location
C(K)
Key counter
3-D
TEMP/HUM
Temp/Humidity sensor
7-D
HV2
High voltage unit /2
2-C
M36
4-D
M37
4-E
M43
Writing intake fan /1
5-D
M44
Writing intake fan /2
6-D
M45
Writing exhaust fan /1
6-D
M46
Writing exhaust fan /2
6-D
M47
Drum unit fan
7-D
M48
Chager intake fan
5-E
M49
Toner supply motor /Y
7-I
M50
Toner supply motor /M
7-I
M51
Toner supply motor /C
8-I
M52
Toner supply motor /K
8-I
M53
Toner bottle motor
9-H
M61
Paper exit fan /1
1-D
M62
Paper exit fan /2
1-D
M63
Paper exit fan /3
1-D
MC14
Toner bottle clutch /Y
5-I
MC15
Toner bottle clutch /M
5-I
MC16
Toner bottle clutch /C
5-I
MC17
Toner bottle clutch /K
5-I
PS54
Toner supply door open/close sensor
6-E
TLD Y
Toner level detection sensor /Y
5-E
TLD M
Toner level detection sensor /M
6-E
TLD C
Toner level detection sensor /C
6-E
TLD K
Toner level detection sensor /K
6-E
MS2
Toner supply interlock switch
4-I
Indicator lamp
5-D
Guide plate
3-F
Separation
3-F
2nd transfer
3-E
1st transfer /Y
2-F
1st transfer /M
2-F
1st transfer /C
2-F
1st transfer /K
2-E
Toner supply drive board
5-F
TSDB
Appendix-16

8050 C500 Cf5001manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

8050 C500 Cf5001manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND

as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.

DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

:Precaution when using the copier.

Do not touch with wet hand

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY

Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)

Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by KMBT

Using parts not specified by KMBT

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

Connection to Power Supply

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Power Plug and Cord

Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Power Plug and Cord

Prohibited Installation Place

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

When not using product for a long time

Inspection before Servicing

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Inspection before Servicing

Work Performed with the Copier Powered

Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Overall protection circuit

Overall protection circuit

1.1 Protection by circuit breaker /1 (CBR1) and circuit breaker /2 (CBR2)

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

2.1 Protection by software

2.2 Protection by the hardware circuit

2.3 Protection by thermostat /1 (TS1) and thermostat /2 (TS2)

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Unplug the machine before removing platen glass.

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

KONICA MINOLTA 8050/CF5001/C500/8150 Field Service Ver.3.0 Dec. 2004

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

Composition of the service manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii

Notation of the service manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ix

1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

5. CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Checking method of the P function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

List of adjustment items for 25 mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6